HOLDEN - VF Commodore Sedan and Wagon - 2014 - Owner Manual

VF SEDAN & SPORTWAGON
VF SEDAN & SPORTWAGON

OWNER’S HANDBOOK
HOLDEN.COM.AU
GM Holden Ltd, ABN 84 006 893 232 (hereinafter Holden)
Change of name, address or ownership

In the event of a Safety Recall, or for various reasons,
Holden may need to contact you as the owner of this vehicle.
If you have recently changed your address, or name, or purchased this
vehicle second-hand, please help us to help you by taking a few minutes
to fill in and mail the forms at the beginning of the Service/warranty booklet.
For information about GM Holden’s privacy policy or to update owner
details online, please visit Holden’s website at www.holden.com.au
Note Please refer to the inside front cover of the Service/
warranty booklet for the Vehicle Identification Certificate.
Printed in Australia
Part No. 92259318
June 2014 (MY14 VF Sedan & Sportwagon. Print 7)
© 2014 GM Holden Ltd

Reproduction in whole or part is prohibited
without written approval from GM Holden Ltd,
ABN 84 006 893 232
MY14_VF_Sedan&Sportwagon_IFC.indd 1 23/06/2014 1:53:22 PM

Holden VF Sedan and Sportwagon Owner Manual - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13 Black plate (1,1)
2014 Holden VF Sedan and Sportwagon

Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Additional Storage Features . . . 4-4 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Keys, Doors, and Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Information on Loading the Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Bluetooth Phone/Devices . . . . . 7-69
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Instrument Panel Overview . . . . 5-3
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Warning Lights, Gauges, and Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Vehicle Personalisation . . . . . . . 5-32 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-9
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
2014 Holden VF Sedan and Sportwagon

Owner Manual M
Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-17 Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-23 Recommended Fluids,
Driver Assistance Systems . . . 9-36 Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 11-2
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-53 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Vehicle Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Wheels and Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Introduction iii
iv Introduction
Introduction
. Depending on the model variant,
This Owner's Handbook provides
integrated special equipment { Warning
and accessories, the scope of
you with all the necessary equipment of your vehicle can Text marked { Warning
information to enable you to drive differ from the descriptions in provides information on risk of
your vehicle safely and efficiently. this Owner's Handbook. accident or injury. Disregarding
Make sure your passengers are . The Bluetooth® word mark and this information may lead to injury.
aware of the possible risk of logo are registered trademarks
accident and injury which may result and are owned by the Bluetooth
from improper use of the vehicle. SIG, Inc.
. iPod® is a registered trademark
{ Caution
Using this Manual of Apple Inc. Text marked Caution provides
. The In brief section will give you . ®
ESP is a registered trademark information on possible damage
an initial overview. of Daimler AG. to the vehicle. Disregarding this
. The table of contents at the information may lead to vehicle
beginning of this manual and Danger, Warnings, and damage.
within each chapter shows
where the information is located.
Cautions
. The index will enable you to
search for specific information.
{ Danger
. Directional data, e.g. left or right, Text marked { Danger provides
or front or back, always relate to information on risk of fatal injury.
the direction of travel. Disregarding this information may
endanger life.
Holden VF Sedan and Sportwagon Owner Manual (Holden-Localizing-Holden- Black plate (1,1)
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
In Brief 1-1
In Brief Initial Drive Door Locks

Information
Initial Drive Information
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Remote Keyless Entry
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 (RKE) System
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-2
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 1-5
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . 1-6
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
To lock, insert the key into the
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
driver's door lock and turn towards
Washer and Wiper
the rear of the vehicle, then turn it
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 back to the vertical position and
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 remove.
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Q: Lock and arm the alarm This will lock all doors including the
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 K: Unlock and disarm the alarm tailgate (Sportwagon).
V: Boot unlock (Sedan) To unlock, turn the key towards the
front of the vehicle to unlock the
See Keys on page 2-1. driver's door.
See Door Locks on page 2-10. See Keys on page 2-1.
See Door Locks on page 2-10.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
1-2 In Brief
Seat Adjustment Head Restraint

The vehicle may have the following Adjustment
levers and switches for seat
adjustment. { Warning
The head restraint is a safety
feature.
The centre of the head restraint
should be at eye level, never at
neck level.
1. Recline
2. Lumbar
3. Height (up/down)
4. Lift for forwards/backwards
5. Lumbar
6. Recline
7. Forwards/backwards, up/down,
cushion tilt
See Seat Position on page 3-3.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
In Brief 1-3
. Lift the head restraint up to . To adjust horizontally, pull the The vehicle may have adjustable
raise it. front head restraint forwards and rear head restraints, these can be
. Push the locking button and engage in one of three positions. removed.
push the head restraint down to . To return to its rearmost position, See Head Restraints on page 3-1.
lower it. pull fully forwards and release.
See Child Restraint Systems on
. Front head restraints cannot be page 3-20.
removed.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
1-4 In Brief
Seat Belts Mirror Adjustment Exterior mirrors

Rear view mirror Power mirrors
Pull the metal tongue across your

body into the buckle, until it clicks L: Left side mirror selected
into place. Push the lever on the lower edge of
the mirror towards the front of the R: Right side mirror selected
The belt should not be twisted. vehicle, then adjust the position of
It should lie flat and fit firmly across the mirror. ): No mirrors selected
your hips. To adjust an exterior rear view
To reduce headlamp glare from
To remove, press the release button following vehicles, pull the lever mirror:
on the buckle to allow the belt to towards the rear of the vehicle. 1. Press the switch (2) to L or R.
retract.
See Manual Rear view Mirror on 2. Press the switch (1) to adjust the
See Three-Point Seat Belt on page 2-19. mirror.
page 3-10.
See Power Mirrors on page 2-18.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
In Brief 1-5
Steering Wheel 3. Move the lever up to lock.

Adjustment 4. Ensure the steering wheel is
locked in position before driving.
{ Warning See Steering Wheel Controls on
page 5-5.
Do not attempt to adjust the
steering wheel while driving.
1. Move the lever down to unlock.

2. Move the steering wheel up,
down, closer or away.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
1-6 In Brief
Instrument Panel Overview

6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
In Brief 1-7
1. Vents. See Adjustable Air Vents 13. Lever for: 20. Hazard Warning Flashers on
on page 8-6. Turn and Lane-Change Signals page 6-4.
2. Glove Box on page 4-1. on page 6-4. 21. Climate control switches. See
3. Vents. See Adjustable Air Vents Headlamp High/Low-Beam Air Conditioning System on
on page 8-6. Changer on page 6-2. page 8-1.
4. Infotainment system controls. Driver Information Centre (DIC) 22. Electric Parking Brake on
See Overview on page 7-3. under Instrument Panel page 9-15.
5. Infotainment screen. See Overview on page 5-3. 23. Electronic stability control
Overview on page 7-3. 14. Exterior Lamp Controls on switch. See Electronic Stability
page 6-1. Control (ESC) on page 9-18.
6. Sunlight sensor. See Air Park Assist
Parking switches.
Assist SeeSee
switches. Park
Conditioning System on 15. Instrument panel illumination Parking
Assist onAssist
page on page 9-26.
9-26.
page 8-1. switch. See Interior Lighting on
page 1-8. 24. Front Storage on page 4-3.
7. Engine Start/Stop button. See
Ignition Positions on page 9-4 16. Head-up display controls. See 25. 12 volt power socket. See
Head-Up Display (HUD) on Power Outlets on page 5-9.
8. Windscreen Wiper/Washer on
page 5-7. page 5-24. 26. Shift lever. See Transmission
17. Ignition lock/switch (behind Display on page 9-9.
9. Steering wheel controls. See
Cruise Control on page 9-21. steering wheel). See Ignition
Positions on page 9-4.
10. Horn on page 5-6.
18. Steering Wheel Adjustment on
11. Instrument Cluster on page 5-5.
page 5-13.
19. Heated seat switches. See
12. Steering Wheel Controls on Heated Front Seats on
page 7-7. page 3-7.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
1-8 In Brief
Interior Lighting Exterior Lighting High/low beam
+: On/off O: Off High beam: Push lever

4: Door activated AUTO: Automatic headlamps Low beam: Push the lever forward
again
Dome Lamps on page 6-5. ;: Park lamps
Headlamp flash: Pull lever
Reading Lamps on page 6-6. 2: Headlamps
The high beam lamps can be
Glove Box Lamps on page 6-6. #: Fog lamps flashed even if the headlamps and/
Load Compartment Lamps on D: Instrument lighting dimmer or ignition are off.
page 6-5. See Exterior Lamp Controls on See Exterior Lamp Controls on
Battery Power Protection on page 6-1. page 6-1.
page 6-7. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer on page 6-2.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
In Brief 1-9
Turn signals Hazard warning flasher Horn
Left: Lever up Press | to turn the hazard warning Press a on either side.
Right: Lever down flasher on and off when the ignition
is in any position.
See Exterior Lamp Controls on
page 6-1. See Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 6-4.
See Turn and Lane-Change Signals
on page 6-4.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
1-10 In Brief
Washer and Wiper See Windscreen Wiper/Washer on Parking

page 5-7.
Systems 1. Apply the park brake.
See Washer Fluid on page 10-14.
2. Automatic transmission: Select
Climate Controls position P.
Manual transmission: If facing
uphill or on flat ground, select
1st gear. If facing downhill,
select reverse gear.
3. Shut all windows.
4. Turn the ignition off and remove
the key from the vehicle.
5. Press Q on the key to lock all
doors and to arm the alarm
Mist: Wipers cycle while the lever is system.
held up
OFF: Off
The climate control panel is located
INT: Intermittent wipe in the centre of the dashboard.
LO: Slow Settings for the driver and
HI: Fast passenger can be adjusted
independently.
L: Pull to wash the windscreen.
The wipers will also cycle for a See Air Conditioning System on
short time. page 8-1.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
In Brief 1-11
Transmission While in Sport Shift mode, move the Getting Started

shift lever to the + or – position to
Automatic transmission enable Active Select (A/S) mode. Check before starting
See Automatic Transmission on . Check that windows, mirrors and
page 9-9. lamps are clean.
Manual transmission
. Visually check tyre inflation.
Check the tyre pressures
Manual transmissions have six each week.
forward gears and a reverse gear.
. Ensure that all doors are closed
The shift pattern is shown on top of
the shift lever. and secured.
To select R, move the shift lever
. Position your seat for
sideways against spring pressure to comfortable driving.
engage reverse gear. . Adjust rear view mirrors.
Note: On V6 vehicles, moving the . Fasten seat belts.
P: Park shift lever with momentum will
reduce the effort required to
. Check that the warning
R: Reverse select R. indicators illuminate when
turning the ignition on.
N: Neutral See Manual Transmission on
page 9-12 See Driving Environment on
D: Drive page 9-2.
+/–: For Sport Shift mode, move the See Starting the Engine on
shift lever to position D then push to page 9-7.
the left.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
1-12 In Brief
Starting the engine ON: When the key is in the ON

position, the engine is ready to start
{ Warning and all electrical systems are active.
Do not leave the switch in the ON
Do not switch the engine off while position for a prolonged period,
the vehicle is moving as there will unless the engine is running,
not be any power assist for the otherwise the vehicle battery will
brakes. discharge.
Never remove the key while the START: Turn the key to the START
vehicle is moving, as this will lock position momentarily and then
the steering. release.
LOCK: The key is inserted and The engine starts automatically.
The vehicle may have an ignition removed only from the LOCK The key returns to the ON position
lock/switch. position. when released.
ACCESSORIES: When the key is in See Ignition Positions on page 9-4.
the ACCESSORIES position, the
audio system and wipers operate.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
In Brief 1-13
Starting the engine with the

. Automatic transmission: Press
Engine Start/Stop button the brake pedal and move the
shift lever to P or N.
{ Warning . Press the ENGINE START/
STOP button.
Do not switch the engine off while
The LED will illuminate.
the vehicle is moving as there will
not be any power assist for the . To switch the engine off, press
brakes. the ENGINE START/STOP
button again.
The vehicle may have an Engine See Starting the Engine on
Start/Stop button. page 9-7.
. The electronic key must be
inside the vehicle.
. Manual transmission: Press
brake and clutch pedals.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
1-14 In Brief
2 NOTES
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors, and Vehicle Security

Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . 2-17
Keys and Locks
Windows Immobiliser Operation . . . . . . . 2-17
Keys
Exterior Mirrors
Sedan
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Keys and Locks Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
INFOCARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Interior Mirrors
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Manual Rear View Mirror . . . . 2-19
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Windows
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Roof
Door Open Reminder . . . . . . . . 2-12
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . 2-12
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Doors
Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 The key operates all locks and the
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 ignition.
. Press Q to lock the doors and to
arm the alarm system.
. Press K to unlock the doors and
to disarm the alarm system. See
Door Locks on page 2-10.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows
. Press and hold V to unlatch . Press K to unlock the doors, Foldaway key blade
the boot lid. See Boot on tailgate and to disarm the alarm The vehicle keys have a foldaway
page 2-13. system. See Door Locks on key blade.
page 2-10 and Tailgate on
. Press Q then press and hold / page 2-15.
for remote vehicle start. See
Remote Vehicle Start on . Press Q then press and hold /
page 2-9. for remote vehicle start. See
Remote Vehicle Start on
Sportwagon page 2-9.
Panic/vehicle locate button
. To locate the vehicle, press %
briefly.
The exterior lamps will flash and
the horn will chirp.
. In an emergency, press and 1. Press the button to extend the
hold % for at least 2 seconds. key blade.
2. To retract the key blade, press
The horn will sound and the turn
the button and fold the blade into
signals will flash.
the key.
. To cancel, press % or insert the The key engages audibly
The key operates all locks and the key and turn the ignition on.
ignition.
. Press Q to lock the doors,
tailgate and to arm the alarm
system.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Matching transmitter(s) to your The features remembered by each The adjustments will be
vehicle of the two memories are: remembered the next time the
Two keyless entry transmitters are . Vehicle configuration settings features are adjusted.
coded to the vehicle. . Climate control settings About the keys
If the vehicle's key is lost, inform a . Radio settings
. The remote control in the key
Holden Dealer immediately so the has a range of approximately
vehicle can be reprogrammed and Features revert to the last setting 100 metres.
will no longer recognise the used for each key.
missing key.
. The range depends on the
Note: charge of the key battery, on
Additional transmitters also require . Two different memories are ambient conditions, the key's
re-coding to match the new available, memory one and location and the area
transmitter. memory two. between them.
Personal identity keys If a third key is made, the third . If the key buttons do not work,
The vehicle may have personal key becomes memory one and move closer to the vehicle.
identity keys. Two sets of settings the other two keys become . Take care that no button is
can be stored. identical memory two keys. pressed unintentionally,
. All features can be customised.
. The personal settings will not be especially when the vehicle is
See Vehicle Personalisation on applied until the K button is out of sight.
page 5-32. pressed on the key and is . Metallic window tint reduces the
. Settings are stored when a identified. range of the key.
personal identity key is removed. . If the vehicle battery has been . If any door/tailgate or the
. Press K to recall the settings.
disconnected, some settings bonnet, is open when Q is
may be forgotten. pressed, the horn will chirp
twice.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13

. The key buttons may not work if . If pressing the key buttons does
the vehicle is parked near strong not work, the doors/tailgate can
INFOCARD
radio activity, such as under TV be locked and unlocked by
towers (most likely in high turning the key in the driver's
lookout car parks). door lock:
. Ensure that other keys on the ‐ Turn the key towards the rear
key ring are not between the key of the vehicle to lock all doors/
and the vehicle. tailgate.
. Always store spare keys in a ‐ Turn the key towards the front
safe, dry place. of the vehicle to unlock the
. Do not disassemble the keys. driver's door. Opening the
door will cause activation of
. At times, a decrease in range the alarm after a preset period
may occur, which is normal. of time. If this occurs, insert
. If the transmitter does not work: the key into the ignition and The security card lists various
turn on. security numbers for the vehicle,
‐ You may need to stand closer
during rainy or snowy weather. including key numbers.
‐ Other vehicles or objects may Keep the card in a safe place, away
be blocking the signal. from the vehicle.
If you are still having trouble, If a key is lost, a replacement can

contact a Holden Dealer. be ordered through any Holden
Dealer by quoting the key code
number, security code number and
providing proof of ownership.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Remote Keyless Entry Remote Keyless Entry If the driver door is open when Q is
(RKE) System (RKE) System Operation pressed, all doors lock except the
driver door and if any closure is
The vehicle may have RKE. The transmitter functions may work open when locking, the horn sounds
Do not make changes or up to 100 m away from the vehicle. twice.
modifications to the RKE system. Keep in mind that other conditions, If the passenger door is open
such as those previously stated, can
If there is a decrease in the when Q is pressed, all doors lock.
operating range: impact the performance of the
.
transmitter. Pressing Q arms the theft-deterrent
Check the distance. The system. See Vehicle Alarm System
transmitter may be too far from on page 2-17.
the vehicle.
When the doors are locked, the fuel
. Check the location. Other door is also locked.
vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
driver door or all doors. See
. Check the transmitter's battery. “Remote Door Unlock” under
. If the transmitter is still not Vehicle Personalisation on
working correctly, see your page 5-32.
dealer for service. The turn signal indicators may flash
See Starting the Engine on and/or the horn may sound to
page 9-7. indicate unlocking. See “Unlock
Feedback” under Vehicle
Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors. Personalisation on page 5-32.
Pressing K will disarm the
theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle
Alarm System on page 2-17.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Pressing K will also unlock the The vehicle can be customised to

fuel door. always unlock all doors on the first
lock/unlock button press. See
V (Remote Boot Release): Press Vehicle Personalisation on
and hold to release the boot. page 5-32.
The buttons on the keys are Keyless Unlocking/Locking from
disabled when there is a key in the the Driver Door
ignition.
When the doors are locked and the
Keyless Access Operation RKE transmitter is within 1 m of the
Some vehicles have a keyless driver door handle, pressing the
access system that lets you lock lock/unlock button on the driver door
and unlock the doors without handle will unlock the driver door.
If the lock/unlock button is pressed Pressing the lock/unlock button will
removing the RKE transmitter from cause all doors to lock if any of the
your pocket, purse, briefcase, etc. again within five seconds, all
passenger doors will unlock. Pull following occur:
The RKE transmitter should be
within 1 m of the door being the door handle to unlatch the door. . It has been more than
opened. If the vehicle has this five seconds since the first lock/
feature, there will be buttons on the unlock button press.
outside door handles. . Two lock/unlock button presses
were used to unlock all doors.
. Any vehicle door has been
opened and all doors are now
closed.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Keyless Unlocking/Locking from vehicle

turned off interior.
and all If at leastare
doors oneclosed,
RKE Keyless Tailgate Opening
the Passenger Doors transmitter
the vehicle has will been
determineremoved how from
many (Sportwagon)
When the doors are locked and the the
RKEinterior of the vehicle,
transmitters remain in thethe
doors Press the touch pad on the rear of
RKE transmitter is within range of will lock interior.
vehicle after eight If atseconds.
least one RKE the tailgate above the number plate
the door handle, pressing the lock/ transmitter has
Temporarily beenthe
disable removed
locking from to open the tailgate when the RKE
unlock button on a passenger the interior of the vehicle,
feature by pressing and holding the doors transmitter is in range.
will lock after eight seconds.
door handle will unlock all doors. the K switch on the door for several
Keyed Access
Pressing the lock/unlock button will seconds
Temporarily withdisable
a door the open. Passive
locking
cause all doors to lock if any of the locking
feature will then remain
by pressing anddisabled
holding For accessing a vehicle with a dead
following occur: until
the K Q switch
theswitch on the on door
the door is
for several transmitter battery, see Door Locks
. The lock/unlock button was used pressed,
seconds or with until the vehicle
a door is
open. Passive on page 2-10.
to unlock all doors. turned
lockingon. will then remain disabled Starting the Vehicle with a Low
. Any vehicle door has been To
until the Q switch
customise whether on thethedoor
doors is Transmitter Battery
opened and all doors are now automatically
pressed, or until lockthe when exiting
vehicle is
For keyless start vehicles, if the
closed. the
turnedvehicle,
on. see “Remote Locking,
transmitter battery is weak, the
Unlocking,
To customise Starting”
whether under Vehicle
the doors DIC may display NO REMOTE
Passive Locking Personalisation on when
page 5-32.
automatically lock exiting the DETECTED when you try to start
IfIf the
the vehicle
vehicle has
has the
the keyless
keyless vehicle, see “Remote Locking, the vehicle. The REPLACE
access system,
system, this
this feature
feature allows
allows Unlocking, Starting” Caution under Vehicle BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
for selecting
selecting whether
whether thethe doors
doors Personalisation on page 5-32. message may also be displayed at
automatically
automatically locklock during
during normal
normal It is recommended that the RKE
this time.
vehicle
vehicle exit.
exit. When
When thethe vehicle
vehicleisis transmitter is kept on your person
turned off and all doors are closed, at all times. Shielding of the RKE
the vehicle will determine how many transmitter or environmental
RKE transmitters remain in the electromagnetic radiation can
interfere with the passive locking
function.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
To start the vehicle: Manual transmission: With the

vehicle in Neutral, and the brake
and clutch pedals pressed,
press the Engine Start/Stop
button.
See Starting the Engine on
page 9-7
Replace the transmitter battery as
soon as possible.
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the REPLACE
BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY 2. Remove the battery cover by
message displays in the DIC. prying it open with a finger.
1. Open the centre console storage
and place the transmitter in the The battery is not rechargeable. To 3. Remove the battery by pushing
transmitter pocket. replace the battery: on the battery and sliding it
toward the key blade.
2. Automatic transmission: With the 1. Push the button on the
vehicle in P (Park) or transmitter to extend the key 4. Insert the new battery, positive
N (Neutral), press the brake blade. side facing up. Push the battery
pedal and press the Engine down until it is held in place.
Start/Stop button. Replace with a CR2032 or
equivalent battery.
5. Snap the battery cover back on
to the transmitter.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Remote Vehicle Start 3. Immediately after completing For example, if the engine has been
Step 2, press and hold / for at running for five minutes, and the
Vehicles with automatic remote start is extended, the engine
transmission have remote start. least two seconds or until the
turn signal lamps flash. The turn will run for a total of 20 minutes.
It allows the engine to be started
from outside the vehicle. signal lamps flashing confirms A maximum of two remote starts,
the request to remote start the or a single start with an extension,
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): The vehicle has been received. is allowed between ignition cycles.
remote start button is on the RKE
transmitter. When the engine starts, the park The vehicle's ignition must be
lamps will turn on and remain on as turned on and then back off before
The climate control system will use long as the engine is running. The the remote start procedure can be
the previous settings during a doors will be locked and the climate used again.
remote start. If the vehicle has control system may come on.
heated seats, they may come on Cancelling a Remote Start
during a remote start. See Heated The engine will continue to run for
10 minutes. Repeat the steps to To cancel a remote start, do one of
Front Seats on page 3-7. the following:
extend to 20 minutes. Remote start
Other conditions can affect the can be extended only once. . Aim the RKE transmitter at the
performance of the transmitter. See
Start the vehicle before driving. See vehicle and press and hold /
System on page 2-5. Starting the Engine on page 9-7. until the park lamps turn off.
Extending Engine Run Time . Turn on the hazard warning
Starting the Vehicle flashers.
To start the engine using the remote To extend to 20 minutes, repeat
Steps 1–3 while the engine is still . Turn the vehicle on and then off.
start feature:
running. The remote start can be
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the extended once.
vehicle.
2. Press and release Q.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Conditions in Which Remote Start Door Locks Danger (Continued)

Will Not Work
The remote vehicle start feature will
not operate if:
{ Danger injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Always lock the
. The key is in the ignition (key Unlocked doors can be vehicle whenever leaving it.
access) or if the key is in the dangerous. . Outsiders can easily enter
vehicle (keyless access). . Passengers, especially through an unlocked door
. The vehicle is unlocked. children, can easily open the when you slow down or stop
doors and fall out of a moving the vehicle. Locking the doors
. The bonnet is not closed. vehicle. When a door is can help prevent this from
. The hazard warning flashers locked, the handle will not happening.
are on. open it. The chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a
. The malfunction indicator lamp crash is increased if the There are several ways to lock and
is on. doors are not locked. So, all unlock the vehicle.
. The engine coolant temperature passengers should wear seat From the outside:
is too high. belts properly and the doors
should be locked whenever
. Press Q or K on the Remote
. The oil pressure is low. Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
the vehicle is driven.
. Two remote vehicle starts, or a From the inside:
. Young children who get into
single remote start with an
unlocked vehicles may be . Push down on the door lock snib
extension, have already
unable to get out. A child can on the top of the door.
been used.
be overcome by extreme heat
. The vehicle is not in P (Park). and can suffer permanent
. Pulling the door handle unlocks
the door. Pulling the door handle
(Continued) again unlatches the door.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
. Press Q or K on the switch on Note: This will not disarm the alarm
. To unlock one door only, pull the
the door. system. interior door handle.
If the vehicle is unlocked using the Pull once to unlock, pull a
key in the door lock while the alarm second time to open.
is armed, opening a door will Door lock snibs
activate the alarm. See Vehicle
Locking/unlocking from the inside
. To lock, insert the key into the

driver's door lock and turn
towards the rear of the vehicle,
then turn back to the vertical .
position and remove. Pushing the snib down on any of
the passenger doors, locks only
This will lock all doors/tailgate that door.
and arm the alarm system.
. To lock, press Q on the door to . Pushing the snib down on the
. To unlock, insert the key into the lock all doors/tailgate. driver's door, locks all doors.
driver's door lock and turn it The driver's door will only lock if
towards the front of the vehicle This will not arm the alarm.
closed.
to unlock the driver's door. . To unlock, press K on the door . A door is locked when the lock
to unlock all doors/tailgate. snib is down.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13

. A door is unlocked when the If any problems occur, contact a To customise whether the doors
lock snib is up. Holden Dealer. automatically lock or unlock when
Free turning door locks shifting out of or into P (Park), see
Door Open Reminder “Door Lock in Park” under Vehicle
The door lock cylinder is designed Personalisation on page 5-32.
to free turn if it is forcefully rotated A chime will sound and the
without the correct key or if the appropriate door message will
display on the Driver Information
Safety Locks
correct key is not fully inserted.
Centre (DIC) if one of the doors Child safety rear door locks
1. To reset, turn the lock with the
is not fully closed. This happens
correct key fully inserted until its
when the ignition is on and the shift
slot is vertical.
lever is moved out of P (Park) or
2. Remove the key, then N (Neutral). See Door open warning
re-insert it. light on page 5-21.
3. If the lock still free turns, turn the
key 180 degrees and repeat the Automatic Door Locks
procedure. The vehicle can be programmed to
Note: This feature is provided as a lock all doors automatically when
theft deterrent, to prevent the lock the following are met:
being forced open. . All doors are closed.
The force required to make the key . The ignition is on.
free turn, reduces each time. . The vehicle is shifted out of Child safety locking helps prevent
Do not attempt to demonstrate or P (Park). rear doors being accidentally
test this feature. opened by small children in the
All doors will unlock when the vehicle.
Always remember to fully insert the vehicle is shifted into P (automatic
key when locking and unlocking the transmission) or when the ignition is
doors. turned off (manual transmission).
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
The locks are accessible when the Doors Key button

door is open.
To prevent the doors from being Boot
opened from the inside, use the
ignition key to turn the switch away
from the vertical position. { Warning
To prevent dangerous exhaust
{ Warning fumes entering the vehicle, close
the boot when the engine is
For safety, always check that the running. If it is necessary to leave
lock is operating correctly (after the boot open (while carrying
setting) by trying to open the door bulky cargo) close all windows,
from inside the vehicle. switch heater controls to 'fresh'
and set fan to highest speed.
Press and hold V on the key to
unlock/open the boot.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Boot release button

. Unlock the boot only when the Emergency boot release
vehicle is stationary.
. The boot locks automatically
when closed.
Note:
. The boot release button is
disabled when all doors are
locked, the alarm is enabled or
the vehicle is moving at greater
than 3 km/h.
. If the boot is not closed properly
when the vehicle is locked, the
horn will sound twice.
. The boot release button is
If this happens, close the boot An emergency boot release is
located on the driver's door. provided behind the centre of the
Pressing this button will unlock/ and relock the vehicle.
rear seat.
open the boot.
1. Press the lock button (located at
. After partially opening the boot the top centre of the middle
lid, gas struts take over to lift seat) all the way down to unlock
and hold the boot lid in the open the seatback.
position.
2. Fold it down to gain access to
the release handle.
3. Pull the release handle
sideways, towards the centre of
the vehicle, to open the boot.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
The release handle is also visible Keyless tailgate opening

from within the boot. If the vehicle has keyless access,
press the button below the handle to
Tailgate unlock and open the tailgate.
Manual tailgate release
{ Warning
If the battery has been disconnected
To prevent dangerous exhaust or is flat, the tailgate unlock button
fumes entering the vehicle, close will not operate.
the tailgate when the engine is
running. If it is necessary to leave
the tailgate open (while carrying
bulky cargo) close all windows, To open the tailgate press the
switch heater controls to 'fresh' button below the handle.
and set fan to highest speed. After partially opening, gas struts
take over to lift and hold the tailgate
Key button in the open position.
Press K to unlock all the doors and Note: When the engine is running,
the tailgate. the vehicle must be in P (automatic
transmission) or have the park
It may be necessary to press K a brake on (manual transmission).
second time depending on the
Door Unlock Setting selected. See
“Door Unlock” under Vehicle
Personalisation on page 5-32.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Closing the tailgate Note: It is not necessary to slam

the tailgate.
Press Q on the key to lock all the
doors and tailgate.
If the tailgate is not closed when the
vehicle is locked, the horn will
sound twice. All doors will lock
except the tailgate.
{ Warning
To open the tailgate, access the To avoid injury and/or damage to
cargo area from inside the vehicle. the vehicle, check each time,
Use the handle to pull down the before the tailgate is closed, that
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, the contact area is unobstructed.
remove the rubber cover. tailgate until it drops under its own
weight. The tailgate closes and
2. Insert a medium flat-blade latches itself automatically.
screwdriver into the hole and
turn anticlockwise.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Security Disarming the System The system checks whether the
vehicle is allowed to start with the
To disarm the system, do one of the
key used. If the transponder in the
Vehicle Alarm System following:
key is recognised, the vehicle can
This vehicle has an anti-theft alarm . Press K on the RKE transmitter. be started.
system. . Approach the vehicle with the
Arming the System RKE transmitter (keyless
access).
To arm the system, press Q on the
RKE transmitter.
. Start the engine.
The alarm automatically arms after The alarm automatically disarms.

about 30 seconds. The security The security light in the instrument
status LED on the top of the Immobiliser Operation
cluster comes on when there is a
instrument panel illuminates and This vehicle has a passive problem with arming or disarming
once the system is armed, begins to theft-deterrent system. the theft-deterrent system.
flash.
The system does not have to be The system has one or more
Press V on the RKE transmitter to manually armed or disarmed. transmitters matched to an
open the boot without setting off the The immobiliser activates itself immobiliser control unit in your
alarm. The system rearms when the automatically after the key has been vehicle. Only a correctly matched
boot is closed. removed from the ignition switch, transmitter will start the vehicle.
or for vehicles with keyless access, If the transmitter is ever damaged,
when the engine is switched off by you may not be able to start your
pressing the Engine Start/Stop vehicle.
button. When trying to start the vehicle, the
security light comes on briefly when
the ignition is turned on.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
If the vehicle does not start and the Exterior Mirrors To adjust an exterior rear view
security light stays on, there is a mirror:
problem with the system. Turn the
vehicle off and try again. Power Mirrors 1. Press the switch (2) to L or R.
2. Press the switch (1) to adjust the
If the RKE transmitter appears to be mirror.
undamaged, try another transmitter
or for keyless access vehicles,
place the transmitter in the { Warning
transmitter pocket in the centre
The passenger side mirror is
console. See “Starting the Vehicle
with a Low Transmitter Battery” convex shaped, to provide a
under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) wider view. Objects in this mirror
System Operation on page 2-5. are closer than they appear.
If the vehicle does not start with the
other transmitter or when the The vehicle may have memory
transmitter is in the pocket in the mirror position settings. See
centre console, see your dealer. Memory Seats on page 3-6.
L: Left side mirror selected
Do not leave the transmitter that
disarms or deactivates the
R: Right side mirror selected Heated Mirrors
theft-deterrent system, in the ): No mirrors selected The vehicle may have heated
vehicle. exterior mirrors. The heating is
switched on automatically when the
rear window demister is
switched on.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Reverse Tilt Mirrors Interior Mirrors Return the lever back to its original
position as soon as the glare has
The vehicle may have a reverse tilt disappeared.
mirror. Manual Rear View Mirror
Sun visor mirrors
The reverse tilt mirror allows
movement of the passenger side
external mirror automatically to a
preset view, for reversing the
vehicle.
Reverse tilt mirror is on by default.
To deactivate, refer to Reverse Tilt
Mirror. See Vehicle Personalisation
on page 5-32.
Push the lever on the lower edge of

the mirror towards the front of the To view the mirror, pull the cover up
vehicle, then adjust the position of from the lower edge.
the mirror. If the vehicle has illuminated lamps,
To reduce headlamp glare from they turn on and off when the cover
following vehicles, pull the lever is opened and closed.
towards the rear of the vehicle.
Note: The rear view clarity is
reduced when the mirror is set to
the anti-glare position.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13

. if any door is opened within
Windows 45 seconds from the ignition key
Pushing or pulling further to the
second detent and then releasing:
being turned off, the windows window moves down or up
Power Windows remain operational for automatically with safety function.
45 seconds. To stop movement, operate the
{ Warning switch once more in the same
direction.
Take care when operating the
power windows. Risk of injury, Operation of rear windows
particularly to children.
If there are children on the rear
seat, switch on the child safety
system for the power windows.
Keep a close watch on the
windows when closing them.
Ensure that nothing becomes
trapped in them as they move.
Operate the switch 9 for the
The power window switches are respective window by pushing to
located on the doors. open or pulling to close.
Power windows can be operated: Operation of front windows Pushing or pulling lightly to the first
. with ignition on detent: window moves down or up
Pushing or pulling lightly to the first
as long as switch is operated.
. within 10 minutes after switching detent: window moves down or up
ignition off as long as switch is operated.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Pushing further to the second detent Child safety system for rear Initialising the power windows
and then releasing: window moves windows If the windows cannot be closed
down automatically. To stop
automatically (e.g. after
movement, operate the switch once
disconnecting the vehicle battery), a
more in the same direction.
warning message is displayed in the
Safety function on front Driver Information Centre. See
windows Vehicle Messages on page 5-26.
If the window glass encounters Activate the window electronics as
resistance above the middle of the follows:
window during automatic closing, it 1. Close doors.
is immediately stopped and opened
again. 2. Switch on ignition.
3. Close the window completely
Safety function all doors and keep the switch pulled for
In the event of closing difficulties additional 2 seconds.
e.g. due to frost, hold the switch Press switch v to deactivate rear
4. Repeat for each window.
pulled to the second detent. The door power windows, the LED lights
window moves up without activating up. To activate press v again.
the safety function. To stop
movement, release and operate the Overload
switch once more in the same If the windows are repeatedly
direction. operated within short intervals, the
window operation is disabled for
some time.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Assist grips Roof

{ Warning
Do not hold onto assist grips Sunroof
while seated in the vehicle.
The vehicle may have a sunroof.
Use the hooks above the doors
only to hang up lightweight
articles of clothing.
Do not place any objects in the
pockets of hanging items.
Assist grips are provided above the

doors.
When released, they fold up against
the roof.
The sunroof:
. Switch is located in the roof
between the sun visors
. Can be tilted or slid back into
the roof
. Will operate with the ignition in
the Accessories or On position
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Opening the sunroof Closing the sunroof

. Detects an obstruction when
closing from the tilt position, it
. Press ( partially to open the . Press ) partially to close the immediately returns to the full
sunroof. Release when the sunroof. Release when the open tilt position.
sunroof is in the desired sunroof is closed or in the
The sunroof will not move again
position. desired position.
until ) or Q is pressed again.
. Press ( fully to open the . Press ) fully to close the
sunroof fully, automatically. sunroof automatically. { Caution
The sunroof drags the sunshade From a tilted position:
open as it slides open. It does not Obstruction detection only
close the sunshade.
. Press Q to close the tilted operates when the sunroof is
sunroof. Release when the closing. Before opening the
Tilting the sunroof sunroof is closed or in the sunroof, ensure that there are no
desired position. obstructions, e.g. a roof rack.
. Press R to tilt the sunroof.
Release when the sunroof is in Obstruction detection
the desired position. If the sunroof:
. Detects an obstruction when
closing manually or
automatically from the sliding
position, it immediately returns to
the full open slide position.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Auto-close function Cleaning and maintenance

When the ignition is turned off, the
{ Warning
sunroof closes automatically after Keep hands and fingers clear of { Caution
3 seconds. the sunroof tilting mechanism The tinted glass panel on the
when operating it. The scissor sunroof is heat and UV resistant.
action of the parts when moving Ensure that due care is taken and
may cause serious personal injury that the directions below are
and/or may dismember fingers. followed when cleaning.
Regularly clean the glass, flocked

{ Warning seal and roof flanges with a moist,
soft cloth.
Fitting an aftermarket sunroof
may void the warranty on your
vehicle and could result in injury
to the vehicle occupants in the
event of an accident.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Airbag System

Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Head Restraints
Restraints Front Airbag System . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Side Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 { Warning
Curtain Airbag System . . . . . . . 3-16
What Will You See after an The head restraint is a safety
Head Restraints feature.
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Notices for Customer Installed The centre of the head restraint
Front Seats Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 should be at eye level, never at
Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-17 neck level.
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-3 Replacing Airbag System
Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Child Restraints
Rear Seats Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Infants and Young
Rear Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-20
Seat Belts Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-22
How to Wear Seat Belts Child Restraint Installation
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Three-Point Seat Belt . . . . . . . . 3-10 ISOFIX Child Restraint
Seat Belt Use During Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Seat Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Replacing Seat Belt System
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-12
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
3-2 Seats and Restraints
. Lift the head restraint up to . To adjust horizontally, pull the The vehicle may have adjustable
raise it. front head restraint forwards and rear head restraints, these can be
. Push the locking button and engage in one of three positions. removed. See Child Restraint
push the head restraint down to . To return to its rearmost position, Systems on page 3-20.
lower it. pull fully forwards and release.
. Front head restraints cannot be
removed.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Front Seats Power Seat Adjustment
Seat Position { Warning

Do not adjust the driver's seat
{ Warning when the vehicle is moving as the
To avoid reducing the seat could move suddenly
effectiveness of seat belts, causing the driver to lose control.
seatbacks should only be upright
or at most semi-reclined when the
vehicle is moving. { Warning
Before moving the seat ensure
that the path both in front of and
{ Warning behind the seat is clear of
Do not fit unauthorised seat obstructions.
covers, unauthorised seat covers
may impair the operation of the Seat adjustment
side impact airbags (SIAB). The vehicle may have the following
Always sit centrally in the seat. levers and switches for seat
adjustment.
Do not place any object between
the seat and the door or the seat
and the centre console. See
Airbag System on page 3-13.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Forwards/Backwards (Type A) Recline (Type A) Up/down (Type A)

Move the seat forwards or Recline the seatback by lifting the Raise or lower the seat by pressing
backwards by lifting the handle at lever. Release the lever when the the switch at the top or bottom.
the front and sliding the seat. seatback is in the desired position.
Release the handle to re-engage
the latch.
Try to move the seat back and forth
to be sure the seat is locked in
place.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Lumbar (Type A) Forwards/backwards (Type B) Recline (Type B)

Adjust the lumbar support by Move the seat forwards or Adjust the seatback by tilting the
pressing the switch at the front backwards by moving the horizontal vertical switch forwards or
or rear. switch forwards or backwards. backwards.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Up/down (Type B) Tilt Lumbar (Type B)

Raise or lower the seat by moving Tilt the seat up at the front by tilting Adjust the lumbar support by sliding
the horizontal switch up or down. the front of the horizontal switch up. the switch.
Tilt the seat down at the back by
tilting the back of the horizontal Memory Seats
switch down. Memory settings for different
drivers
The vehicle may have seat and
mirror position memory.
Up to three different settings may be
stored.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
3. Press SET (2).

{ Warning 4. Within 5 seconds, press and
Warning (Continued)
Before moving the seat ensure hold the desired memory button overheat. An overheated seat
that the path both in front of and 1, 2 or 3 (1). A chime will sound. heater may cause a burn or may
behind the seat is clear of To recall a setting, press the desired damage the seat.
obstructions. memory button 1, 2 or 3 (1). Do not fit any seat cover
Note: Pressing the button again will (including genuine Holden
halt seat movement. accessory covers) to heated
seats.
Heated Front Seats
{ Warning
If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin, the
seat heater may cause burns. To
reduce the risk of burns, people
with such a condition should use
care when using the seat heater,
especially for long periods of
To store a setting:
time. Do not place anything on
1. Adjust the driver's seat by using the seat that insulates against
the switches. See Seat Position heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
on page 3-3. cover, or similar item. This may The vehicle may have heated front
2. Adjust the exterior mirrors. See cause the seat heater to seats. To operate, the engine must
Power Mirrors on page 2-18. (Continued) be running.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Press L or M to heat the driver or The heated seat indicator lights do Rear Seats
passenger seat cushion. not turn on during a remote start.
Press the button onceonce forfor the
the highest The temperature performance of an
unoccupied seat may be reduced.
{ Warning
setting.
highest With each
setting. press
With each of press
the of
button, the heated
the button, seatseat
the heated will change
will This is normal. Do not press the release button
to the next
change lower
to the setting,
next lower and then
setting, The heated seats will not turn on on the top of the seatback while
the
andoff setting.
then Three
the off lights
setting. indicate
Three lights during a remote start unless they the vehicle is moving. This could
indicate
the thesetting.
highest highest setting. are enabled in the vehicle cause damage or injuries to the
personalisation menu. See Remote occupants.
If the heated
Remote Startseats are Seats
Heated on the
Vehicle Start on page 2-9 and
highest setting,
The vehicle maythe level
have may seats
heated Do not allow passengers to sit on
Vehicle Personalisation on
automatically
that can be automatically to
be lowered the next
turned on page 5-32.
the folded seatbacks while the
lower
duringsetting
a remoteafter approximately
start, when it is cold vehicle is in motion. Unrestrained
30 minutes.
outside. They are cancelled when luggage or passengers on a
the ignition is turned folded seatback could be thrown
Remote Start Heatedon. Seats within or ejected from the vehicle
Press
The the button
vehicle to useheated
may have the heated
seats in a sudden stop or accident.
seatscan
that after
be the vehicle is started.
automatically turned
on during a remote start, when the
temperature outside is below
approximately 10 degrees. They { Caution
are cancelled when the ignition is Do not trap the seat belt when
turned on. returning the seatback or seat
Press the button to use the heated section to the upright position.
seats after the vehicle is started.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Sedan Sportwagon Rear Seat Armrest

The middle section opens forward to The rear seatback is divided into
give access to the boot area or to two sections, either or both may be
carry long loads. folded down.
The vehicle has a rear middle

armrest.
1. Press the lock button at the top 1. Press the lock button near the
. Pull the armrest down to use.
centre of the middle seat. head restraint to fold down. . Push the armrest up when it is
2. Push the middle section back 2. Fold back to return to the upright no longer required.
into place to close. position. Note: Ensure the armrest is folded
3. Ensure the lock button is fully Note: Try to move the seatback to up before folding the seatback
engaged. check the latch is engaged. forward.
If the latch is not fully engaged a red If the latch is not fully engaged a red
warning colour will be visible around warning colour will be visible around
the button. the button.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Seat Belts Warning (Continued)

Three-Point Seat Belt
Fitting
How to Wear Seat Belts Care should be taken to avoid
Properly contamination of the webbing with
polishes, oils and chemicals, and
particularly battery acid.
{ Warning
Belts should not be worn with
Seat belts are designed to bear straps twisted.
upon the bony structure of the
Each belt assembly must only be
body, and should be worn low
used by one occupant; it is
across the front of the pelvis or
dangerous to put a belt around a
the pelvis, chest and shoulders,
child being carried on the
as applicable; wearing the lap
occupant's lap.
section of the belt across the
abdominal area must be avoided. No modifications or additions
should be made by the user The belt should not be twisted.
Seat belts should be adjusted as
which will either prevent the seat It should lie flat and fit firmly across
firmly as possible, consistent with
belt adjusting devices from your hips.
comfort, to provide the protection
operating to remove slack, 1. Pull the metal tongue across
for which they have been
or prevent the seat belt assembly your body.
designed. A slack belt will greatly
from being adjusted to remove
reduce the protection afforded to 2. Clip it into the buckle.
slack.
the wearer.
3. When the metal tongue is locked
(Continued) safely into place you will hear a
click.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
4. Give a gentle pull on the buckle The Emergency-locking Retractor Removing

to ensure full engagement. Belt allows you to move while the
5. Settle the belt at the hip. vehicle is travelling normally, but
locks immediately on fast braking,
6. Run your hand under the sash impact with a solid object or any
from hip to shoulder. quick movement by the wearer.
The belt should fit comfortably. Any If the shoulder portion of a rear seat
extra belt length retracts belt is pulled out all the way, the
automatically. child restraint locking feature may
be engaged. If this happens, let the
belt go back all the way and start
again.
1. Press the release button on the

buckle.
2. Allow the belt to retract.
3. Check that it fully retracts
without twisting or turning.
Note: For your safety, wear the lap

section of the seat belt as low as
possible on your hips, not on your
waist or abdomen.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Shoulder height adjust Seat Belt Care

{ Warning
For your safety, do not adjust the { Warning
seat belt shoulder height while
driving. Care should be taken to avoid
contamination of the webbing with
polishes, oils and chemicals, and
Seat Belt Use During particularly battery acid. Cleaning
Pregnancy may safely be carried out using
mild soap and water. The belt
Seat belts work for everyone, should be replaced if webbing
including pregnant women. Like all
becomes frayed, contaminated or
occupants, they are more likely to
damaged.
be seriously injured if they do not
The vehicle may have seat belt wear a seat belt.
shoulder height adjustment. A pregnant woman should wear a Replacing Seat Belt
Adjust the position of the seat belt three point belt with the lap portion System Parts after a
of the belt worn as low as possible
anchor to suit the height of the
below the rounding of their stomach,
Crash
wearer.
throughout the pregnancy.
1. Press and hold the button. { Warning
2. Move up or down as required. It is essential to replace the entire
3. Release the button. assembly after it has been worn
4. Ensure that the anchor clicks in a severe impact even if
into position. damage to the assembly is not
obvious.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Airbag System { Warning { Warning

Airbags and child restraints WARNING – EXTREME Airbags are part of the
HAZARD! supplemental restraint system
Do not use a rearward facing (SRS) as they assist, but do not
child restraint on a seat protected replace seat belts. Airbags do not
by an airbag in front of it. deploy in every accident. Various
factors dictate whether they
The child could be seriously deploy including speed, angle of
injured if the airbag inflates, as collision and object hit. Airbags
the child's head would be very are not designed to inflate if the
close to the inflating airbag. vehicle is hit from the rear or is
Remember that it is safest for involved in a rollover. Seat belts
children to be seated in the rear must be worn by all passengers
seats. See Child Restraint whenever the vehicle is moving.
Systems on page 3-20. Airbags inflate with great force.
If you are too close to an inflating
airbag it may cause injury. Seat
belts help keep you in position for
airbag inflation in the event of a
collision.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Front Airbag System

{ Warning
The horn pad must not be
covered with adhesive or any
other material.
The driver should adjust the seat
as far rearward as possible while
still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
The wording AIRBAG above the
glove box and a label attached
under the sun visor indicate that a Front airbags will inflate in certain
passenger airbag is fitted. severe frontal or near frontal
impacts. Front airbags are not
The airbag system consists of one
designed to inflate if the vehicle is
airbag in the steering wheel, and
struck from the side, rear or, in
one in the dashboard on the
passenger side. These are identified { Warning rollovers. Always wear a seat belt.
by the word AIRBAG.
Do not place any objects on or
over the dashboard or between
an airbag and yourself.
Do not hang anything from the
sun visor or mirror.
Passengers must not rest their
feet on the dashboard.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Side Airbag System
SIAB are identified by labels with Note: SIAB deploy in most, but not
the words AIRBAG on the seatback all, severe side impacts.
Side Impact Airbags (SIAB) are and FRONT SEAT SIDE IMPACT Because there is limited time
stored in the sides of the front seats, AIRBAGS on the door pillar. available to detect some side
the side closest to the door. impacts, it is not possible to deploy
the SIAB in all serious accidents.
A SIAB will deploy in certain severe
side impacts. SIAB are not designed
to inflate if the vehicle is struck from
the front, rear, or in rollovers.
Always wear a seat belt.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Curtain Airbag System

{ Warning
Do not fit unauthorised seat
covers as they may impair the
deployment of the Side Impact
Airbags (SIAB).
Do not position your body or any
object (including pillows) between
front seats and doors.
Do not lean on, or sleep against,
the door. Always sit centrally in
the seat. Note: Curtain airbags deploy in
Always wear a seat belt. most, but not all, severe side
impacts.
Curtain airbags are stored in the
roof on each side of the vehicle. Because there is limited time
available to detect some side
They can be identified by the word impacts, it is not possible to deploy
AIRBAG on the roof pillars, the curtain airbags in all serious
Sedan (A) and Sportwagon (B). accidents.
Curtain airbags are not designed to
inflate if the vehicle is struck from
the front, rear, or in rollovers.
Always wear a seat belt.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
What Will You See after Notices for Customer

{ Warning an Airbag Inflates? Installed Equipment
Do not position your body or any Airbags inflate and deflate within
object (including pillows) in the
area in which the airbag inflates.
milliseconds. { Warning
Fifteen seconds after any airbag or Fitting other types of roo bars
There must be no objects in the seat belt pretensioner has been may affect crash performance,
area in which the airbag inflates. activated (the vehicle has stopped airbag performance and engine
Refer to the illustration. and provided there is battery cooling. See “Fitting roo bars”
Use the hooks above the doors power), the vehicle will: under Add-On Electrical
only to hang up light articles of . Switch off the engine. Equipment on page 9-53.
clothing. . Switch off the fuel pump.
Do not place any objects in the . Switch on the hazard lamps. Airbag System Check
pockets of the hanging items.
. Switch on the interior lamp. The 9 on the instrument panel
Do not hold onto the assist grips
(above the doors) while seated in
. Unlock the doors. illuminates for a few seconds when
the vehicle. the ignition is turned on. This
Switch the ignition off and then on if
indicates that the Supplemental
Do not lean on, or sleep against restarting the engine is required.
Restraint System (SRS) is
the front or rear doors. Always sit operational.
centrally in the seat. Contact a Holden Dealer
Always wear a seat belt. immediately:
. If 9 does not illuminate when
the ignition is turned on.
. If 9 illuminates when driving.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13

. If the warning Airbag Fault is . The headliner or trim panels are
displayed on the instrument damaged. Child Restraints
panel. It is recommended that this work be
The SRS may not function carried out by a Holden Dealer or
Older Children
correctly in the event of an approved repairer.
accident. See Airbag System on
page 3-13. Seat belt pretensioners
Replacing Airbag System

Parts after a Crash
Note: After an accident where the
SRS has deployed, the systems,
associated parts and hardware must
be checked and replaced as
required.
Seats, associated parts and
hardware must also be checked and A child should use a normal three
replaced as required. point seat belt only when:
. They can sit against the back of
The SRS should also be inspected Front seat belt pretensioners are
after an accident if: the seat with knees bent
part of the SRS. In certain severe comfortably at the edge of
. The dashboard area or steering collisions the seat belts are the seat.
wheel is scratched, cracked or tightened by the seat belt
damaged. pretensioners. . The lap belt rests low and snug
across the hips, not across the
. The front seats and upholstery stomach.
are damaged.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13

. The sash belt is centred on the Young Children Booster Seats
shoulder and chest.
. They are able to stay seated like
this for the entire trip.
Infants and Young

Children
Infants
Forward facing child seats are for Booster seats are for when children
use when the child is able to sit and outgrow a typical forward facing
easily hold their head upright. child seat, but are still too small for
three point seat belts.
Rearward facing infant capsules are

designed so that in the event of a
collision, impact forces will be
evenly spread over the baby's back,
with minimal jarring to the
vulnerable head and neck area.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Child Restraint Systems Warning (Continued)

{ Warning Holden strongly recommends that
you refer to your specific State or
WARNING – EXTREME Territory regulations to determine
HAZARD! which child restraint is suitable for
Do not use a rearward facing your child.
child restraint on a seat protected
by an airbag in front of it.
The child could be seriously { Warning
injured if the airbag inflates, as
the child's head would be very Always ensure that the seat belt
close to the inflating airbag. { Warning fits firmly around the child
restraint.
Remember that it is safest for This manual provides you with
children to be seated in the rear general information concerning If a child cannot see out of the
seats. child restraints only. window, do not raise him/her by
means of an ordinary cushion.
The driver is required by law to
It will not stay in place in a
ensure that passengers are
collision and the child can slip out
suitably restrained. In most States
of the straps and become
and Territories of Australia and
entangled.
New Zealand, specific laws may
exist which require children to be
seated in approved child
restraints.
(Continued)
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Note: Fitting some child seats may Note: Refer to the relevant 3. To tighten the belt around the
require removal of the rear head legislation, an approved child installed child seat, push down
restraint(s). restraint fitting station or capsule on the child restraint, pull the
1. Raise the head restraint fully. manufacturer's information for the shoulder portion of the belt to
recommended type of child restraint tighten the lap portion of the belt
2. Insert a small probe into the hole to use. and feed the shoulder belt back
on the non-adjusting pole guide. into the retractor.
Child restraint seat belt
3. Press the probe inwards. 4. Try to pull the belt out of the
locking feature
4. Simultaneously, press the retractor to make sure the
The rear seat belts have a child retractor is locked. If the
release button.
restraint locking feature. retractor is not locked, repeat
5. Lift the head restraint up Steps 2 to 4.
When engaged, this feature
and out.
prevents the seat belt from being 5. To remove, press the release
6. Store the head restraint in a safe loosened without releasing the button on the buckle and allow
location. buckle. the belt to fully retract.
7. Reinstall the head restraint when To engage:
the child seat is no longer fitted.
1. Clip the metal tongue into the
buckle.
{ Warning 2. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
Always follow the child restraint out of the retractor to set the
manufacturer's fitting instructions lock. When the retractor lock is
when installing a child restraint set, the belt can be tightened but
into the vehicle. not pulled out of the retractor.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Where to Put the Warning (Continued)

Child Restraint
Restraint Installation Locations
purchase a child restraint which
Sedan anchorage points
{ Warning carries the appropriate Standards
Australia sticker of approval.
Child restraint anchorages are
Where legally allowable, you may
designed to withstand only those
install a forward-facing child
loads imposed by correctly fitted
restraint in the front seat, but
child restraints. Under no
always move the passenger seat
circumstances are they to be
as far back as it will go. The
used for adult seat belts,
forward facing child restraint must
harnesses, or for attaching other
still be attached to the passenger
items or equipment to the vehicle.
side child restraint anchorage
Only child restraints that have point, located behind the
clips to attach to the vehicle's rear seat.
anchorage fitting (as shown in the
Remember, it is safest for children
following illustrations) are to be
to be seated in the rear seat.
used. Earlier types of child
restraints may not attach securely
to this type of anchor. Note: If unsure about installing a
child restraint anchor fitting, please
Use only Standards Australia and contact an approved restraint fitting
New Zealand approved child station or a Holden Dealer.
restraints and harnesses. Only
(Continued)
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Using sedan outer anchorage Holden child restraint fitting Generic child restraint anchor
points 1. Unscrew the cover plug. fitting
Unscrew the cover plug.
Some generic fittings come with a
selection of spacers.
A 10 mm spacer is required.
1. 30 mm long bolt
2. Install the bolt (1), lock
2. Lock washer washer (2), anchor fitting (3),
3. Anchor fitting spacer (4) and paper washer (5).
4. 10 mm spacer 3. Tighten the bolt to 20 ± 5 Y
(Newton metres).
5. Paper assembly washer
6. Parcel shelf trim
7. Attaching clip
8. Front of vehicle
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Sportwagon anchorage points ISOFIX Child Restraint H (ISOFIX Mounting Bracket):

Systems Seating positions with two ISOFIX
mounting brackets.
Fasten vehicle-approved ISOFIX
child restraint systems to the
ISOFIX mounting brackets.
Note: Ensure that the seat belt
buckles are placed out of the way of
the child seat.
Rear Seat
I (Top-Tether Fastening Eye):
Seating positions with top tether
child restraint anchorage points.
Sedan
(8) Front of vehicle

6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
In addition to the ISOFIX mounting,

fasten the top-tether strap(s) to the
top tether anchorage points. See
Child Restraint Installation Locations
on page 3-22.
Sportwagon
ISOFIX mounting brackets are
indicated by the H label on the
seatback (Sedan) or seat cushion
(Sportwagon).
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
2 NOTES
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage To open, pull the handle towards

you. To close, push the lid firmly
Compartments back into place.
Storage Compartments
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Glove Box Cup holders
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Cup holders are designed for
Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 holding standard size soft drink
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 cans, small size bottles and cups
Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 with lids. Larger bottles may be
Centre Console Storage . . . . . . 4-4 stored in the door panel storage.
Additional Storage Features
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 { Warning
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Convenience Net
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 To avoid scalding, never place hot
(Sportwagon) Net
Convenience . . . . . . . . . .. ........... .. .4-13
4-8 drinks in the cup holders.
Convenience Net (Sedan). . . . . 4-13
Roof Rack System
Roof
Roof Rack System. . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Rack System
Roof Rack System
Information . . . . . . . . the
on Loading . . . .4-14 The glove box is located in the
dashboard, in front of the
Information on Loading the
Vehicle passenger's seat.
Vehicle
Information on Loading the
Information
Vehicle . . .on
. . . Loading
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
the Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
4-2 Storage
Front cup holders Rear cup holders (Sedan) Rear cup holders
The front cup holders are located Cup holders are located in the front The vehicle may have cup holders
forward of the centre console of the folded down section in the located in front of the centre seat.
armrest. centre of the rear seat. To open, push in the front of the
cover and release it.
To close, slide the cup holder back
into the seat until the latch engages.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Storage 4-3
Front Storage Sunglasses Storage Rear Storage

Seatback Pockets
The front storage compartment is The vehicle may have a sunglasses

located below the heating controls holder.
on the dashboard. The storage pockets are on the rear
It is located in the roof and is of the front seats.
designed to accommodate one pair
of sunglasses.
To open, push in the rear of the lid
and release it.
To close, move the holder back to
its original position and press in the
rear of the lid to engage the latch.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
4-4 Storage
Cargo area (Sportwagon) Centre Console Storage Additional Storage

Features
Cargo Cover
The vehicle may have a cargo blind.
Use the cargo blind to provide
protection from the sun and added
security for items stored beneath.
{ Warning
Do not place any items on top of
the cargo blind.
A storage compartment is located A storage area is located under the
on the driver side of the cargo area. front armrest. Do not allow any items
Use for the storage of lightweight underneath to contact the cargo
To open, lift the latch on the
items, not exceeding 2 kg in total blind.
underside of the front lip. Do not
e.g. street directories, folders, maps. force the lid backwards.
Do not use to store heavy and/or The console provides space to
sharp objects e.g. loose tools. accommodate a standard mobile
telephone/charger, which can be
plugged into the power socket
located inside the console. See
Power Outlets on page 5-9.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Storage 4-5
While the blind is extended, the rear 2. Ensure the blind engages into
of the blind can be lifted up. the latch by twisting the handle
upwards.
To remove the cargo blind:
To extend the cargo blind:

1. Use the handle to pull the blind
rearward.
To lift up the rear of the blind:
2. Engage the blind into the latches
on either side. 1. Use the handle to twist the rear
of the blind downwards until it 1. On the driver side, lift the lock
To retract the blind: disengages from the latches. lever upward.
1. Use the handle to pull the blind 2. Release the handle and the 2. While holding the lever up, lift
rearward slightly. blind will automatically lift up. the blind up and out of its
recess.
2. Allow the blind to move down To pull down the rear of the blind:
out of the latches.
1. Use the handle to pull the blind
3. Gently roll the blind up while downward into the latch.
holding the handle.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
4-6 Storage
Shopping bag hooks Cargo Tie-Downs

(Sportwagon)
Shopping bag hooks are provided
on either side of the cargo area.
3. On the passenger side, move

the blind slightly to the driver
side and lift upward. Four fold down load anchors are
4. Re-fit the blind in the reverse provided in the cargo area.
order ensuring the blind locks Use these to secure heavy items.
into place. 1. To fold the hook out, push in at
the top and release it. To use the anchor points:
2. To fold the hook in, move it back 1. Fold the metal loops to the
to its original position. vertical position.
3. Push in at the top until it clicks. 2. Place the cargo centrally
between the four anchor points.
3. Use only approved tie-down
straps to secure cargo.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Storage 4-7
4. Fold the metal loops down flat

when not in use. Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued)
Protect the tie-down straps from Make sure that the rear axle load
{ Warning sharp edges of the load. Replace of the vehicle is not exceeded.
Always make sure the load is them if they begin to wear. See “Axle loads” under Vehicle
secure and will not move during Make sure the back seat is locked Weight on page 12-6.
heavy braking or a collision. in the upright position whenever The maximum load for the
Unsecured loads increase the risk carrying heavy loads. This is a tie-down system is 80 kg single
of injury during heavy braking, basic requirement for protection mass when used in conjunction
sudden avoidance manoeuvres or against load displacement in the with the Holden approved straps.
a collision. event of sudden braking or a That is, if an object weighs 80 kg,
collision. only one object can be held by
Use only approved tie-down
straps and convenience net to The rear seat in the upright the tie-down system.
secure your loads. Do not use position provides greater Do not use when there are visible
elasticised straps. protection against load signs of wear or damage.
displacement.
Do not use the load anchors to Place loads as low down and as
secure the spare wheel or flat The driving characteristics of the far forward in the cargo area as
tyre. Refer to “Procedure – LPG vehicle can be affected because possible. That is, against the back
sportwagon vehicles” under Tyre the centre of gravity is altered seat or cargo barrier if equipped.
Changing on page 10-51. when there is a load in the cargo
area. Match your speed and
Never attach more than one driving style according to how the
tie-down strap to any single vehicle is loaded.
tie-down anchor.
(Continued)
(Continued)
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
4-8 Storage
Convenience
Convenience Net
Net The vehicle may have a
Warning (Continued)
(Sportwagon) convenience net inside the cargo
area to secure lightweight items.
{ Warning Load size should never be higher
Use the four hooks and the anchor
Warning
Avoid eye injury. Do not
than the back seats. The driver's
point loops to attach the net, at the
rear vision should never be
Avoid eye injury.
overstretch. Always Do keep
not face impaired by the load. front, side or rear of the cargo area.
overstretch.
and body outAlways
of recoil keep face
path. Do not use to hold items against the
Always make sure the load is
andnot
Do bodyuseout of recoil
when therepath.are visible seat, tailgate or cargo area walls,
secure and will not move during
Do notofuse
signs wearwhen there are visible
or damage. only inside the net.
heavy braking or a collision.
signs of wear or damage.
The maximum load for the Unsecured loads increase the risk
The maximumnet
convenience load
is 15for kg
thesingle of injury during heavy braking,
convenience
mass. That is,net is 15
if an kg single
object weighs sudden avoidance manoeuvres or
mass.
15 kg, That is, if object
only one an object canweighs
be a collision.
15 kg,
held byonly
the one object cannet.
convenience be
held by the convenience net. Make sure the back seat is locked
Never use the convenience net in the upright position when
Neverthe
when userear
the seat
convenience
is net
carrying heavy loads. This is a
when the
folded rear seat is folded
down. basic requirement for protection
down.
These nets are only intended to against load displacement in the
Theselight
keep netsobjects
are only intended
tidy, not for tothe event of sudden braking or a
keep light objects
anchoring of loads. tidy, not for the collision. The rear seat in the
anchoring of loads. upright position provides greater
Do not use the convenience net
Do not use
external the vehicle.
to the convenience net protection against load
external to the vehicle. displacement.
(Continued)
(Continued)
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Storage 4-9
Carrying heavy loads

Danger (Continued)
Holden recommends fitting a
genuine Holden cargo barrier when When possible, place loads
carrying heavy loads in the vehicle. directly against the cargo barrier.
It is designed to reduce cargo
impact to passengers in an Secure the load with a restraint
accident. system.
If involved in an accident or
{ Danger accidentally damaged, the cargo
barrier should be replaced and
It is important that the emergency the anchorages inspected by an
exit hammer is correctly fitted at authorised Holden Dealer.
1. Ensure the rear seatbacks are in all times.
the upright position. Passengers should not ride in the
There is danger of child cargo area.
2. Attach the loops at the top of the entrapment when a cargo barrier
net to the net hooks. Take care when placing loads
is fitted. Heatstroke or death may
3. Attach the plastic hooks at the occur if trapped in the vehicle. behind the cargo barrier so as to
bottom of the net to the anchor The emergency exit hammer is prevent damage to child restraint
point loops. only intended to be used for an anchorages and seat belt
emergency exit through the rear webbing in an accident.
Cargo barrier (Sportwagon)
window of the vehicle and for no In an accident, cargo may cause
The vehicle may have a cargo other purpose. Do not leave the cargo barrier to deform toward
barrier. children unattended in this passengers.
vehicle.
The rating label must not be
(Continued) removed from the cargo barrier.
(Continued)
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
4-10 Storage
Behind rear seats position

Danger (Continued) Danger (Continued)
Clean the cargo barrier only with weighs 60 kg, only one object is { Warning
mild soap and water. Do not use permitted behind the cargo It is recommended to correctly
solvents or chemicals. Discard barrier. anchor the load in the cargo area,
the cargo barrier if it becomes Do not use this cargo barrier in even if the cargo barrier is in
rusted. Do not store outside or any other vehicle for which it is position.
expose to direct sunlight. not designed.
Do not obstruct seat belts or child Please refer to the Installation 1. Before placing the cargo barrier
restraints, or their operation. and user instructions, supplied for into the vehicle, rotate so the
Seat, seat belts or child restraint details regarding the fitment and four attachment straps point
anchorages must not be used to usage of the cargo barrier. rearward.
secure the cargo barrier. When high tensile fasteners are 2. Ensure the long straps are
Long thin items of cargo should used, the cargo barrier must be folded back and tied away
be placed lengthways across the installed using the size and grade securely.
vehicle to minimise the risk of fasteners specified by the cargo 3. If the vehicle has a cargo blind,
penetration. barrier manufacturer. remove. See Cargo Cover on
page 4-4.
Do not attach (drill, rivet, stick and
so forth) objects to the front or Cargo barrier positions 4. Tilt the top of the cargo barrier
rear of the cargo barrier. backward and lift into place.
The barrier can be placed behind
The maximum load for a genuine the rear seats when they are upright 5. Place the cargo barrier directly
Holden cargo barrier is 60 kg or behind the front seats when the behind the rear seats.
single mass. That is, if an object rear seats are folded down.
(Continued)
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Storage 4-11
11. Firmly tighten all four bolts and

check the tension.
12. Refit the cargo blind.
To move or remove the cargo
barrier, reverse the above
procedure.
Behind front seats position
{ Warning
It is recommended to correctly
6. Align the top attachment straps 7. Flip open the upper attaching anchor the load in the rear cargo
with the roof attaching holes. hole covers. area, even if the cargo barrier is
8. Insert the hand operated bolts in position.
into the holes and turn
clockwise. 1. Before placing the cargo barrier
Do not tighten fully until all four into the vehicle, rotate so the
bolts are fitted. four attachment straps point
rearward.
9. Align the short bottom straps so
the strap holes align with the 2. Ensure the short straps are
mounting nuts in the floor. folded back and tied away
securely.
10. Insert the bolts into the holes
and turn clockwise.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
4-12 Storage
3. If the vehicle has a cargo blind, 13. Firmly tighten all four bolts and
remove. See Cargo Cover on check the tension.
page 4-4. 14. Refit the cargo blind.
4. Fold the rear seat down. See To move or remove the cargo
Rear Seats on page 3-8. barrier, reverse the above
5. Tilt the top of the cargo barrier procedure.
backward and lift into place.
Emergency exit hammer
6. Place the cargo barrier directly
behind the front seats.
8. Flip open the upper attaching

hole covers.
9. Insert the hand operated bolts
into the holes and turn
clockwise.
Do not tighten fully until all four
bolts are fitted.
10. Slide the plastic sleeves on the
long straps outward to release.
An emergency exit hammer is
11. Pivot the long straps rearward provided on the cargo barrier for
7. Align the top attachment straps so the strap holes align with emergency exit from the rear
with the roof attaching holes. the mounting nuts in the floor. window only.
12. Insert the bolts into the holes Install in the location shown at all
and turn clockwise. times.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Storage 4-13
Convenience
Convenience Net
Net (Sedan) Warning (Continued)
{ Warning Unsecured loads increase the risk
of injury during heavy braking,
Avoid eye injury. Do not sudden avoidance manoeuvres or
overstretch. Always keep face a collision.
and body out of recoil path.
Do not use when there are visible The vehicle may have a
signs of wear or damage. convenience net located inside the
The maximum load for the boot, to secure lightweight items.
convenience net is 15 kg single Four hooks are located on the
mass. That is, if an object weighs vehicle and six loops are located on Attach four corner loops (1) to the
15 kg, only one object can be the convenience net. top two hooks on the vehicle (two
held by the convenience net. loops on one side, two loops on the
other) and attach the two centre
These nets are only intended to loops (2) to the bottom hooks on the
keep light objects tidy, not for the vehicle.
anchoring of loads.
The net can be opened and objects
Do not use the convenience net placed inside.
external to the vehicle.
Always make sure the load is
secure and will not move during
heavy braking or a collision.
(Continued)
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
4-14 Storage
Roof Rack System { Warning

Roof rack The load, including the weight of
. Distribute the load evenly and the roof rack, must not exceed
secure tightly with straps. 75 kg. Distribute the load evenly.
. When carrying loads on the roof
rack, avoid hard braking, abrupt Note: The weight of the roof rack
swerving or sharp steering. and its load must be included when
Roof rack loads alter the calculating the total load.
handling of a vehicle.
For larger objects place a corner

loop (1) on each hook.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Storage 4-15
Information on Carrying portable gas

cylinders in vehicles
Loading the Vehicle
Heavy Accessories { Warning
. Place heavy objects in the boot Gas cylinders can leak, creating a
(Sedan) as far forward as risk of fire or explosion. As a
possible. precaution, ensure adequate
. Ensure that all cargo is lower ventilation when carrying gas
than the rear seat backrests cylinders. They must be
(Sportwagon). Place heavier restrained from rolling around,
objects at the bottom. and where possible, placed in the
Movement of heavy objects in load area of the vehicle.
the boot/cargo area may change It is recommended that if gas
the handling of the vehicle. cylinders are frequently
. Do not place objects in front of transported, that a purpose-built
the rear window. carrying compartment be used.
Ensure any transportation of gas
. Do not place objects on the
cylinders complies with the
dashboard.
applicable regulations.
. Do not place objects in the area
where the airbags inflate.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
4-16 Storage
2 NOTES
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Electronic Stability Control

Instruments and Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 (ESC)/Traction Control
Controls Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Engine Coolant Temperature
System (TCS) Indicator/
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Liquefied Petroleum Gas
Instrument Panel Overview Seat Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . 5-14 (LPG) Acceleration Light . . . 5-20
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . 5-3 Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-15 Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-20
Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-16 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-20
Controls Malfunction Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-5 Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-5 Service Vehicle Soon Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-21
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Windscreen Wiper/Washer . . . . 5-7 Brake System Warning Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Rear Window Wiper/ Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Door open warning light . . . . . 5-21
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Electric Parking Brake
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Information Displays
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Driver Information
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Centre (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Lane Departure Warning Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . 5-24
Indicators (LDW) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Vehicle Messages
Forward Collision Alert (FCA) Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Battery Voltage and Charging
Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Electronic Stability Control
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Brake System Messages . . . . 5-27
(ESC) Indicator Light . . . . . . . 5-19
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-27

Door open messages . . . . . . . . 5-27
Engine Cooling System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-28
Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-29
Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-29
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-29
Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Object Detection System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Ride Control System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-30
Starting the Vehicle
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-31
Vehicle Reminder
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-32
Window Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Vehicle Personalisation
Vehicle Personalisation . . . . . . 5-32
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Instrument Panel Overview

6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
1. Vents. See Adjustable Air Vents 13. Lever for: 20. Hazard Warning Flashers on
on page 8-6. Turn and Lane-Change Signals page 6-4.
2. Glove Box on page 4-1. on page 6-4. 21. Climate control switches. See
3. Vents. See Adjustable Air Vents Headlamp High/Low-Beam Air Conditioning System on
on page 8-6. Changer on page 6-2. page 8-1.
4. Infotainment system controls. Driver Information Centre (DIC) 22. Electric Parking Brake on
See Overview on page 7-3. under Instrument Panel page 9-15.
5. Infotainment screen. See Overview on page 5-3. 23. Electronic stability control
Overview on page 7-3. 14. Exterior Lamp Controls on switch. See Electronic Stability
page 6-1. Control (ESC) on page 9-18.
6. Sunlight sensor. See Air Park Assist
Parking switches.
Assist SeeSee
switches. Park
Conditioning System on 15. Instrument panel illumination Parking
Assist onAssist
page on page 9-26.
9-26.
page 8-1. switch. See Interior Lighting on
page 1-8. 24. Front Storage on page 4-3.
7. Engine Start/Stop button. See
Ignition Positions on page 9-4 16. Head-up display controls. See 25. 12 volt power socket. See
Head-Up Display (HUD) on Power Outlets on page 5-9.
8. Windscreen Wiper/Washer on
page 5-7. page 5-24. 26. Shift lever. See Transmission
17. Ignition lock/switch (behind Display on page 9-9.
9. Steering wheel controls. See
Cruise Control on page 9-21. steering wheel). See Ignition
Positions on page 9-4.
10. Horn on page 5-6.
18. Steering Wheel Adjustment on
11. Instrument Cluster on page 5-5.
page 5-13.
19. Heated seat switches. See
12. Steering Wheel Controls on Heated Front Seats on
page 7-7. page 3-7.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Controls 3. To lock, move the lever up.

Ensure the steering wheel is
locked in position before driving.
Steering Wheel
Adjustment Steering Wheel Controls
{ Warning
Do not attempt to adjust the
steering wheel while driving.
The vehicle may have Forward

collision alert and Lane departure
warning.
b / g (Push to Talk): Press to
interact with Bluetooth® or
navigation systems.
$ / i (End Call/Mute): Press to
silence the vehicle speakers only.
Press again to turn the sound on.
Press to reject an incoming call,
or to end a current call.
1. To unlock, move the lever down. w SRC x (Rotary Control):
2. To adjust, move the steering Turn w or x to select preset radio
wheel up, down, closer or away. stations.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 6/6/13
Turn w or x to select the next or @ (Lane departure warning): Horn

previous favourite radio station, CD Press the lane departure warning
track, DVD track/chapter, or MP3 button to turn on lane departure
track. warning. A green indicator will notify
that the system is operational. See
Press SRC to change between
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) on
audio sources.
page 9-34.
+ x − (Volume): Press + to RES/+ (Resume/Accel): Move the
increase the volume; press − to thumbwheel up to resume to a
decrease the volume. previously set speed or to
[ (Forward collision alert): accelerate.
Press the button to set the alert SET/− (Set/Coast): Move the
timing to far, medium, near or off. thumbwheel down to set a speed
The button press shows the current and activate cruise control or to
control setting on the+8'. make the vehicle decelerate. Press a.
Additional button presses will
change this setting. See Forward 1 (On/Off): Press to turn the
Collision Alert (FCA) System on cruise control system on and off. An
page 9-23. indicator light will turn on or off in
the instrument cluster.
* (Cancel): Press to disengage
cruise control without erasing the
set speed from memory.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Windscreen Wiper/ OFF: Off Note: The intermittent wiper

frequency is increased as vehicle
Washer INT: Intermittent wipe
speed increases.
LO: Slow
Rain sensing
HI: Fast
The vehicle may have rain sensing
L: Pull to wash the windscreen. windscreen wipers.
The wipers will also cycle for a
short time. A sensor near the top centre of the
windscreen detects the amount of
Intermittent wipers water on the windscreen and
controls the frequency of the
windscreen wipers. Keep this area
clear of debris for best system
performance.
The wipers/washers operate with

the ignition in the ON or
ACCESSORIES positions.
{ Caution
Never operate the wipers on dry
glass, as this will damage the
Rotate the collar down for more
rubber and scratch the glass. frequent wipes. Rotate the collar up
for less frequent wipes.
8: Wipers cycle while the lever is
held down.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Rear Window Wiper/

{ Caution Washer
Switch off the rain sensor by
setting the lever to the OFF
position before entering a
car wash.
Replace the wiper blades as soon
as they do not completely remove
water from the windscreen. If the
blades are not replaced, the
wipers may continue to wipe even
though most of the screen is dry.
INT: The wipers cycle when water
To prevent damage to the wiper is detected on the windscreen.
blades, make sure that the
The wiper speed and frequency are
windscreen is fully defrosted . Push = to the first stop for the
before switching on the rain adjusted automatically.
rear window wiper.
sensor. To manually adjust the sensitivity of . Push and hold at the second
the rain sensing:
stop to wash the rear window.
. Rotate the collar down for higher
The rear window wiper will cycle
sensitivity.
for a short time.
. Rotate the collar up for less
sensitivity.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Note: Power Outlets Note: Any device connected to a

. The rear window wiper cycles power socket must not exceed a
current draw of 10 amps.
intermittently. { Warning The power sockets operate with
. The rear window wiper operates
It is dangerous for the driver of a the ignition in the ON or the
when reverse gear is selected.
vehicle to attach or remove ACCESSORIES positions.
accessories from the power
Clock socket while driving. It may
To set the time and date, refer to distract the driver's attention,
“Time and Date” under Settings on putting the occupants of the
page 7-67. vehicle and other road users
at risk.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Console power socket Cargo area power socket

(Sportwagon)
A power socket is located in front of

the shift lever and inside the centre
console.
{ Caution
Do not use the cargo area power
socket for a long period with the
engine off as the vehicle battery
may go flat.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators

Evoke, SV6, SS
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
SSV, Calais, Calais V-Series

6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Instrument Cluster Odometer Fuel Gauge

The odometer shows how far the
vehicle has been driven in
kilometres.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can show how far
the vehicle has been driven since
the trip odometer was last reset.
The trip odometer is accessed and
reset through the Driver Information
Centre (DIC). See Driver
Information Centre (DIC) on
1. Tachometer. page 5-21. When the ignition is on, the fuel
2. Engine coolant temperature gauge shows how much fuel is left
gauge. Tachometer in the fuel tank. When the indicator
nears empty, a message in the
3. Fuel gauge. The tachometer displays the engine
Driver Information Centre (DIC)
speed in revolutions per
4. Speedometer. displays. See Fuel System
minute (rpm).
Messages on page 5-29. An arrow
Speedometer on the fuel gauge indicates the side
of the vehicle the fuel door is on.
The speedometer shows the
vehicle's speed in kilometres per
hour (km/h).
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Note: Large additions of fuel will Engine Coolant The gauge reading can move
change the gauge reading quickly. towards the H (hot) under the
It may take up to 10 minutes to
Temperature Gauge following conditions:
register small additions or if the key . Stop-start driving
is not removed during refuelling.
. High speed driving in warm
This prevents false readings due to
fuel movement when cornering. weather
If the vehicle is idling on a gradient . Hill climbing
for an extended period, the gauge
may change, but will correct itself
. Towing
once moving again. This may take This is normal.
up to 10 minutes.
Seat Belt Reminders
Driver Seat Belt Reminder Light
There is a driver seat belt reminder
This gauge shows the engine light on the instrument cluster.
coolant temperature when the
ignition is on. When the vehicle is started > light
flashes to remind drivers to fasten
If the indicator needle moves all the their seat belt. Then the light stays
way to H (hot), the engine is too hot. on until the belt is buckled.
If the vehicle has been operated A chime sounds when the seat belt
under normal driving conditions, pull is unbuckled and vehicle speed is
off the road, stop the vehicle, and above 22 km/h.
turn off the engine as soon as
possible. See Engine Overheating
on page 10-9.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
This cycle may continue several The front passenger seat belt Airbag Readiness Light
times if the driver remains or reminder light and chime may turn
becomes unbuckled during driving on if an object is put on the seat This light 9 shows if there is an
while the vehicle is moving. such as a briefcase, handbag, electrical problem with the airbag
If the driver seat belt is already grocery bag, laptop, or other system. For more information on the
buckled, neither the light nor chime electronic device. To turn off the airbag system, see Airbag System
comes on. reminder light and/or chime, remove on page 3-13.
the object from the seat or buckle
The airbag readiness light comes on
Passenger Seat Belt Reminder the seat belt.
for several seconds when the
Light
Rear Passenger Belt Reminder vehicle is started. If the light does
When the vehicle is started C light Light not come on then, have it fixed
flashes to remind the front immediately.
When the vehicle is started and
passenger to fasten their seat belt.
the rear doors are closed >>>
Then the light stays on until the belt
illuminates to remind the driver to
{ Warning
is buckled.
ensure that rear seat passengers If the airbag readiness light stays
A chime sounds when the seat belt fasten their seat belts. The icons on after the vehicle is started or
is unbuckled and vehicle speed is stay grey until the corresponding comes on while driving, it means
above 22 km/h. seat belt is buckled and then turn the airbag system might not be
This cycle may continue several solid or green. If the seat belt
working properly. The airbags in
times if the passenger remains or subsequently becomes unbuckled,
the vehicle might not inflate in a
becomes unbuckled while the the corresponding light will flash or
turn red. crash, or they could even inflate
vehicle is moving. without a crash. To help avoid
If the passenger seat belt is injury, have the vehicle serviced
buckled, neither the chime nor the right away.
light comes on.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Charging System Light could damage the emission control

{ Caution system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
This light " comes on briefly when and service might be required.
the ignition is turned on, but the If the vehicle is continually driven
with this light on, the emission To prevent more serious damage to
engine is not running, as a check to the vehicle:
show it is working. controls might not work as well,
the vehicle fuel economy might . Reduce vehicle speed.
If it does not, have the vehicle not be as good, and the engine
serviced by your dealer. . Avoid hard accelerations.
might not run as smoothly. This
The light should go out once the may lead to costly repairs that . Avoid steep uphill gradients.
engine starts. If it stays on, might not be covered by the New . If the vehicle can tow a trailer,
or comes on while driving, there Vehicle Voluntary Warranty. reduce the amount of cargo
could be a problem with the being hauled as soon as it is
charging system. Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, possible.
or fuel system of the vehicle can If the light continues to flash, when
Malfunction it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.
affect the vehicle's emission
Indicator Lamp controls and can cause this light Find a safe place to park. Turn the
This light comes on when the to come on. Modifications to vehicle off, wait at least 10 seconds,
ignition is turned on, as a check to these systems could lead to and restart the engine. If the light is
show it is working. If it does not, costly repairs not covered by the still flashing, follow the previous
have the vehicle serviced by your New Vehicle Voluntary Warranty. steps and see your dealer for
dealer. service as soon as possible.
If the malfunction indicator This light comes on during a Light On: An emission control
system malfunction has been
lamp * comes on and stays on malfunction in one of two ways:
detected on the vehicle. Diagnosis
while the engine is running, this Light Flashing: A misfire condition and service might be required.
indicates that there is a problem and has been detected. A misfire
service is required. increases vehicle emissions and
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
The light remains on until the

. Do not proceed until satisfied
problem is repaired. Contact your { Warning that braking is possible or that
dealer. the cause of the problem has
The brake system might not be been repaired.
working properly if the brake
Service Vehicle Soon system warning light is on.
. If necessary, contact your dealer.
Light Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to a
Electric Parking Brake
If the light B comes on, a
crash. If the light is still on after Light
condition exists that may require the
the vehicle has been pulled off
vehicle to be taken in for service. This light Y should come on
the road and carefully stopped,
If the light comes on, take the briefly as the engine is started. If it
have the vehicle towed for does not come on, have the vehicle
vehicle to your dealer for service as service.
soon as possible. serviced by your dealer.
The Electric Parking Brake (EPB)
Brake System Warning If the warning light $ comes on status light Y comes on when the
Light while driving, a chime sounds. Pull EPB is applied. If the light continues
off the road and stop. The pedal flashing after the parking brake is
The brake system warning light $ might be harder to push or go closer released, or while driving, there
should come on briefly as the to the floor. It might also take longer is a problem with the electric
engine is started. If it does not come to stop. parking brake system. A SERVICE
on have the vehicle serviced by . Check the brake fluid level. See PARKING BRAKE message
your dealer. Engine Compartment Overview may also display in the Driver
The warning light $ comes on to on page 10-4. Information Centre (DIC). See Brake
System Messages on page 5-27 for
indicate there is a brake problem.
more information.
If the light does not come on,
or remains flashing, see your dealer.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
The parking brake warning light 8 If the ABS light stays on, turn the Lane Departure Warning
should come on briefly when the ignition off. If the light comes on
while driving, stop as soon as it is
(LDW) Light
engine is started. If it does not come
on, have the vehicle serviced by safely possible and turn the ignition The vehicle may have LDW.
your dealer. off. Then start the engine again to
reset the system. If the ABS light This light @ briefly comes on amber
If this light comes on, there is a stays on, or comes on again while while starting the vehicle. If it does
problem with a system on the driving, the vehicle needs service. not, have the vehicle serviced by
vehicle that is causing the parking Contact a dealer. your dealer. If the system is working
brake system to work at a reduced normally, the light then turns off.
level. The vehicle can still be driven, If the regular brake system warning
light is not on, the vehicle still has This light comes on green when the
but should be taken to a dealer as
brakes, but not antilock brakes. system is on and ready to operate.
soon as possible. See Electric
If the regular brake system warning When the system determines that
Parking Brake on page 9-15 for
light is also on, the vehicle does not the vehicle is leaving its lane
more information.
have antilock brakes and there is a without using the turn signal, this
problem with the regular brakes. light will change to amber and flash.
Antilock Brake System See Brake System Warning Light on See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
(ABS) Warning Light page 5-17. on page 9-34.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) See Brake System Messages on
light ! comes on briefly when the page 5-27 for all brake-related DIC Forward Collision Alert
engine is started. messages. (FCA) Warning Light
If it does not, have the vehicle The vehicle may have FCA.
serviced by your dealer. If the
system is working normally, the The FCA warning lights are
indicator light then goes off. displayed in the Head-Up
Display (HUD).
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
The vehicle ahead light V comes This light comes on when the If the light comes on and stays on
on green when a vehicle is detected Traction Control System (TCS) while driving, there could be a
ahead. It changes to amber when has been turned off by pressing problem with the ESC and the
following another vehicle too the g button. vehicle might need service. When
closely. this warning light is on, the ESC is
This light also comes on and the off and does not limit wheel spin.
system turns off if there is a problem
with the TCS. The light flashes if the system is
active and is working to assist the
If the light comes on and stays on driver with directional control of the
for an extended period of time while vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
the system is turned on, contact a
Holden dealer. See Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) on page 9-18 for more
The forward collision alert comes on See Traction Control System (TCS) information.
and warns when a vehicle is being on page 9-17.
rapidly approached. Electronic Stability
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction
See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
System on page 9-23 for more Control (ESC) Indicator Control System (TCS)
information. Light Indicator/Warning Light
Traction Off Light This light d comes on briefly while
This light g comes on briefly while
starting the engine.
starting the engine. If it does not,
This light i comes on briefly while If it does not, have the vehicle have the vehicle serviced by your
starting the engine. If it does not, serviced by your dealer. If the dealer. If the system is working
have the vehicle serviced by your system is working normally, the normally, the indicator light then
dealer. If the system is working indicator light then goes off. goes off.
normally, the indicator light then
goes off.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
This light comes on when the ESC Engine Oil Pressure Light Low Fuel Warning Light
system is turned off. When the ESC
is off, the TCS is also off, and wheel This light . comes on briefly when
spin is not limited. If the ESC is off, { Caution the engine is started.
the system does not assist in Engine damage may result if you If it does not come on, have the
controlling the vehicle. Turn on the
keep driving. Do not run the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
TCS and the ESC, and the warning
engine. If the oil level is normal, If the system is working normally,
light turns off.
have the system checked by your the indicator light then goes off.
This light also comes on in dealer. This light also comes on when the
Competitive Driving Mode (Redline).
fuel tank is low on fuel and flashes
See Electronic Stability Control when very low on fuel. The low fuel
The oil pressure light :
(ESC) on page 9-18, Traction light remains on until the fuel tank is
Control System (TCS) on page 9-17 illuminates red when the ignition is
filled above the low fuel level. If it
and Competitive Driving Mode switched on and goes out shortly
does not, have your vehicle
(Redline) on page 9-20. after the engine starts.
serviced.
If the light : illuminates when the
Liquefied Petroleum Gas engine is running: Security Light
(LPG) Acceleration Light . Stop the vehicle as soon as it is The security light A should come
The LPG ACCEL light comes on safe to do so. on briefly as the engine is started.
during warm up mode. See Engine . Turn the ignition off. If the system is working normally,
Power Messages on page 5-29. the indicator light turns off. If it does
. Check the engine oil level. See not come on, have the vehicle
Engine Oil on page 10-6. serviced by your dealer.
. Contact your dealer.
. : remains illuminated until the
problem is repaired.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
If the light stays on and the engine Lamps On Reminder Information Displays
does not start, there could be a
problem with the theft-deterrent This light ; comes on when the
system. Contact your dealer. exterior lamps are in use. See Driver Information
Exterior Lamp Controls on page 6-1. Centre (DIC)
High-Beam On Light The Driver Information Centre (DIC)
Cruise Control Light displays information about the
The high-beam on light 3 comes
The cruise control light J comes vehicle. It also displays warning
on when the high-beam headlamps
messages if a system problem is
are in use. on whenever the cruise control
detected. See Vehicle Messages on
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam is set.
page 5-26. All messages appear in
Changer on page 6-2 for more The light goes out when the cruise the DIC display in the centre of the
information. control is turned off. See Cruise instrument cluster.
Control on page 9-21 for more
The vehicle may also have features
Front Fog Lamp Light information.
that can be customised through the
The fog lamp light # comes on controls on the radio. See Vehicle
Door open warning light Personalisation on page 5-32.
when the fog lamps are in use.
This light ? comes on when a door DIC Operation and Displays
The light goes out when the fog
lamps are turned off. See Fog is open or not securely latched.
The DIC has different displays,
Lamps on page 6-4 for more Before driving, check that all doors which can be accessed by using
information. are properly closed. the DIC buttons on the turn signal
lever to the left of the steering
wheel. The DIC displays trip, fuel,
vehicle system information, and
warning messages if a system
problem is detected.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Trip/Fuel Menu Items Trip

Press MENU on the turn signal This display shows the
lever until Trip/Fuel Menu current distance travelled in
is displayed. Use \ to scroll kilometres (km), since the last reset
through the following menu items for the trip odometer. The trip
which may include: odometer can be reset to zero by
pressing SET/CLR while the trip
. Digital Speedometer odometer display is showing.
. Trip Fuel Range
. Fuel Range This display shows the approximate
. Average Fuel Consumption distance the vehicle can be driven
DIC Buttons without refuelling. The fuel range
. Instantaneous Fuel estimate is based on an average of
1. SET/CLR: Press to set or clear Consumption the vehicle's fuel economy over
the menu item displayed. . Average Vehicle Speed recent driving history and the
2. \ : Use to scroll through the . Fuel Used amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank. Fuel range cannot be reset.
menus. . Navigation (if fitted)
Average Fuel Consumption
3. MENU: Press to display the Digital Speedometer
Trip/Fuel menu and the Vehicle This display shows the approximate
Information menu. This button is The speedometer, available on average litres per 100 kilometres
also used to return to or exit the some vehicles, shows how fast the (L/100 km). This number is
last screen displayed on vehicle is moving in kilometres per calculated based on the number of
the DIC. hour (km/h). The speedometer L/100 km recorded since the last
cannot be reset. time this menu item was reset. The
fuel economy can be reset by
pressing SET/CLR while the
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Average Fuel Economy display is speed

speed can
can be
be reset
reset by
by pressing
pressing Battery Voltage
showing. On some models, this SET/CLR
SET/CLR while
while the
the Average
Average Vehicle
Vehicle This display, available on some
display is shown on the same page Speed display
display is
is showing.
showing. vehicles, shows the current battery
with the instantaneous fuel
consumption display. Fuel
Fuel Used
Used voltage. If the voltage is in the
Thisvehicles
display with
shows the used
fuel used in normal range, the value will display.
Instantaneous Fuel Consumption On a fuel display, For example, the display may read
litresshows
this (L), since the used
the fuel last reset. The
in litres (L),
The instantaneous fuel consumption fuel used can reset.
be reset Battery Voltage 15.0 Volts. The
since the last Thebyfuel
pressing
used vehicle's charging system regulates
display shows the current fuel SET/CLR while the Fuel
can be reset by pressing SET/CLRUsed
economy in litres per 100 kilometres display voltage based on the state of the
while theisFuel
showing.
Used display battery. The battery voltage can
(L/100 km). This number reflects
is showing.
Navigation fluctuate while viewing this
only the fuel economy that the
information on the DIC. This is
vehicle has right now and changes Navigation
On vehicles with a Navigation
frequently as driving conditions system, this display shows the normal. See Charging System Light
On vehiclesinformation
Navigation with a Navigation
when on page 5-16 for more information.
change. Unlike average fuel
system,
guidancethis display shows the
is selected. If there is a problem with the battery
consumption, this display cannot be
reset. On some models, this display Navigation information when charging system, the DIC will
is shown on the same page with the guidance is selected. Menu Items
Vehicle Information display a message.
average fuel consumption display. Press MENU
Vehicle on the turn
Information Menusignal
Items Speed Warning
lever until Vehicle Information menu
Average Vehicle Speed Press MENU Use
is displayed. on the
\turn signal lever
to scroll
This display is used to set the
This display shows the average until Vehicle Information menu is vehicle speed at which the speed
through the following possible menu warning chime sounds and the alert
speed of the vehicle in kilometres displayed.
items: Use \ to scroll through
per hour (km/h). This average is the following possible menu items: is displayed. The speed can be set
calculated based on the various
. Battery Voltage by pressing SET/CLR while the
• Battery Voltage speed warning display is showing.
vehicle speeds recorded since the . Speed Warning
last reset of this value. The average • Speed Warning
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
ECO Menu Items

. Navigation (if fitted)
Warning (Continued) . PRNDL (shift lever position)
Press MENU on the turn signal
lever until ECO Menu is displayed. things you need to see when it is . Posted Speed Limit
Use \ to scroll through to the dark outside. Be sure to keep the . Lateral G Gauge
Average Fuel Economy display and HUD image dim and placed low in
the Economy Trend Statistics your field of view.
. Shift Up Meter
display. . Cruise Control Active
The average fuel economy can be For vehicles with HUD, some
displayed over the past 25, 100 and information concerning the
500 km. operation of the vehicle is projected
Press SET/CLR to select the onto the windscreen.
distance. The HUD information appears as an
The Economy Trend Statistic image focused out toward the front
display shows the fuel economy for of the vehicle.
the last 50 km. Each bar in the The HUD may display the following
graph represents 5 km. alerts and information for vehicles
equipped with these features:
Head-Up Display (HUD) . Speedometer
. Tachometer
{ Warning The HUD control is to the right side
. Turn Signal Indicators of the steering wheel.
If the HUD image is too bright, . High-Beam Indicator Symbol To adjust the HUD image so that
or too high in your field of view, it
. Forward Collision Alert Warnings items are properly displayed:
may take you more time to see
(Continued) . Audio Functions 1. Adjust the driver seat to a
comfortable position.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
2. Start the engine. Page one displays: Page four displays:

3. Adjust the HUD controls.
Use the following settings to adjust
the HUD:
$ : Press down or up to centre
the HUD image. The HUD image
can only be adjusted up and down,
not side to side. Page two displays: The
The display
display at
at the
the top
top of
of page
page four
four
PAGE : Push to change the shows
shows the
the gear
gear shift
shift timing.
timing. This
This
displayed page. display will appear
appear withwith an
an increase
increase
. Rotate clockwise to increase the in
in engine
engine RPM,
RPM. towards the upper
brightness of the display. end
The of the engine
display at theRPMbottomrange.
of page
. Rotate anticlockwise to decrease The display at the bottom of
four indicates the lateral
the brightness of the display. page four indicates
acceleration (G) to thethe left
lateral
or right
acceleration (G) to the left or right
when cornering.
. Rotate fully anticlockwise to turn when
the display off.
Page three displays: If Youcornering.
Cannot See the HUD
If You Cannot
Image When theSeeIgnition
the HUD Is On
There are four HUD pages that can
be viewed in the HUD display. Image
. When the Ignition
Is anything covering the Is On
• Is
HUDanything
lens? covering the
. HUD
Is thelens?
HUD dimmer setting bright
• Is the HUD dimmer setting bright
enough?
. enough?
Is the HUD image adjusted to
• Is
thethe HUD height?
proper image adjusted to
the proper height?
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13

. Are you wearing polarised
sunglasses? Vehicle Messages Battery Voltage and
. DIC messages display when the Charging Messages
Is ambient light low in the
direction the vehicle is facing? status of the vehicle has changed BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
and action may be needed to
If the HUD Image Is Not Clear This message displays when the
correct the condition. Multiple
vehicle has detected that the battery
. Is the HUD image too bright? messages appear one after another.
voltage is dropping beyond a
. Are the windscreen and HUD Press any of the DIC buttons on the reasonable point. The battery saver
lens clean? turn signal lever to acknowledge system starts reducing features of
and clear them from the display. the vehicle that may be noticed. At
More urgent messages cannot be the point that features are disabled,
cleared from the DIC display. All this message displays. Turn off
messages should be taken unnecessary accessories to allow
seriously. Clearing messages will the battery to recharge.
not correct the problem.
LOW BATTERY
Note: Messages displayed are
This message is displayed when the
dependent on vehicle variant. Not
battery voltage is low.
all messages may display.
SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM
This message is displayed when
there is a fault in the battery
charging system. Take the vehicle to
your dealer for service.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Brake System Messages SERVICE PARKING BRAKE Door open messages

BRAKE FLUID LOW This message is displayed when DRIVER DOOR OPEN
there is a problem with the electric
This message is displayed when the parking brake. See Electric Parking This message will display when the
brake fluid level is low. See Brake Brake on page 9-15 for more driver door is open. Close the door
Fluid on page 10-14. information. Take the vehicle to your completely.
RELEASE PARKING BRAKE dealer. BONNET OPEN
This message is displayed if the STEP ON BRAKE TO RELEASE This message will display when the
electric parking brake is on while the PARK BRAKE bonnet is open. Close the bonnet
vehicle is in motion. Release it This message is displayed if you completely.
before you attempt to drive. See attempt to release the electric LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
Electric Parking Brake on page 9-15 parking brake without the brake
for more information. pedal applied. See Electric Parking This message will display when the
Brake on page 9-15 for more driver side rear door is open. Close
SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST the door completely.
information.
This message may be displayed PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
when there is a problem with the
brake boost assist system. When Cruise Control Messages This message will display when the
this message is displayed, the brake CRUISE SET TO XXX front passenger door is open. Close
boost assist motor might be heard the door completely.
This message displays when the
operating and you might notice RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN
cruise control is set and shows the
pulsation in the brake pedal. Take
speed it was set to. See Cruise This message will display when the
the vehicle to your dealer for
Control on page 9-21. passenger side rear door is open.
service.
Close the door completely.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
BOOTLID OPEN If this message continues to appear, Engine Oil Messages

This message will display when the have the system repaired by your
dealer as soon as possible to avoid CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
boot is open. Close the boot
completely. damage to the engine. This message displays when the
ENGINE OVERHEATED — IDLE next 15,000 km interval scheduled
Engine Cooling System ENGINE service is approaching. The
reminder is reset when the vehicle
Messages This message displays when the is serviced. See the Service and
engine coolant temperature is too Warranty Booklet for more
A/C OFF DUE TO HIGH
hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to information.
ENGINE TEMP
idle until it cools down.
This message displays when the OIL PRESSURE LOW— STOP
ENGINE OVERHEATED — STOP ENGINE
engine coolant becomes hotter than
ENGINE
the normal operating temperature. This message displays if low oil
To avoid added strain on a hot This message displays and a pressure levels occur. Stop the
engine, the air conditioning continuous chime sounds if the vehicle as soon as safely possible
compressor automatically turns off. engine cooling system reaches and do not operate it until the cause
When the coolant temperature unsafe temperatures for operation. of the low oil pressure has been
returns to normal, the air Stop and turn off the vehicle as corrected. Check the oil as soon as
conditioning compressor turns back soon as it is safe to do so to avoid possible and have the vehicle
on. You can continue to drive the severe damage. This message serviced by your dealer.
vehicle. clears when the engine has cooled
to a safe operating temperature. ENGINE OIL LOW— ADD OIL
This message displays if the engine
oil level is low. Stop the vehicle as
soon as safely possible. Check the
engine oil level. See Engine Oil on
page 10-6.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Engine Power Messages Fuel System Messages Lamp Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED FUEL LEVEL LOW AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL ON
This message displays when the This message displays when the This message is displayed when the
vehicle's engine power is reduced. vehicle is low on fuel. Refuel as automatic light control has been
Reduced engine power can affect soon as possible. turned on. See Automatic Headlamp
the vehicle's ability to accelerate. System on page 6-3.
If this message is on, but there Key and Lock Messages AUTOMATIC LIGHT
is no reduction in performance, CONTROL OFF
proceed to your destination. The NO REMOTE DETECTED
performance may be reduced the This message displays when the This message is displayed when the
next time the vehicle is driven. The transmitter battery is weak on automatic light control has been
vehicle may be driven at a reduced vehicles with keyless access. See turned off. See Automatic Headlamp
speed while this message is on, but “Starting the Vehicle with a Low System on page 6-3.
maximum acceleration and speed Transmitter Battery” under Remote CHECK XXX LAMP
may be reduced. Anytime this Keyless Entry (RKE) System
message stays on, the vehicle Operation on page 2-5. When a headlamp bulb or brake
should be taken to your dealer for lamp bulb is out, this message
REPLACE BATTERY IN displays to show which bulb needs
service as soon as possible.
REMOTE KEY to be replaced. See Bulb
LPG WARM UP MODE Replacement on page 10-17.
This message displays when the
This message displays when the battery in the Remote Keyless CHECK XXX INDICATOR LAMP
LPG system temperature is cold. Entry (RKE) transmitter needs
During warm up mode, reduced to be replaced. See “Battery When one of the turn signals is out,
engine power may be noticeable Replacement” under Remote this message displays to show
until warm up is complete. Keyless Entry (RKE) System which bulb needs to be replaced.
Operation on page 2-5. See Bulb Replacement on
page 10-17.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
INDICATOR ON Ride Control System Security Messages

This message is displayed if the Messages THEFT ATTEMPTED
turn signal has been left on. Turn off
the turn signal. SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL This message displays if the vehicle
This message displays when there detects a tamper condition.
Object Detection System is a problem with the Traction
Messages Control System (TCS). When this Service Vehicle Messages
message is displayed, the system SERVICE AC SYSTEM
PARK ASSIST OFF will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your
driving accordingly. See your dealer This message displays if there is a
This message displays when the problem with the air conditioning
park assist system has been turned for service.
system. Take the vehicle to your
off or when there is a temporary SERVICE ESP dealer for service.
condition causing the system to be
This message displays if there is a
disabled.
disabled. See
See Park
Parking Assist
Assist on on SERVICE POWER STEERING
problem with the Electronic Stability
page 9-26.
9-26. This message displays if there is a
Control (ESC) system. If this
SERVICE PARK ASSIST message appears, try to reset the problem with the power steering
system. Stop; turn off the engine for system. Take the vehicle to your
This message displays if there is a dealer for service.
problem with the Park Assist at least 15 seconds; then start the
system. Do not use this system to engine again. If this message still SERVICE STEERING
help
help you
you park.
park. See
See Park
Parking Assist
Assist comes on, it means there is a COLUMN LOCK
on page 9-26.
9-26. problem. See your dealer for
service. The vehicle is safe to drive, This message displays if there is a
however, you do not have the problem with the steering column
benefit of ESC, so reduce your lock system. Take the vehicle to
speed and drive accordingly. your dealer for service.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON vehicle to unlock the steering SHIFT TO PARK

This message displays if there is a column. If the vehicle still does not This message displays when the
problem with the vehicle. Take the start, turn the steering wheel the transmission needs to be shifted to
vehicle to your dealer for service. other way, and try starting the P (Park). This may appear when
vehicle again. attempting to remove the key from
STEERING COLUMN IS LOCKED
the ignition or from the vehicle if the
This message displays when the Transmission Messages vehicle is not in P (Park).
engine is running and the steering PRESS CLUTCH TO START
column is locked. Take the vehicle TRANSMISSION HOT — IDLE
to your dealer for service. This message displays when ENGINE
attempting to start a vehicle with a This message displays and a chime
Starting the Vehicle manual transmission without sounds if the transmission fluid in
pressing on the clutch pedal. the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the
Messages transmission fluid temperature high
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
TURN STEERING WHEEL TURN can cause damage to the vehicle.
KEY OFF THEN ON This message displays if there is a Stop the vehicle and let it idle to
problem with the transmission. See allow the transmission to cool. This
This message displays when the your dealer.
steering column is locked. Try message clears when the fluid
turning the steering wheel while SHIFT DENIED temperature reaches a safe level.
turning the vehicle off and then back This message displays when
on to unlock the steering column. attempting to use the automatic Vehicle Reminder
TURN STEERING WHEEL START transmission manual mode to shift Messages
VEHICLE AGAIN to too low or too high of a gear. See
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE
“Active Select (A/S) mode” under
This message displays when you try WITH CARE
Shift Lever on page 9-9 for more
to start the vehicle, but the column information. This message displays when ice
remains locked. Try turning the conditions are possible.
steering wheel while starting the
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Washer Fluid Messages Vehicle Entering the Personalisation

Menus
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID Personalisation 1. Press CONFIG to access the
This message may display when the The infotainment system controls Configuration Settings menu or
washer fluid level is low. See are used to access the on vehicles with Navigation,
Washer Fluid on page 10-14. personalisation menus for press HOME then touch Config
customising vehicle features. screen button.
Window Messages 2. Turn the TUNE/MENU switch to
CONFIG (Configuration): Press to
OPEN, THEN CLOSE DRIVER/ access the Configuration highlight Vehicle Settings.
PASSENGER WINDOW Settings menu. 3. Press the centre of the TUNE/
This message is displayed when the HOME: Press to display the Home MENU switch to select the
window needs to be reprogrammed. screen on vehicles with Navigation Vehicle Settings menu. The
If the vehicle's battery has been then touch Config to access the ignition must be in the ON
recharged or disconnected, you will Configuration Settings menu. position.
need to reprogram each front
TUNE/MENU: Press the centre of The following list of menu items may
window for the express-up feature to
this switch to enter the menus and be available:
work. See Power Windows on
select menu items. Turn the switch . Climate and Air Quality
page 2-20.
to scroll through the menus.
. Comfort and Convenience
/ BACK: Press to exit or move
.
backward in a menu. Collision Detection Systems
. Lighting
. Power Door Locks
. Remote Lock/Unlock/Start
. Return to Factory Settings?
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Turn the TUNE/MENU switch to Press / BACK to confirm the Chime Volume
highlight the menu. Press the selection and move back to the This allows the selection of the
TUNE/MENU switch to select it. last menu. chime volume level.
Each of the menus is detailed in the
following information. Alternatively, Remote Start Heated Seats Press the TUNE/MENU switch when
the touch screen may be used to When on, this feature will turn the Chime Volume is highlighted. Turn
select. heated seats on when using remote the switch to select Normal or High.
start, on cold days. Press / BACK to confirm and go
Climate and Air Quality
back to the last menu.
Selecting the Climate and Air Press the TUNE/MENU switch when
Quality menu may display the Remote Start Auto Heat Seat is Button Chime
following options: highlighted to select On or Off. This allows selection of
Press / BACK to return to the feedback when touch screen
. Auto Fan Speed
last menu. buttons are pressed.
. Remote Start Auto Heat Seat
Comfort and Convenience Reverse Tilt Mirror
Auto Fan Speed
Selecting the Comfort and This allows the reverse tilt mirror to
This will allow you to select the Convenience menu may display the be set to on or off.
automatic fan speed. This feature following options:
sets the climate control fan speed to Press the TUNE/MENU switch when
. Chime Volume Reverse Tilt Mirror is highlighted, to
maintain the interior temperature.
. Button Chime open the menu. Turn the switch to
Press the TUNE/MENU switch when highlight On or Off. Press the
Auto Fan Speed is highlighted to . Reverse Tilt Mirror TUNE/MENU switch to confirm the
open the menu. Turn the switch to selection and move back to the
. Personalisation by Driver
highlight High, Medium, or Low. last menu.
. Auto Reverse Gear Wiper
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 6/6/13
Personalisation
Personalisation by
by Driver
Driver Press the TUNE/MENU switch when Press TUNE/MENU to select On or
This
This allows
allows the
the selection
selection ofofthe
the Park Assist is highlighted. Turn the Off. Press / BACK to confirm the
switch to select Off, On or On with
personalisation
personalisation settings
settings that
that are
are selection and move back to the
Tow Bar Attached. Press the TUNE/
specific
specific toto each or or
driver
each key
driver otherwise
or otherwise
the same last menu.
MENU switch to confirm and go
will remainwhich
no matter the same,
same no matter
no
key was matter
used to
back to the last menu. Exit Lighting
which key start
enter and was used to enter and
the vehicle.
start This allows the selection of how
Autothe vehicle.
Reverse Gear Wiper Side Blind Zone Alert
long the exterior lamps stay on
Auto
WhenReverse Gear Wiper
the windscreen wipers are on, This allows selection of whether the when leaving the vehicle when it is
the rear Side Blind Zone Alert is enabled or dark outside.
When thewiper comes on
windscreen wipers disabled.
automatically
are when
on, the rear reverse
wiper comesgear
on is Press the TUNE/MENU switch
selected.
automatically when reverse gear is Lighting when Exit Lighting is highlighted.
selected.
Collision Detection Systems Select the Lighting menu and the Turn the switch to select Off,
30 Seconds, 1 Minute, or 2 Minutes.
Collision Detection
Selecting the CollisionSystems
Detection following will be displayed:
Press / BACK to confirm and go
Systems menu
Selecting may display
the Collision the
Detection
. Vehicle Locator Lights
following menu
Systems options:
may display the . Exit Lighting
following
. options:
Park Assist Power Door Locks
Vehicle Locator Lights
•. Park Assist
Side Blind Zone Alert Selecting the Power Door Locks
This allows the vehicle locator lights menu may display the following
•ParkSide Blind Zone Alert
Assist to be turned on or off. When on, the options:
Park Assist the Park Assist
This allows headlamps will flash when K is . Auto Door Lock
This allows
feature, the Park
audible only,Assist
to be feature,
turned pressed.
on or offonly,
and to
adjusted for on
when a
. Auto Door Unlock
audible be turned or off Press the TUNE/MENU switch when
tow adjusted
and bar is attached.
for when a tow bar is Vehicle Locator Lights is highlighted
attached. to open the menu. Turn the TUNE/
MENU switch to highlight On or Off.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Auto Door Lock Remote Lock/Unlock/Start Remote Lock Feedback

This allows you to select if the doors Selecting the Remote Lock, Unlock, This allows selection of what type of
are automatically locked when the Start menu may display the feedback is given when locking the
vehicle is shifted from P (Park). following options: vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
Auto Door Unlock . Remote Unlock Feedback Press the TUNE/MENU switch
when Remote Lock Feedback is
This allows selection of which of the . Remote Lock Feedback
highlighted. Turn the switch to select
doors will automatically unlock when . Remote Door Unlock Lights and Horn, Lights Only, Horn
the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). Only, or OFF. Press the TUNE/
. Passive Door Unlock
Press the TUNE/MENU switch when MENU switch to confirm and go
Auto Door Unlock is highlighted. . Passive Door Lock back to the last menu.
Turn the switch to select All Doors, . Remote Left in Veh. Reminder
Driver Door, or Off. Press the TUNE/ Remote Door Unlock
MENU switch to confirm and press Remote Unlock Feedback This allows selection of which doors
BACK to go back to the last menu. This allows selection of what type of will unlock when pressing K on the
Press / BACK to return to the feedback is given when unlocking RKE transmitter.
last menu. the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
Press the TUNE/MENU switch when
When the vehicle is shifted into Press the TUNE/MENU switch when Remote Door Unlock is highlighted.
P (Park) the above setting also Remote Unlock Feedback is Turn the switch to select All Doors
applies to which of the doors will highlighted. Turn the switch to select or Driver Door Only. When set to
automatically unlock. Flash Lights or OFF. Press the Driver Door Only, the driver door
TUNE/MENU switch to confirm and will unlock the first time K is
go back to the last menu. pressed and all doors will unlock
when K is pressed a second time.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
When set to All Doors, all of the Press the TUNE/MENU switch when Return to Factory Settings?
doors will unlock at the first press Passive Door Lock is highlighted to
Select Return to Factory Settings?
of K. Press the TUNE/MENU switch select On or Off. Press / BACK to to return all vehicle personalisation
to confirm and go back to the return to the last menu. to the default settings. Turn the
last menu. Note: It may also be possible to switch to select Yes or No. Press
Passive Door Unlock (Keyless select feedback (Lights Only or the TUNE/MENU switch to confirm
Access) Lights and Horn). and go back to the last menu.
This allows selection of which doors Remote Left in Vehicle Reminder
are unlocked by pressing the button When on, a horn chirp will sound if
on the outside door handle. the doors are closed with the
Press the TUNE/MENU switch when ignition off and at least one
Passive Door Unlock is highlighted. transmitter has not been removed
Turn the switch to select All Doors from the vehicle.
or Driver Door. Press the TUNE/ Press TUNE/MENU when Remote
MENU switch to confirm and go Left in Veh. Reminder is highlighted.
A f indicates the feature is
Passive Door Lock (Keyless selected.
Access)
This allows selection of whether the
doors are locked 8 seconds after
the key is removed from the vehicle
and the doors are shut.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Lighting 6-1
Lighting Exterior Lighting AUTO (Automatic headlamps):

Headlamps and park lamps switch
on and off automatically. Select high
Exterior Lamp Controls and low beam using the lever.
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1 ; (Park lamps): Turns on the
Headlamp High/Low-Beam park, tail and rear number plate
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 lamps.
Daytime Running 2 (Headlamps): Turns on the
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 headlamps and all park lamps.
Automatic Headlamp
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 # (Fog lamps): Turns on the fog
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4 lamps (if equipped).
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Interior Lighting
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 O (Off): Turns the headlamps and
Load Compartment Lamps . . . . 6-5 park lamps off. The switch returns to
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 AUTO position.Turn to O again to
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 re-enable automatic headlamps.
Glove Box Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Sun Visor Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Lighting Features
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-7
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
6-2 Lighting
. The high beam indicator
Headlamp High/ Daytime Running
lamp 3 illuminates on the
Low-Beam Changer instrument panel.
Lamps (DRL)
To return to low beam: The vehicle may have DRL.
. Push the lever towards the front The DRL illuminate when the
of the vehicle then release. following occur:
To flash the high beam lamps:

. During daylight conditions.
. Pull the lever toward the rear of
. The engine is running.
the vehicle and release. . The fog lamps are off.
. The high beam lamps can be Note: If the lamp control switch is
flashed even if the headlamps turned to ; or 5, the DRL will
and/or ignition are off. turn off. The DRL will turn on in
night time conditions if the
automatic headlamp system is
To activate high beam: turned off.
. With the headlamps on, push
the lever toward the front of
vehicle until it clicks, then
release.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Lighting 6-3
Automatic Headlamp The system may also turn on the

Warning (Continued)
headlamps when driving through a
System parking garage or tunnel.
When the exterior lamp control is In situations such as this, set the
When it is bright enough outside,
set to AUTO and it is dark enough lamp switch to 2, otherwise your
the headlamps will turn off.
outside, the headlamps come on safety and that of other road
automatically. The automatic headlamp system users could be endangered.
turns off when the exterior lamp
control is turned to O or the ignition
is off.
Lights On with Wipers
If the windscreen wipers are
The automatic headlamp system
activated in daylight with the engine
defaults to on with each ignition
on, and the exterior lamp control is
cycle.
in AUTO, the headlamps, park
lamps, and other exterior lamps
{ Warning come on. The transition time for the
lamps coming on varies based on
The automatic headlamp sensor wiper speed. When the wipers are
cannot replace the driver's not operating, these lamps turn off.
personal judgement of the
Move the exterior lamp control to P
prevailing light conditions. For
There is a light sensor located on example, the sensor is unable to or ; to disable this feature.
top of the instrument panel. Do not detect foggy conditions.
cover the sensor. Otherwise the
headlamps will come on when they (Continued)
are not needed.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
6-4 Lighting
. A green arrow on the instrument
Hazard Warning Flashers Turn and Lane-Change panel flashes when the lamps
Signals are in operation.
Fog Lamps
The vehicle may have fog lamps.
. In very heavy fog, vision may be
improved by having the park
lamps and fog lamps on and
turning the headlamps off.
. Reduce speed when driving
in fog.
. Check State laws regarding use
of fog lamps when driving.
Press | to turn the hazard warning
. Push the lever in the direction
flasher on or off, when the ignition is . Press # to turn the fog
in any position. the steering wheel is turned.
lamps on.
All turn signals flash continuously.
. To signal a lane change, push . When the fog lamps are turned
the lever part way in the
Use the hazard warning flasher if direction of the turn. on, the fog lamp indicator #
the vehicle becomes a traffic illuminates on the instrument
hazard, day or night. The turn signals will flash three cluster.
times (six times when a trailer is
Note: Using hazard warning connected).
flashers while the vehicle is moving,
is illegal in some States and
. To cancel the lane change
countries. function, push the lever in either
direction.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Lighting 6-5
Interior Lighting Load Compartment Two settings are available:

Lamps . + (On/off)
Instrument Panel The lamps illuminate when the boot
Illumination Control
. 4 (Door activated): The lamp
(Sedan) / tailgate (Sportwagon) is automatically switches on when
opened and switch off when closed. a door is opened, the vehicle is
unlocked or the ignition is
Dome Lamps turned off.
The lamp dims to off after all
doors are closed.
. Switching the ignition on dims
the lamps off immediately
(unless a door remains open).
. When the interior lamps are set
to door activated, they operate
automatically only when it
is dark.
The instruments are illuminated . The lamps switch off
when the ambient light sensor
approximately 10 minutes after
detects darkness.
the ignition is turned off. See
To adjust the instrument lighting, The vehicle has front dome lamps Battery Power Protection on
rotate D until the desired level is located in the centre‑front and page 6-7.
centre-rear of the roof.
reached.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
6-6 Lighting
Reading Lamps Rear reading lamps Glove Box Lamps

Front reading lamps The glove box lamp illuminates
when the glove box is opened and
switches off when closed.
Sun Visor Lamps

The vehicle may have lamps at
either side of the mirror.
The lamps turn on and off
automatically when the cover is
opened and closed.
. The vehicle may have rear

reading lamps.
. The vehicle may have front
reading lamps.
. Rear reading lamps are located
in the centre-rear roof console.
. Front reading lamps are located
in the centre-front roof console. . Press ( or ) to switch the
lamp on or off.
. Press ( or ) to switch the
lamp on or off.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Lighting 6-7
Lighting Features Exit Lighting Once the lamps have been

deactivated, they are reactivated if
Headlamps and taillamps illuminate either:
Entry Lighting the way for an adjustable time after
leaving the vehicle.
. The ignition is switched on
The headlamps, tail lamps, number
. The vehicle is unlocked
plate lamps, reverse lamps, dome Note: The automatic headlamp
lamps and most of the interior system must be on. . The boot is opened
lights turn on briefly when the Activation, deactivation and duration
. The tailgate is opened
of lighting of this function can be
transmitter K button is pressed, changed. See “Exterior Lighting
or when the door handle is pulled by Unlocking” under Vehicle
on a keyless access vehicle. After Personalisation on page 5-32.
about 30 seconds the exterior lamps
turn off, then the dome lamps and Battery Power Protection
remaining interior lights dim to off.
To prevent the battery from
This feature can be changed. See discharging, the lamps for the glove
“Exterior Lighting by Unlocking” box, luggage compartment and
under Vehicle Personalisation on reading lamps are switched off
page 5-32. automatically approximately
10 minutes after the ignition is
turned off.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
6-8 Lighting
2 NOTES
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment Navigation
Using the Navigation
Introduction
System System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-40
7-44
General information
Do the following before driving:
Navigation Symbols . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Introduction Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47 . Read the infotainment system
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Configure Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55 section to become familiar with
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-3 Global Positioning the functions.
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 System (GPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59 . Become familiar with the hard
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 7-7 Vehicle Positioning . . . . . . . . . . 7-60 keys on the faceplate and
Using the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Problems with Route touch-sensitive screen buttons.
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61
Map Data Updates . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61 ‐ Press, refers to hardkeys.
Radio Database Coverage ‐ Touch, refers to screen keys.
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61 . Set up the audio by presetting
Radio Data System (RDS) . . . 7-17
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 Voice Recognition favourite stations, setting the
Quick Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62 tone and adjusting the speaker
Pandora Internet Radio . . . . . . 7-18 settings.
Settings
Stitcher Internet Radio . . . . . . . 7-23 . Set up the navigation features
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
Audio Players before driving, such as entering
Bluetooth Phone/Devices an address or a preset
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29 destination or delete information
Hands-Free Phone . . . . . . . . . . 7-75 you may have entered using
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 various options.
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Bluetooth Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
7-2 Infotainment System

. The Bluetooth® word mark and
logo are registered trademarks { Danger { Warning
and are owned by the Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. Taking your eyes off the road for Do not use a mobile phone when
® too long or too often while using driving.
. iPod is a registered trademark
the navigation system could Make sure that Bluetooth® is
of Apple Inc.
cause a crash resulting in injury activated before driving. If not,
. Pandora® is a registered or death to yourself or others.
trademark of Pandora stop at a safe place to use a
Focus your attention on driving. mobile phone.
Media, Inc.
. Stitcher SmartRadio™ is a
registered trademark of
Stitcher, Inc. { Warning { Caution
About the system When driving the vehicle, be sure Do not place beverages close to
to keep the volume of the unit set the audio system. The audio
. The system includes navigation
low enough to hear sounds from system mechanism may be
and audio functions.
outside the vehicle (e.g. road and damaged if they spill.
. Some features may be disabled traffic conditions).
while driving. These functions Do not strike or allow anything to
will be greyed-out. impact the audio system as
. A greyed-out function indicates it damage to the system
is not available when the vehicle mechanisms could occur.
is moving.
. All functions are available when
the vehicle is parked.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Traffic Message Channel (TMC) must only operate the TMC when No guarantee or any warranties are
feature the vehicle is at a complete stop provided as to the availability,
and it is safe to do so. accuracy or completeness of the
The following is a brief summary of TMC, and to the extent which it is
the terms and conditions (as Service continuity and reception lawful to do so, any warranties
updated from time to time) that Reasonable endeavours will be which might otherwise be implied by
apply to the use of the Traffic made to provide the TMC, 24 hours any State or Federal legislation in
Message Channel (TMC). a day, 365 days a year. However, relation to the TMC are excluded.
To view the full terms and conditions the service may occasionally be For operation, see “Traffic Settings”
relevant to the use of the service, unavailable for technical reasons or under Configure Menu on
refer to: www.sunatraffic.com.au/ for planned maintenance. The page 7-55.
termsandconditions/ provider of the TMC reserves the
right to withdraw the service at
Appropriate use any time. Theft-Deterrent Feature
The TMC is intended as an Uninterrupted reception of the TMC The infotainment system includes
aid only, and does not provide cannot be assumed at any particular an electronically coded security
comprehensive or accurate location. system.
information on all occasions.
This electronically links the
Limitation of liability
The TMC service should not be infotainment system to the vehicle.
relied upon for journeys that are Neither GM Holden nor the provider
time critical because, on occasions, of the TMC will be liable to you or to Overview
you may experience delays even any third party for any damages
when using the TMC service. either direct, indirect, incidental, The infotainment system is
consequential or otherwise arising controlled by using the buttons,
Use of the TMC while driving out of the use of or inability to use touch screen, steering wheel
You must operate the TMC in the TMC. controls and voice recognition.
accordance with all relevant road See Using the System on page 7-7.
rules and laws. In particular you
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Radio without Navigation 11. Volume/power switch

12. Home button
13. Source button
14. Eject button
1. Tone settings button 6. Seek previous/reverse button

2. Favourites button 7. Disc slot (CD)
3. Tune/menu switch 8. Seek next/forward button
4. Back button 9. Configuration menu button
5. Play/pause button 10. Phone/mute button
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Radio with Navigation 11. Volume/power switch

12. Home button
13. Source button
14. Eject button
Infotainment Control Buttons
The buttons on the faceplate are
used to start primary functions while
using the infotainment system.
The available buttons depend on
the infotainment system fitted.
SRCE (Source): Press to change
the audio source to AM, FM, CD,
USB, AUX, or Bluetooth Audio.
HOME: Press to go to the Home
Page. See “Home Page” in this
section.
1. Repeat button 6. Seek previous/reverse button t SEEK (Previous/Reverse):
2. Destination button 7. Disc slot (CD, DVD) . CD, USB, Bluetooth Audio:
3. Tune/menu switch 8. Seek next/forward button Press to seek to the beginning of
the current or previous track.
4. Back button 9. Favourites button
5. Navigation button 10. Phone/mute button
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13

. CD, USB, Bluetooth Audio: . CD, USB, Bluetooth Audio: preset Favourite Pages can be
Press and hold to quickly Press and hold to fast forward changed by pressing the Config
reverse through a track. Release through a track. Release the button on the Home Page, then
the button to return to playing button to return to playing pressing Radio Settings, and then
speed. See CD Player on speed. See CD Player on pressing Number of Favourite
page 7-27, USB on page 7-32, page 7-27, USB on page 7-32, Pages.
or Bluetooth Audio on or Bluetooth Audio on
page 7-39. page 7-39. NAV (Navigation):
. AM, FM: Press to seek to the . AM, FM: Press to seek to the
. Press to view the vehicle's
previous strong station. previous strong station. current position on the map
screen.
DEST (Destination): s (Play/Pause): Press to pause
or resume playback. See CD Player
. Continue pressing to cycle
. Press to enter a destination. through the full map and split
on page 7-27, USB on page 7-32,
. If a destination has already been or Bluetooth Audio on page 7-39. screens.
entered, press to access the 5 /> (Phone/Mute)
Route Menu. See Destination on TONE: Press to access the Tone
page 7-47. Settings menu screen to adjust . Press to enter the phone main
Bass, Mid (Midrange), Treble, EQ, screen. See Bluetooth on
O VOL (Power/Volume): Fade, and Balance. Tone settings page 7-69, Hands-Free Phone
. Press to turn the system on are specific to each source. See on page 7-75.
and off. AM-FM Radio on page 7-15. . Press and hold to mute or
. Turn to adjust the volume. FAV (Favourites): Press to display unmute the infotainment system.
the current favourite page number
u SEEK (Next/Forward): above the preset buttons. Keep
RPT (Repeat): Press to repeat the
last voice guidance prompt.
. CD, USB, Bluetooth Audio: pressing to scroll through the
Press to seek the next track. favourites pages. The stored / BACK: Press to return to the
stations for each list displays on the previous screen in a menu.
bottom of the screen. The number of
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
TUNE/MENU Switch: Steering Wheel Controls infotainment system. Press again to

. Turn to change a radio station. turn the sound on. Press to cancel
See AM-FM Radio on voice recognition.
page 7-15. _ SRC ^ (Thumbwheel Control):
. Turn to highlight a feature within Press to select an audio source.
a menu. Press the centre of the Use the thumbwheel to select the
TUNE/MENU switch to activate next or previous favourite radio
the highlighted feature. station, CD track, MP3 track, USB
CONFIG (Configuration Menu): track, and Bluetooth Audio track.
Press to adjust features for Use _ SRC to skip to the next song
Languages, Time and Date, Radio or show using Pandora or Stitcher.
Settings, Phone Settings, Display See Pandora Internet Radio on
Settings, and Vehicle Settings. page 7-18 or Stitcher Internet Radio
X (Eject): Press to eject a disc Some audio functions can be on page 7-23.
from the infotainment system. See controlled through the steering + x − (Volume): Press + to
CD Player on page 7-27. wheel controls. increase the volume. Press − to
Touch screen buttons b / g (Push to Talk): Press to decrease.
interact with Bluetooth or voice
Touch screen buttons are on the
screen and highlighted when a recognition. See Bluetooth on Using the System
feature is available. Some toggle page 7-69 or Voice Recognition on
page 7-62. The infotainment system is
screen buttons highlight when active controlled by touching the screen,
and grey out when inactive. $ / i (Mute/End Call): Press to using the switches and pressing the
decline an incoming call, or to end a buttons.
current call. Press to silence the
vehicle speakers while using the
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Voice recognition, activated through Fav: Press/touch to display a page 3. Touch a screen button to add or
the steering wheel controls, can be of stored (favourite) AM or FM remove it from the first Home
used to control the infotainment stations. Keep pressing Fav to scroll Page. A f indicates it will be
features. through the favourite pages. displayed. The maximum
Press b / g on the steering wheel More r : Touch to go to the number of buttons on Home
controls to begin voice recognition. next page. Page 1 is eight.
See Voice Recognition on 4. Touch Done.
page 7-62. Home Page Customisation
To move screen buttons:
Home Page 1. Touch Menu.
2. Select Sort.
3. Touch to select an icon to move
and swap with another icon on
the first Home Page only.
4. Touch Done.
To restore Home Page 1 defaults:
The first Home Page can be 1. Touch Menu.
customised.
2. Select Restore Home Page
The Home Page allows access to To add screen buttons: Defaults.
many of the features.
1. Touch Menu. 3. Touch Yes or Cancel.
Back: Press/touch to return to the
previous page. 2. Select Customise.
Home: Press/touch to go back to
the Home Page.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Home Page Features

Touch screen buttons are
highlighted when a feature is
available, and greyed out when not
available.
Various functions are disabled when Touch the Navigation screen button Touch the Phone screen button to
the vehicle is moving. to display a map of your current display the Phone main page. See
vehicle position. See Using the Bluetooth on page 7-69 and
Navigation System on page 7-40, Hands-Free Phone on page 7-75.
Maps on page 7-44, Navigation
Symbols on page 7-45, and
Configure Menu on page 7-55.
Touch the Now Playing screen

button to display the active source
page. The sources available are Touch the Config screen button to
AM, FM, CD, USB/iPod, Pandora, display the Config main page. From
Stitcher, and AUX. this display, adjust features such
See AM-FM Radio on page 7-15, Touch the Destination screen button as time and date, radio, phone,
CD Player on page 7-27, Pandora to display the Destination Entry navigation, vehicle, and display.
Internet Radio on page 7-18, home page or the Destination Menu. See Settings on page 7-67. For
Stitcher Internet Radio on The available screen buttons navigation settings, see Configure
page 7-23, and Auxiliary Devices on provide easy access to a variety of Menu on page 7-55.
page 7-38. ways to enter a destination. See
Destination on page 7-47.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Touch the Tone screen button to Touch the AM screen button to Touch the Stitcher screen button (if
display the Tone main page. Adjust display the AM main page and play equipped) to display the Stitcher
the tone and speakers by pressing the current or last tuned AM station. home page and streams news,
the screen buttons to change the See AM-FM Radio on page 7-15. sports, and entertainment shows
levels of sound for treble, midrange, through the audio system. See
bass, fade, and balance. See Stitcher Internet Radio on
AM-FM Radio on page 7-15. page 7-23.
Touch the Pandora screen button to

display the Pandora home page and
streams personalised radio stations
Touch the FM screen button to based on artists, songs, genres, and Touch the CD screen button to
display the FM main page and play comedians. See Pandora Internet display the CD main page and play
the current or last tuned FM station. Radio on page 7-18. the current or last CD track
See AM-FM Radio on page 7-15. selected. See CD Player on
page 7-27.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 6/6/13
Touch the USB screen button to

display the USB main page and play
the current or last track selected.
See Auxiliary Devices on page 7-38.
Touch the E Bluetooth screen Touch the Quick Info screen button
button to display the Bluetooth to access available information on
Audio main page to play music Audio playing. See Quick Info on
through a Bluetooth device. See page 7-18.
Bluetooth Audio on page 7-39. Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces
Touch the AUX screen button to
access any connected auxiliary and Vehicle Information and
device. See Auxiliary Devices on Radio Displays
page 7-38. For vehicles with high gloss
surfaces or vehicle displays, use a
microfibre cloth to wipe surfaces.
Before wiping the surface with the
Touch the iPod screen button to microfibre cloth, use a soft bristle
display the iPod main page and play brush to remove dirt that could
the current or last track selected. scratch the surface. Then use the
See Auxiliary Devices on page 7-38. microfibre cloth by gently rubbing to
Touch the Messages screen button clean. Never use window cleaners
to display the Text Message Inbox. or solvents. Periodically hand wash
See Text Messaging on page 7-77. the microfibre cloth separately,
using mild soap. Do not use bleach
or fabric softener. Rinse thoroughly
and air dry before next use.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Volume Control Rotate to:

{ Caution O /VOL (Power/Volume): Rotate . Highlight a menu option.
Do not attach a device with a to adjust the volume. . Select a value.
suction cup to the display. This 5 /> (Phone/Mute): Press and
may cause damage and may not / BACK:
hold to mute the infotainment
be covered by the warranty. Press to:
system. Press 5 / > again,
or rotate the O /VOL switch to
. Exit a menu.
Operation cancel mute. . Return from a submenu screen
to the previous menu screen.
Controls Menu System
Selecting a Menu Option
The infotainment system is operated Controls
by using the buttons, switches,
The TUNE/MENU switch
menus shown on the display and
steering wheel controls. and / BACK are used to navigate
the menu system.
Turning the System On or Off
TUNE/MENU:
O /VOL (Power/Volume): Press to
Press to:
turn the system on and off.
. Enter the menu system.
Automatic Switch-Off
. Select or activate the highlighted
If the infotainment system has been 1. Rotate the TUNE/MENU switch
menu option.
turned on after the ignition is turned to move the highlighted bar.
off, the system will turn off . Confirm a set value.
automatically after 10 minutes. 2. Press the TUNE/MENU switch to
. Turn a system setting on or off. select the highlighted option.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Submenus Setting a Value Turning a Function On or Off

An arrow on the right-hand edge of
the menu indicates that it has a
submenu with other options.
Activating a Setting
1. Rotate the TUNE/MENU switch 1. Rotate the TUNE/MENU switch

to change the current value of to highlight the function.
the setting. 2. Press the TUNE/MENU switch to
2. Press the TUNE/MENU switch to turn the function on or off.
confirm the setting.
1. Rotate the TUNE/MENU switch Audio Settings
to highlight the setting.
The audio settings can be set for
2. Press the TUNE/MENU switch to each radio band and each audio
activate the setting. player source.
Adjusting the Treble, Midrange,
and Bass
1. Press the TONE button, or touch
the Tone screen button.
2. Select Bass, Mid or Treble.
3. Select the value.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Press / BACK to go back to the System Settings The level of volume compensation
Tone Settings menu. can be selected, or the auto volume
Configuring the Number of feature can be turned off.
Adjusting the Fader and Balance Favourite Pages
1. Press the CONFIG button or
1. Press the TONE button, or touch To configure the number of available touch the Config screen button.
the Tone screen button. favourite pages:
2. Select Radio Settings.
2. Select Fade or Balance. 1. Press the CONFIG button,
or touch the Config screen 3. Select Auto Volume.
3. Select the value. button. 4. Select the setting.
Press / BACK to go back to the 2. Select Radio Settings. 5. Press / BACK to go back to the
Tone Settings menu.
3. Select Number of Favourite Radio Settings menu.
Adjusting the EQ (Equaliser) Pages.
Maximum Startup Volume
For vehicles that have an equaliser: 4. Select the number of available
favourite pages. The maximum volume played when
1. Press the TONE button, or touch the radio is first turned on can
the Tone screen button. 5. Press / BACK to go back to the be set.
2. Select EQ presets. Radio Settings menu. 1. Press the CONFIG button or
3. Select the setting. Auto Volume touch the Config screen button.
The auto volume feature 2. Select Radio Settings.
Press / BACK to go back to the
Tone Settings menu. automatically adjusts the radio 3. Select Startup Volume.
volume to compensate for road and
wind noise as the vehicle speeds up 4. Select the setting.
or slows down, so that the volume 5. Press / BACK to go back to the
level is consistent. Radio Settings menu.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Radio 10 minutes. Opening the driver door To adjust the settings:

will not turn the radio off when . Bass: Touch + or − to change
pressing the power button.
AM-FM Radio the level.
The radio can be turned off at any . Mid (Midrange): Touch + or − to
Playing the Radio time by pressing the power button. change the level.
O VOL (Power/Volume): . Treble: Touch + or − to change
. Press to turn the radio on or off. the level.
. Rotate to increase or decrease . EQ: Press or Rotate the TUNE/
the volume of the active source. MENU switch to cycle through
The steering wheel controls can the preset EQ options.
also be used to adjust the volume. . Fade: Touch the F or R button
See Steering Wheel Controls on Audio Source for more sound from the front or
page 7-7. Press
Press SRCE
SRCE oror SRC
SRC onon the
the steering
steering rear speakers. The middle
Radio Operation wheel
wheel controls
controls to
to display
display and
and scroll
scroll position balances the sound
through
through the
the available
available sources
sources AM, between the front and rear
The radio will work when the ignition AM,
FM, FM, CD, USB,
Pandora, AUX,
Stitcher, CD,andUSB, speakers.
is in the ON/RUN or Bluetooth
AUX, and Audio.
Bluetooth Audio. . Balance: Touch the L or R button
Accessory mode.
Infotainment System Settings for more sound from the left or
When the ignition is turned off, the right speakers. The middle
radio will continue to operate for Tone Settings position balances the sound
10 minutes or until the driver door is between the left and right
To access the tone settings, press
opened. speakers.
the TONE button, or touch the Tone
The radio can be turned on by screen button on the Home Page.
pressing the power button on Tone settings are specific to each
the radio and will stay on for source.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Finding a Station AM steering wheel controls, or say

“Tune FM” or “FM” through voice
Press
Press SRCE
SRCE oror SRC
SRC onon the
the steering
steering 1. Touch the AM screen button on
recognition.
wheel
wheel controls
controls to
to select
select AM,
AM,FM,
FM, the Home Page or select AM by
CD, USB, Stitcher,
Pandora, AUX, andCD, Bluetooth
USB, AUX, pressing SRCE or SRC on the 2. Touch the Menu screen button to
Audio.
and Bluetooth Audio. steering wheel controls, or say display the FM Station List.
“Tune AM” or “AM” through voice 3. Touch to select an option. To
Rotate the TUNE/MENU switch to
recognition. update the station list, touch
find a radio station. To select a
preset station, press FAV to scroll 2. Touch the Menu screen button to Update FM Station List.
through the favourite pages and display the AM Station List.
then touch a screen button.
Storing Radio Station Presets
3. Touch to select an option. To
update the station list, touch Up to 36 preset stations can be
Seeking a Station stored. AM and FM can be mixed.
Update AM Station List.
Press t SEEK or SEEK u to 1. From the AM or FM main page,
search for a station. touch and hold any of the preset
screen buttons at the bottom of
the screen. After a few seconds,
a beep is heard and the new
preset information displays on
that screen button.
2. Repeat for each preset.
Mixed-Band Presets
FM
Each favourite page can store six
1. Touch the FM screen button on preset stations. The presets within a
the Home Page or select FM by page can be different radio bands.
pressing SRCE or SRC on the
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
To scroll through the pages, press

. In the AM or FM main page, audio screen. RDS can provide a
FAV or touch the Fav screen button touch one of the preset screen program type (PTY) for current
on the top bar. The current page buttons to go to the selected programming and the name of the
number displays above the preset preset station. program being broadcasted.
buttons. The stored stations for
each favourite page display on the Radio Data System (RDS) Radio Reception
preset buttons. RDS features are available for use Frequency interference and static
To change the number of favourite only on FM stations that broadcast can occur during normal radio
pages displayed: RDS information. With RDS, the reception if items such as mobile
1. Touch Config on the radio can: phone chargers, vehicle
Home Page. . Seek to stations broadcasting convenience accessories, and
the selected type of external electronic devices are
2. Touch Radio Settings. plugged into the accessory power
programming.
3. Touch Number of Favourite .
outlet. If there is interference or
Pages. Display messages from radio static, unplug the item from the
stations. accessory power outlet.
4. Select the required number of
pages. This system relies on receiving
specific information from these FM
Recalling a Preset Station stations and only works when the FM signals only reach about 16 to
To recall a preset station from a information is available. It is 65 km. Although the radio has a
favourites page, do one of the possible that a radio station could built-in electronic circuit that
following: broadcast incorrect information that automatically works to reduce
causes the radio features to work interference, some static can occur,
. Touch the Fav screen button at improperly. especially around tall buildings or
the top bar to display the preset hills, causing the sound to fade in
pop-up. Touch one of the preset When information is broadcast from
the current FM station, the station and out.
screen buttons to go to the
selected preset station. name or call letters display on the
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
AM Quick Info Pandora Internet Radio

The range for most AM stations is Pandora® is an Internet radio
greater than for FM, especially at service that streams personalised
night. The longer range can cause radio stations based on artists,
station frequencies to interfere with songs, genres and comedians.
each other. Static can occur when Create stations using the
things like storms and power lines Pandora website or smartphone
interfere with radio reception. When application, then use - (thumbs up)
this happens, try reducing the treble
on the radio. or , (thumbs down) to personalise
stations. To set up an account, or for
Mobile Phone Usage Quick Info gives access to quick more information, go to
Mobile phone usage can cause information on Audio playing and www.pandora.com.
interference with the vehicle's radio. Navigation. A phone or tablet with Internet
To access, touch the Quick Info connection and the Pandora
screen button on the Home Page. application installed is required.
Personal mobile phone data plans
Audio Info: Displays information are used. Make sure the latest
on current item playing. version is installed on the device
Navigation Info: Displays and the volume is turned up.
information on the number of To install Pandora:
available satellites, altitude and
current location. . On an Android™ phone or
Android Tablet, go to the Android
Play Store, search for Pandora.
Install to the phone, not to the
SD card.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13

. On a BlackBerry® phone, go to 2. To launch, do one of the Using an Android™ Phone
the Blackberry® App World™ following:
and search for Pandora. 1. Pair the Android™ phone using
® ®
. Launch the application on Bluetooth®.
. On an iPhone , iPad , or iPod the device.
touch®, go to the iTunes® Store 2. Use one of the following to
and search for Pandora.
. Touch Pandora on the launch:
Home Page. . Launch the application on
Launching Pandora the device.
. Press b / g and say “Tune
Connect the iPhone®, iPad®, Pandora.” . Touch Pandora on the
or iPod touch® to the USB port, Home Page.
or connect an Android™ or If nothing happens when the
Blackberry® through Bluetooth®. available Pandora screen button is . Press b / g and say “Tune
See Auxiliary Devices on page 7-38 touched, download the latest Pandora.”
or Bluetooth on page 7-69. For Pandora application and retry.
first-time use, set up stations before If nothing happens when the
Pandora will always be highlighted available Pandora screen button is
connecting to the vehicle. The on the Home Page when an touched, download the latest
Pandora icon will be available on iPhone®, iPad®, or iPod touch® is Pandora application and retry.
the Home Page and the source connected using the USB port. To
pop-up displays if the latest use, log into your account. If the “Please See Device” message
application is installed on the is shown, the login screen may
device. If the “Please See Device” message display on the device.
is shown, the login screen may
Using the iPhone®, iPod Touch®, display on the device. If the “Please unlock your phone or
or iPad® If Pandora is shut down on the
restart the app” message is shown
then your phone may be locked.
1. Plug the device into the USB phone or another audio app is used, Unlock the phone, close the app,
port. The phone screen must be Pandora may not start on the next and then restart the app to ensure
unlocked. ignition cycle. proper communication.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Using a Blackberry® Phone Unlock the phone, close the app, Pandora Features
The phone must be unlocked. To then restart the app to ensure Pandora has features to rate songs,
launch Pandora service: proper communication. skip tracks, or change stations.
1. Pair the Blackberry® phone Pandora Menus
using Bluetooth®.
2. Use one of the following to
launch:
. Launch the application on
the device.
. Touch Pandora on the
Home Page.
. Press b / g and say “Tune
Pandora.” Select Menu on the Pandora } (Bookmarks): Touch while
main page. playing a song to bookmark either
If nothing happens when the the artist or the song. Bookmarks
available Pandora screen button is Pandora has a menu system with are viewable on www.pandora.com.
touched, download the latest the following:
Pandora application and retry.
, (Thumbs Down): When
Shuffle: Select to play the stations touched, Pandora stores the
If the “Please See Device” message in random order. information, changes to the next
is shown, the login screen may User-Created Stations: Select to song, and does not play the song
display on the device. play a user-created station. on this station again. This helps
If the “Please unlock your phone or Pandora choose which song should
restart the app” message is shown, not play on this station. This feature
then your phone may be locked. is only available on user created
stations.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
- (Thumbs Up): When touched, Pandora Skip Limit Unable to Start Pandora
Pandora stores this information Pandora limits the number of skips If the device is unable to launch
and - is highlighted for the allowed on their service. When the Pandora:
remainder of the song. This helps skip limit is reached, , will not skip . Check that the latest version of
Pandora choose which songs the currently playing track, but , Pandora is installed.
should play on this station.
feedback will be recorded. . Check that there is an active
d (Next Track): When touched, account logged into Pandora.
Pandora changes to the next song. Pandora Advertisement
Pandora may display
. Have at least one station
s (Play/Pause): Press to pause created.
playback. Press again to resume. advertisements. Artist name and
track title will not be displayed and . For Android™ and Blackberry®
Note: The Play/Pause button is not the skip track button is not devices, check that the device is
available on navigation systems. available. paired with the vehicle, and the
Tuning Pandora Stations: When Bluetooth® icon on the display is
Pandora Troubleshooting highlighted.
Pandora is playing, use the b / g
button on the steering wheel to tune Unable to Connect Device to . For iPhone®, iPod touch®,
to any Pandora station on the Vehicle or iPad® devices, check that the
device. If the device is unable to connect to USB cable is connected to the
the USB or Bluetooth®: USB port and the screen is
1. Press the b / g button on the unlocked.
steering wheel. 1. Turn the ignition off.
. Close Pandora on the device
2. Say “Tune Pandora <Classic 2. Remove the key.
and launch again. Devices that
Rock> Radio.” 3. Open and close the driver door, allow multitasking may require
Pandora voice control will not work wait about 30 seconds and try to an extra step to quit the Pandora
until Pandora is launched the first connect the device again. application. See the mobile
time during that ignition cycle. phone manufacturer's user
guide.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Thumbs Up or Thumbs Down

. The volume is too low. Turn up Paused or Audio Paused:
Error the volume on the device. Playback is paused on the radio or
If there is an error trying to rate a
. The battery saver and task on the device. Press s or play on
track with the , or - buttons, the manager applications on the the device.
phone can cause Pandora to
message “Thumbs Down Error” or No Stations Found: Logged in but
function incorrectly. Remove
“Thumbs Up Error” will display. no stations have been created.
those apps from the phone or
Touch OK to retry. Touch OK to continue.
remove Pandora and Bluetooth®
Loss of Audio from the task lists. Please Unlock Your Phone or
Restart Phone App and Try
Loss of Pandora audio can happen If the connection is lost between the
Again: Communication failure
in different ways: application and device, a message
between the radio and the phone
“Please unlock your phone or restart
. Weak or lost data connection. application or the device is locked.
the phone app and try again” will
. Device needs to be charged. display. Touch OK to retry. Devices that allow multitasking may
. Application needs to be require an extra step to quit the
If touching OK does not clear the
relaunched. Pandora application. Close Pandora
issue on the phone, see "Please
on the device and launch again.
. Connection between phone and Unlock Your Phone or Restart
radio lost. Phone App and Try Again” under Unlock the phone and check that
"Common Pandora Messages" Home Page is shown on the phone/
. If any iPhone®, iPod touch®, following. device.
or iPad® is connected to
Bluetooth® and the dock Common Pandora Messages See the mobile phone
connector, go to the Airplay icon manufacturer's user guide.
Please See Device: When not
on the device and select dock logged in or when authentication See www.pandora.com/help for
connector or disconnect and failed, see the device. Touch OK to more information.
reconnect the dock connector on continue.
the device.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Stitcher Internet Radio To install Stitcher: Using the iPhone®, iPod touch®,
. On an Android™ phone or or iPad®
Stitcher SmartRadio™ is an Internet
radio service that streams news, Tablet with Internet connection, 1. Plug the device into the USB
sports, and entertainment shows go to the Android™ Play Store, port. The phone screen must be
through the audio system. Create search for Stitcher, and install to unlocked.
personalised, on-demand stations the phone, not to the SD card. 2. Use one of the following to
or discover new shows through . On an iPhone®, iPad®, or iPod launch:
Stitcher's preset stations. To set touch®, go to the iTunes store . Select the application on
up an account, download the and search for Stitcher. the device.
application from the Android™
Market or iTunes Store, or go to Launching Stitcher . Select Stitcher on the
www.stitcher.com. ®
Connect the iPhone , iPad , ® Home Page.
A phone or tablet with Internet or iPod touch® to the USB port, . Press b / g and say “Tune
connection is required for this or connect Android™ through
Stitcher.”
application. Personal mobile phone Bluetooth®. See Auxiliary Devices
data plans are used. Make sure the on page 7-38 or Bluetooth on 3. If Stitcher does not begin
latest version is installed on the page 7-69. For first-time use, set up playing, select a category and
device and the volume on the the stations before connecting to the then a station.
device is turned up. vehicle. The Stitcher icon will be If nothing happens when the
® available on the Home Page and available Stitcher screen button is
BlackBerry phones are not source pop-up displays if the latest
supported for this application. touched, download the latest
application is installed on the Stitcher application and retry.
device.
Stitcher will always be highlighted
on the Home Page when an
iPhone®, iPad®, or iPod touch® is
connected using the USB port. To
use, log into your account.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
If the “Please See Device” message

. Select Stitcher on the Stitcher Menus
is shown, the login screen may Home Page.
display on the device. . Press b / g and say “Tune
If the “Please unlock your phone or Stitcher.”
restart the app” message is shown,
3. If Stitcher does not begin
then the phone may be locked.
playing, select a category and
Unlock the phone, close the app,
then a station.
then restart the app and make sure
the home page is visible on the If nothing happens when the
phone/device. available Stitcher screen button is
touched, download the latest
It may be necessary to allow the Select Menu on the Stitcher
Stitcher application and retry.
infotainment system to main page.
communicate with the device. If the “Please See Device” message
Acknowledge any requests. is shown, the login screen may Stitcher has a menu system that
display on the device. may include the following:
Using an Android™ Phone
If the “Please unlock your phone or Upcoming Shows: Displays a list
1. Pair the Android™ phone using restart the app” message is shown, of upcoming shows on the current
Bluetooth®. then your phone may be locked. station.
2. Use one of the following to Unlock the phone, close the app, My On Demand Stations: Displays
launch: then restart the app to ensure a list of favourite stations and
proper communication. shows.
. Select the application on
the device. Select and store programs as
favourites on the device. Favourite
station lists can be created to
include favourite shows which can
be accessed through My On
Demand Stations.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Stitcher Station Categories: , (Thumbs Down): When Switching Between Pandora and
Displays categories by topic. touched, Stitcher changes to the Stitcher
When a category then sub-category next show. This helps Stitcher To switch between Pandora and
is selected, the radio will start provide a personalised listening Stitcher, select the application icon
playing the first program in that experience. on the iPhone®, iPod touch®,
sub-category. - (Thumbs Up): When touched, or iPad®. This is not required for
Rotate the TUNE/MENU knob to Stitcher stores this information Android™ devices. See Pandora
Internet Radio on page 7-18.
display the first 24 stations of that and - is highlighted for the
sub-category. remainder of the show. This helps Stitcher Troubleshooting
Stitcher provide a personalised
Stitcher Features Unable to Connect Device to
listening experience.
Stitcher service has features to rate Vehicle
or skip shows, or change stations.
d (Next Show): When touched,
Stitcher changes to the next show. If the device is unable to connect to
the USB or Bluetooth®:
s (Play/Pause): Press to pause
playback. Press again to resume. 1. Turn the ignition off.
Note: The Play/Pause button is not 2. Remove the key.
available on navigation systems. 3. Open and close the driver door,
wait about 30 seconds, and try
Stitcher Advertisement
to connect the device again.
Stitcher may display
advertisements. Artist name and title The battery saver and task manager
applications on the phone can
may not display and the skip track
button is not available. cause Stitcher to function
q (Favourites): When touched, incorrectly. Remove those apps
the current show is added to the from the phone or remove Stitcher
favourites station. and Bluetooth® from the task lists.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Unable to Start Stitcher Loss of Audio If touching OK does not clear the
If the device is unable to launch Loss of Stitcher audio can happen issue, see “Please unlock your
Stitcher: due to: phone or restart phone app and try
again” under “Common Stitcher
. Check that the latest version of . Weak or lost data connection. Messages” following.
Stitcher is installed. . Device needs to be charged. Common Stitcher Messages
. Check that there is an active . Application needs to be
account logged into Stitcher. Please Try Again Later: A general
relaunched. error has occurred. A data
. For Android™ devices, check . Connection between phone and connection may be unavailable due
that the device is paired with the radio is lost. to a weak or lost signal or the
vehicle, and the Bluetooth® icon Stitcher service being temporarily
on the display is highlighted. . If any iPhone®, iPod touch®, down. Touch OK to continue.
or iPad® is connected to
. For iPhone®, iPod touch®, Bluetooth® and the dock Paused or Audio Paused:
or iPad® devices, check that the connector, go to the Airplay icon Playback is paused on the radio or
USB cable is connected to the on the device and select dock on device. Press k or play on the
USB port and the screen is connector or disconnect and
unlocked and the Home Page is device.
reconnect the dock connector on
showing. the device. Please See Device: When user is
. Close Stitcher on the device and not logged in or when authentication
. The volume is too low. Turn up
launch again. Devices that allow failed, see the device. Touch OK to
the volume on the device. continue. Disconnect the phone
multitasking may require an
extra step to quit the Stitcher If the connection is lost between the from the radio and follow the
application. See the mobile application and device, a message Stitcher account login process on
phone manufacturer's user “Please unlock your phone or restart the phone.
guide. the phone app and try again” will No Stations Found: Logged in but
display. Touch OK to retry. no stations have been created.
Touch OK to continue.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Please Choose a New Station: Audio Players To avoid damage to the CD player:
The end of the station has been . Do not use scratched or
reached and there is no more
content to play. Select a new station CD Player damaged discs.
through the Stitcher menu. The CD player is capable of playing:
. Do not apply labels to discs. The
labels could get caught in the
Please Unlock Your Phone or . Most audio CDs player.
Restart Phone App and Try
Again: Communication failure
. CD-R . Insert only one disc at a time.
between the radio and the phone . CD-RW . Keep the loading slot free of
application or the device is locked. . MP3, unprotected WMA, and foreign materials, liquids, and
See www.stitcher.com/help for more AAC formats debris.
information. If the service will not When playing any compatible . Use a marking pen to label the
work, send an e-mail to recordable disc, the sound quality top of the disc.
feedback@stitcher.com. may be reduced due to the disc, the
Loading and Ejecting Discs
method of recording, the quality of
the music recorded, or how the disc To load a disc:
has been handled. 1. Turn the infotainment system on.
There may be increased skipping, 2. Insert a disc into the slot, right
difficulty reading recorded tracks, side up. The player pulls it in the
finding tracks, and/or loading and rest of the way. If the disc is
ejecting. If these problems occur, damaged or improperly loaded,
check the disc for damage or try a there is an error and the disc
known good disc. ejects.
The disc automatically plays once
loaded.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Press X to eject a disc from the On the CD main page, the track u SEEK:
CD player. If the disc is not removed number displays and the Song,
Artist, and Album information
. Press to seek to the next track.
within a short period of time, it is
automatically pulled back into the displays when available. . Press and hold to fast forward
player. Use the following radio controls to through a track. Release the
play the disc: button to return to playing
Playing an Audio CD speed. Elapsed time displays.
s (Play/Pause): Use to pause or
resume play. TUNE/MENU Switch: Rotate to the
right or left to select the next or
Note: Not available on vehicles with previous track. Press the centre of
Navigation. this switch to select from the list. If a
t SEEK: track is selected from the menu, the
system plays the track and returns
. Press to seek to the beginning of to the CD screen.
the current or previous track.
If the track has been playing for Error Messages
less than five seconds, it seeks
1. Touch the CD screen button on If Disc Error displays and/or the disc
to the previous track. If longer
the Home Page or select CD comes out, it could be due to:
than five seconds, the current
from the source pop-up to track starts from the beginning. . The disc has an invalid or
display the CD main page. unknown format.
. Press and hold to fast reverse
2. Touch the Menu screen button to through a track. Release the . The disc is very hot. Try the disc
display the menu options. button to return to playing again when the temperature
3. Touch to select the option. speed. Elapsed time displays. returns to normal.
. The road is very rough. Try the
disc again when the road is
smoother.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13

. The disc is dirty, scratched, wet, To avoid damage to the CD/DVD Press X to eject a disc from the
or upside down. player: CD/DVD player. If the disc is not
. The air is very humid. Try the . Do not use scratched or removed within a short period of
disc again later. damaged discs. time, it is automatically pulled back
. There was a problem while .
into the player.
Do not apply labels to discs. The
burning the disc. labels could get caught in the Playing a DVD
. The label is caught in the CD player.
player. . Insert only one disc at a time.
If the CD is not playing correctly, try . Keep the loading slot free of
a known good CD. foreign materials, liquids, and
If any error continues, contact your debris.
dealer. . Use a marking pen to label the
top of the disc.
CD/DVD Player
Loading and Ejecting Discs
CD/DVD Player To load a disc: 1. Touch the DVD screen button on
Vehicles with navigation are able to the Home Page or select DVD
1. Turn the infotainment system on. from the source pop-up to
play DVDs.
2. Insert a disc into the slot, right display the DVD main page.
These vehicles are fitted with a
side up. The player pulls it in the Use the following controls on the
combined CD/DVD player. rest of the way. If the disc is touch screen to play the disc:
Note: DVD playback is available damaged or improperly loaded,
only when the vehicle is stationary. there is an error and the disc Top Menu: Use to return to the
ejects. start of the disc or first menu.
The disc automatically plays once Menu: Use to return to the
loaded. previous menu.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13

. There was a problem while
S: Use to move backwards from Press or touch Back to cancel the
burning the disc.
the current position. cursor control display.
. The label is caught in the CD/
s (Play/Pause): Use to pause or Keypad: Select to display the
Chapter selection pop-up. Enter the DVD player.
resume play.
required chapter number. If the DVD is not playing correctly,
T: Use to move forwards from the
try a known good DVD.
current position. If the controls are not currently
displayed on the screen; touch the If any error continues, contact your
Settings: Touch Settings to display screen. dealer.
the DVD Settings menu.
Error Messages
MP3
If Disc Error displays and/or the disc
comes out, it could be due to: Playing an MP3 CD
. The disc has an invalid or To play an MP3 CD, follow the same
unknown format. instructions as “Playing a CD or
. The disc is very hot. Try the disc MP3 CD.”
again when the temperature The following guidelines must be
returns to normal. met when creating an MP3 disc,
otherwise the CD might not play:
. The road is very rough. Try the
Display Info: Select to display the disc again when the road is . Sampling rate: 16 kHz, 22.05
available information for the smoother. kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
current DVD. . The disc is dirty, scratched, wet, and 48 kHz.
Cursor: Select to display the or upside down. . Bit rates supported: 8, 16, 24,
cursor screen controls for selecting . The air is very humid. Try the 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112,
from DVD menus. disc again later. 128, 144, 160, 192, 224, 256,
and 320 kbps.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13

. Maximum number of folders: that playlist. There might be a delay Genres: Touch to view the genres.
eight folders with 255 files per before the list displays. Select a Select a genre to view a list of all
folder. song from the list to begin playback. songs of that genre. Select a song
. Maximum of 1,000 files on Folders: Touch to open a folder list from the list to begin playback.
a disc. to access the files within the folder Root Directory
. Recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW. structure.
The root directory is treated as a
. The Artist/Album/Song Titles/ Track List: Touch to list all the folder. All files contained directly
Genre information requires a CD tracks on the disc. under the root directory are
to be fully scanned before the Artists: Touch to view the list of accessed prior to any root directory
music navigator works with artists stored on the disc. Select an folders.
these menus. artist name to view a list of all songs Empty Folders
MP3 Music Menu by the artist. There might be a delay
before the list displays. Select a If a root directory or folder is empty
Touch the Menu screen button while song from the list to begin playback. or contains only folders, the player
that source is active to access advances to the next folder in the
the menu. Albums: Touch to view the albums file structure that contains a
on the disc. Select the album to compressed audio file. The empty
Touch any of the following buttons view a list of all songs on the album. folder(s) are not displayed or
on the MP3 Menu: There might be a delay before the numbered.
Shuffle: Touch to play the tracks list displays. Select a song from the
randomly. Touch again to stop list to begin playback. No Folder
shuffle. Song Titles: Touch to display a list When the CD only contains
Playlists: Touch to view the of all songs on the disc. Songs are compressed audio files without any
playlists stored on the disc. Select a displayed as stored on the disc. folders or playlists, all files are
playlist to view the list of all songs in There might be a delay before the under the root folder.
list displays. To begin playback,
select a song from the list.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
File System and Naming Gracenote®

The song titles, artists, albums, and Gracenote technology embedded
genres are taken from the file's ID3 into the radio helps manage and
tag and are only displayed if present navigate the USB device music
in the tag. If a song title is not collection. When a USB device is
present in the ID3 tag, the radio connected to the radio, Gracenote
displays the file name as the identifies the music collection and
track name. delivers the correct album, artist
name, genres, and cover art on the
Preprogrammed Playlists
screen. If information is missing,
The radio recognises Gracenote will fill it in if information
preprogrammed playlists; however, is available, or provide information
there is no editing capability. These The USB port is in the centre on artist, band or genre.
playlists are treated as special console.
folders containing compressed Searching Music Library Using
audio song files. The USB icon displays when the Voice Recognition
USB device is connected.
Voice Recognition: Gracenote
USB USB Media Formats improves music search and
navigation by identifying bands,
Playing from a USB The USB port will support the artists, and albums names that may
following media formats: be hard to pronounce, irregular
A USB mass storage or Certified
Windows Vista®/Media Transfer . MP3 spellings, and nicknames. For
Protocol (MTP) device can be example, Gracenote helps the
. Unprotected WMA
connected to the USB port. system understand artist names like
. Unprotected AAC “INXS” or “Mötley Crüe.” It also
allows the use of names like: “The
Boss,” “G.N.R,” “The Fab Four,” and
thousands of other famous artist
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
nicknames as voice commands to 2. Touch Radio Settings, then from the device, the system will
access music. See Voice touch Gracenote Options. simply skip over those songs and
Recognition on page 7-62. 3. Touch Normalisation to turn on play the next available song.
Normalisation: If equipped, or off. Use the touch screen or voice
normalisation helps to improve the Cover Art: The Gracenote recognition to create a More Like
voice recognition accuracy for titles embedded database contains cover This Playlist. See “Voice
that sound similar. It also helps art or album art information for the Recognition Commands” in Voice
group long lists of genres into 10 music on the USB device. If the Recognition on page 7-62.
common genres. For example, there music is recognised by Gracenote
may be multiple rock genres in the Gracenote Indexing
and does have cover art, Gracenote
media library; normalisation will will use the cover art found in the While Gracenote is indexing,
group all those into one rock Genre. embedded database and display it infotainment features are available
Normalisation default is off. on the radio. User predefined cover including selecting music from the
art will always be used first. If no menu. Voice recognition music will
cover art is found Gracenote will not be available until the radio has
use generic Genre graphics or completed indexing the device.
images of artists. Devices with more music may take
longer to index. The device will
More Like This index when plugged into the radio
The Gracenote database contains for the first time. When Indexing is
attributes for Music, such as genre, removed from the screen, the radio
era of music, region, artist type, is ready to support music search.
mood, etc. Use this to create a On the next connection or ignition
To turn Normalisation on: playlist of up to 30 songs "more like" cycle, Indexing will show briefly
currently listened to song. This on the screen. The radio is
1. Press CONFIG or touch Config searching for changes to the
on the Home Page. playlist will be stored in the
Playlist Menu when the device is device and preparing the music list.
reconnected. If songs are removed
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
If there are no changes, the voice ‐ Playlist entries must be in the

. PLS (Standard)
recognition music search will be form of relative paths. . WAX
available. The radio will index ‐ The system attribute for .
and store two devices with up to ASX
folders/files that contain audio
10,000 songs on each device. data must not be set.
. RMP
USB MP3 Player and USB Drives To play a USB device, do one of the The radio supports plugging a
following: mobile phone in as a USB drive as
. The USB MP3 players and USB
long as the mobile phone supports
drives connected must comply . Connect the USB and it begins USB mass storage class or has
with the USB Mass Storage to play. USB disc drive support enabled.
Class specification (USB MSC).
. Touch the USB screen button on While the USB source is active, use
. Hard disk drives are not the Home Page. the following to operate USB
supported.
. Press SRCE, or SRC on the function:
. The radio will not be able to play steering wheel controls, to scroll TUNE/MENU Switch: Rotate to
back write-protected music. until the USB source screen is scroll through the track list. Rotate
. File systems supported: FAT32, available. quickly to fast scroll alphabetically
NTFS, Linux, and HFS+. through large lists.
. Press b / g on the steering
. The following restrictions apply wheel controls to play CD, Artist, s (Play/Pause): Press to start,
for the data stored on a USB Album, Song Title, or Song pause, or resume play of the current
MP3 player or USB device: Genre. See Voice Recognition media source.
‐ Maximum folder structure on page 7-62. Note: Not available on vehicles with
depth: 8 levels. The following playlist formats are Navigation.
‐ Maximum number of MP3/ supported: t SEEK:
WMA files that can be . M3U (Standard and Extended) . Press to seek to the beginning of
displayed: 10,000. . iTunes the current or previous track.
If the track has been playing for
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
less than five seconds, the 2. The radio will show "Playlist 2. Select an artist name to view a
previous track plays. If playing Creation Succeeded" and list of all songs by the artist.
longer than five seconds, the continue playing the 3. Select a song from the list to
current track restarts. current song. begin playback.
. Press and hold to reverse Playlist Creation Failed may Albums:
quickly through playback. appear if a song is not found in
Release to return to playing the Gracenote Database. 1. Touch to view the albums on
speed. Elapsed time displays. the USB.
Delete Automatic Playlist: Touch
u SEEK: to delete a More Like This playlist. 2. Select the album to view a list of
Select the playlist to be deleted. all songs on the album.
. Press to seek to the next track.
Folders: Touch to open a folder list 3. Select a song from the list to
. Press and hold to advance begin playback.
quickly through playback. to access the files within the folder
Release to return to playing structure. Genres:
speed. Elapsed time displays. Playlists: 1. Touch to view the genres on
USB Menu 1. Touch to view the playlists on the USB.
the USB. 2. Select a genre to view a list of
The following are available through
the USB Menu: 2. Select a playlist to view the list all songs of that genre.
of all songs in that playlist. 3. Select a song from the list to
Shuffle: Touch to play the tracks
randomly. Touch again to stop 3. Select a song from the list to begin playback.
shuffle. begin playback. Songs:
Play More Like This: Artists: 1. Touch to display a list of all
1. Touch to automatically create a 1. Touch to view the list of artists songs on the USB.
playlist of songs that are like the on the USB.
song currently playing.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
2. Songs are displayed in

. When connecting an iPod® on iPod® Menu
alphabetical order. To begin which firmware from other
playback, select a song from providers is installed.
the list. To connect an iPod®:
File System and Naming 1. Connect one end of the standard
The songs, artists, albums, and iPod® USB cable to the iPod®.
genres are taken from the file's song 2. Connect the other end to the
information and are only displayed if USB port in the centre console.
present. The infotainment system
iPod® music information displays on
displays the file name as the track
the radio's display and begins
name if the song information is not Use the iPod® Menu to select:
playing through the vehicle's audio
available.
system. Shuffle: Touch to play the tracks
Playing from an iPod® The iPod® battery recharges randomly. Touch again to stop
This feature supports the connection automatically while the vehicle is on. shuffle.
of an iPod®. The iPod® shuts off and stops Play More Like This: Allows the
charging when the vehicle is radio to create playlists with song/
There may be problems with the shut off.
operation and function in the tracks that are similar to what is
following situations: If the iPod® is an unsupported being listen to. The radio will create
model, it can still be listened to in a playlist with up to 30 similar
. When connecting an iPod® on the vehicle by connecting to the songs. The playlist will appear in the
which a more recent version of auxiliary input jack using a standard Playlist category of the menu for
the firmware is installed than is 3.5 mm stereo cable. future listening.
supported by the infotainment
system. 1. Touch to automatically create a
playlist of songs that are More
Like the song currently playing.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
2. The radio will show “Playlist Albums: Songs:

Creation Succeeded” and 1. Touch to view the albums on 1. Touch to view a list of all songs
continue playing the the iPod®. on the iPod®.
current song.
2. Select an album name to view a 2. Select the song from the list to
Delete Automatic Playlists: Touch list of all songs on the album or begin playback.
to delete a More Like this playlist. select All Songs to view all Podcasts:
Playlists: songs on the iPod®.
1. Touch to view the podcasts on
1. Touch to view the playlists on 3. Select the song from the list to the iPod®.
the iPod®. begin playback.
2. Select a podcast name to begin
2. Select a playlist name to view a Genres: playback.
list of all songs in the playlist. 1. Touch to view the genres on Composers:
3. Select the song from the list to the iPod®.
begin playback. 1. Touch to view the composers on
2. Select a genre name to view a the iPod®.
Artists: list of artists of that genre.
2. Select the composer to view a
1. Touch to view the artists on 3. Select an artist to view albums list of songs by that composer.
the iPod®. or All Albums to view all albums
of that genre. 3. Select a song from the list to
2. Select an artist name to view a begin playback.
list of all albums with songs by 4. Select Artist to view albums.
the artist. Audio books:
5. Select Album to view songs.
3. Select an album. 1. Touch to view the audio books
6. Select the song from the list to on the iPod®.
4. Select the song from the list to begin playback.
begin playback. 2. Select the audio book from the
list to begin playback.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Playing from an iPhone® Some functionality may differ based Auxiliary Devices
or iPad® on operating system version on
device. This vehicle has an auxiliary input
This feature supports iPhone® jack in the centre console. Possible
and iPad®. USB Troubleshooting auxiliary audio sources include:
Follow the same instructions as If the device is not being recognised . Laptop computer
stated earlier for using an iPod®. To or the music is missing screen . MP3 player
use voice recognition to play music, information, restore the radio
say “Play USB,” “Play Artist,” “Play defaults: This jack is not an audio output. Do
Album,” “Play Song,” or “Play not plug headphones into the
1. Press CONFIG or touch Config
Genre.” See Voice Recognition on auxiliary input jack. Set up any
on the Home Page.
page 7-62. auxiliary device while the vehicle is
2. Touch Vehicle Settings. stationary and/or in P (Park).
iPhone®, iPod touch® and iPad®
Troubleshooting 3. Touch Return to Factory
® ® Settings.
When an iPhone , iPod touch ,
or iPad® are connected through 4. Touch Yes.
USB and Bluetooth®, the audio may Pair the phone again and the device
not be heard when the iPod® source will have to index again.
on the radio is selected. If a phone
call is received while listening to the Bluetooth® Audio and Voice
iPod® source and there is no audio Recognition
for the iPod® after the source, then See Bluetooth Audio on page 7-39
go to the Airplay icon on the device and Voice Recognition on page 7-62
and select dock connector or for information using voice
disconnect and reconnect connector recognition with Bluetooth® audio.
on the device.
Make sure all devices have the
latest software downloaded.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Connect a 3.5 mm cable from the To play music through a Bluetooth® When a phone is connected to the
auxiliary device to the auxiliary input device: system through Bluetooth® Audio
jack. When a device is connected, 1. Power on the device, pair, and the phone notifications and sounds
the system automatically begins connect the device. may not be heard on the phone
playing audio from the device over until Bluetooth® is disconnected.
the vehicle speakers. 2. Music can be launched by doing Notification features may vary based
one of the following: on the phone. Check the phone
If an auxiliary device has already
been connected, but a different . Touch the Bluetooth Audio manufacturer's information for
source is currently active, do one of screen button on the notification support.
the following: Home Page. Bluetooth® Audio Menu
. Press SRCE to scroll all of the . Press SRCE until Bluetooth Touch the Menu screen button and
available audio source screens, Audio is selected. the following may display:
until the AUX source screen is . Press the SRC button on
selected. Shuffle: Press TUNE/MENU to turn
the steering wheel controls shuffle on or off. Not all devices
. Say “Play Front AUX” using until Bluetooth Audio is support the shuffle feature.
voice recognition to play the selected. See Steering
auxiliary device. See Voice Wheel Controls on When selecting Bluetooth® audio,
Recognition on page 7-62. page 7-7. the Bluetooth® device internal music
player may not open depending on
. Use voice recognition. See the status of the device. All devices
Bluetooth Audio Voice Recognition on launch and play back audio
If equipped, music may be played page 7-62. differently. Make sure the correct
from a paired Bluetooth® device. The music can be controlled by audio source is playing on the
See “Pairing a Phone/Device” under either the infotainment controls or device for Bluetooth® audio
Bluetooth on page 7-69. the controls on the device. playback on the infotainment
system. When the vehicle is not
moving, use the device to begin
playback.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
When selecting Bluetooth® audio as When playing music on the Navigation

a source, the infotainment system infotainment system from a
may display the Bluetooth Audio Bluetooth® device, make sure the
Paused screen with no audio Bluetooth® device is unlocked and Using the Navigation
playing. Press play on the device or the intended music application is System
press s to begin playback. This showing on the home screen.
The vehicle may have a Navigation
may happen depending on how the For iPhone®/iPod touch® and iPad® system.
device communicates over devices, Bluetooth® Audio will not
Bluetooth®. work if the device is connected
through the USB and Bluetooth® at
{ Danger
Note: The s button is not
the same time. Giving extended attention to
available on vehicles with
navigation. navigation tasks while driving will
greatly increase the risk of a
Some phones support sending collision that may cause personal
Bluetooth® music information to injury or death.
display on the infotainment system.
When the infotainment system Road safety has absolute priority!
receives this information, it will Only operate this system if the
check to see if any album art is road and traffic conditions allow
available and display it if available. you to do so.
The driver's full attention is
always required while driving.
Use voice guidance directions
whenever possible.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
The touch screen buttons Heading Indicator

available are:
Use the NAV button or Navigation

on the Home Page to access the
navigation map. Touch Heading Indicator to display
Destination Entry the Map View. There are three
Press the NAV button again to indicator settings:
change between alternative views of See Destination on page 7-47.
the normal split and full map views.
. 2D North Up: Displays North at
Route Menu the top of the map screen
See “Menu with Route Guidance regardless of the direction the
Active” under Destination on vehicle is travelling.
page 7-47. . 2D Heading Up: Displays the
direction the vehicle is travelling.
The shaded triangle icon points
North.
. 3D Heading Up: Is the same as
2D Heading Up, but the map is
in 3D.
The Menu screen button at the
bottom left side of the display
accesses the Navigation Menu.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Map Modes Traffic This feature can also be

accessed by pressing the traffic
light screen button displayed at
the left lower side of the map
screen. See Configure Menu on
page 7-55 in this section.
Nearby POIs
Touch to change the view of the Touch Traffic to display the Traffic
maps while using the navigation Menu. Select the desired option.
function. The system offers a variety Options available are:
of full and split views. Some views
are only selectable when route . All Traffic Events: Select to view
guidance is active. all reported traffic events while
on or off a planned route.
Select to display a search list of
. Traffic Events on Route: Select nearby POIs. Select the
to view traffic events while on a desired POI.
planned route.
POIs Along Route
. Traffic Settings: Select to
customise traffic options. Select to display a search list of
POIs that lie along or near the route
An alternative method to change the
to the destination. Select the
view of the maps would be to touch
desired POI.
the map mode icon.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Exit List Current Position Info Map Scales

The Exit list displays upcoming road Touch to display a split screen
exits, if information is available. showing detailed information about
Note: Not all roads are supported the vehicle position. This feature
with this information. can also be accessed by touching
the vehicle information tab on the
Show POIs lower centre of the display. The
location can be saved to the
Address Book by touching Save in
the split screen.
Destination Position Info There are two methods to change
Touch to display a split screen the map scale:
showing detailed information about . Rotate the TUNE/MENU switch
the destination. The location can be clockwise or anticlockwise to
saved to the Address Book by zoom out or in.
touching Save in the split screen.
Select to customise which major . Touch the Map Scale + or −
POI categories are displayed on Map Adjustments button on the bottom corners of
the map. The system lets you adjust the scale the map screen to change the
of view on the map. Also, as you zoom level.
Switch Route Time/Destination
drive, the map scrolls automatically The map scale bar times out if
Touch to customise the Arrival/ based on the direction of travel. the zoom level is not changed
Travel time and Waypoint/ within a few seconds.
Destination information displayed in
the main map screen.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Scroll Features The maps are stored in an internal

flash memory that is used in the
Navigation system.
Detailed Areas
Road network attributes are
Touch the cycling arrows located at contained in the map database for
the top of the map screen to toggle detailed areas. Attributes include
. To scroll within the map, touch from the normal top bar (Home and information such as street names,
anywhere on the map screen Fav) to the audio information bar. street addresses and turn
and the scroll symbol displays. restrictions. A detailed area includes
all major highways, service roads
. Touch the map to centre at that and residential roads. The detailed
location on the screen. areas include points of interest
. Touch and hold the screen in (POIs) such as restaurants, airports,
any direction outside the scroll banks, hospitals, police stations,
symbol to scroll the map in that petrol stations, tourist attractions
direction. and historical monuments. The map
database may not include data for
. Scroll speed increases when newly constructed areas or map
touching closer to the edge of database corrections after the
the screen. Maps production of the infotainment
. Press the NAV button to exit This section includes basic system. The Navigation system
map scrolling and return to the information about the map provides full route guidance in the
current vehicle location on database. detailed map areas.
the map.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Navigation Symbols
Following are the most common
symbols that appear on a map
screen.
The waypoint symbol marks one or

more set waypoints.
A waypoint is a stopover destination
point added to the planned route.
The estimated time and distance to
The vehicle symbol indicates the the destination are displayed. If waypoints have been added to the
current position and heading
current route, each waypoint
direction of the vehicle on the map.
destination displays estimated time
and distance.
The destination symbol marks the

final destination after a route has
been planned.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Heading up view displays the

direction the vehicle is travelling at
the top of the map screen. The
shaded triangle indicates North.
Touch this screen symbol to change
to 3D mode.
This symbol indicates that the map This symbol at the bottom of a map
The 3D symbol is the same as the
view is North up: North up displays screen changes the current map
Heading up symbol, but the map is
North at the top of the map screen mode screen.
in 3D.
regardless of the direction the
vehicle is travelling.
Touch this screen symbol to change
the view to Heading up or 3D.
This symbol on the right of the map

The No GPS symbol appears when
screen displays the speed limit
there is no Global Positioning
while on a route. The speed limit
System (GPS) satellite signal.
may not always be accurate due to
This symbol indicates that the map changes since the map data was
view is Heading up. created. Always follow the posted
speed limit on the road.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Driving on a Route Destination Alpha-Numeric Keyboard

Urgent Manoeuvre Alert Letters of the alphabet, symbols,
punctuation and numbers, when
The system will give an indication available, display on the Navigation
that the next manoeuvre is close. screen as alpha/numeric keyboards.
The alpha keyboard displays when
data needs to be entered.
QWERTY or ABC: Touch to toggle
between QWERTY or ABCDEF
keyboard character layouts.
If route guidance is not activated, ÄÖ or Sym: Touch to toggle
touch the Destination Entry screen between additional characters or
button on the Home Page to access symbols.
Driving on a Highway the Destination Entry screen. Space: Use to enter a space
Several options can be selected between characters or the words of
to plan a route by entering a name.
destinations. Some destination
entry items such as Previous Delete: Touch to delete an
Destinations, Address Book and My incorrect character that has been
Home may be greyed out if no selected.
destination was previously entered
or saved.
Driving on a Residential Road

6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Address Entry City/Suburb:

Country: Enter
Enter a city/suburb
a country name. the entered information, then
name.
Suburb/City: Enter a suburb displays it on the Destination
Street:
or city. Enter a street name. Confirmation screen.
House #:Enter
Street: Entera astreet
valid name.
address
number.
House #: Enter a valid address
Junction: Enter a street name that
number.
intersects with the selected street.
Touch the Address Entry screen Junction: Enter a street name that
Entering the
intersects city/suburb
with the selected name first:
street.
button to display the Address Entry
screen. Set a route by selecting the 1. Enter the city/suburb
Entering the suburb or city first:name.
country, entering the city/suburb 2. Enter
Enter the
1. the street
suburbname.or city.Use the
name, street name, house number Delete screen button to delete
and street junction. an incorrectly
2. Enter the streetentered
name.character.
Use the 5. Touch the Start Guidance screen
Delete screen button to delete button and the route calculates.
To make name selection easier, the A list
an displays ifentered
incorrectly six or fewer
character.
system highlights only characters names are available. If there Points of Interest (POI)
that are available after the are more than six, there is a
A list displays if six or fewer
previously entered one. names are available.
match counter If there are
with a number of
more thanstreets.
available six, there is athe
Touch match
List
Back Home Fav 22°C 4:39 PM
counter with a to
screen button number
view theof list and
Address Entry available
select thestreets.
street. Touch the List
City/Suburb: AUS screen button to view the list and
3. select
Enter the the house
street.number.
Street:
House #:
4. Touch the
3. Enter the house Done screen
number.button at Touch the Points of Interest screen
Junction:
any time and the system tries to button on the Destination Entry
4. Touch
resolvethe Done screen
a destination button
based on at
any time and the system tries to page. Several options can be
Done selected to plan a route.
resolve a destination based on
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
3. Enter the POI name. Previous Destinations

4. Select a few of the characters or
spell the name in full, by using
the alpha keyboard.
5. Touch the List screen button,
or if the list has six or fewer
items, a list of POIs will
immediately display. Select a destination from the
The POI entry list allows selection of 6. Select the desired POI. Previous Destination List. Up to
a destination search by category, 15 points that have been previously
name, or number. entered can be recalled. If the list is
full, the oldest destinations are
Entering by POI name:
automatically deleted once the
newest destinations are added.
Address Book
7. Touch the Start Guidance screen

button and the route calculates.
1. Select Search by Name. If no destination is saved to the

address book, save a destination:
2. Make sure the correct country,
suburb or city are present, then 1. Touch Destination on the
select Search. Home Page.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
2. Enter an address using any of 2. Select the destination from Latitude/Longitude Coordinates
the destination methods the list.
(Address Entry, POI Entry, etc.). 3. Touch the Start Guidance screen
3. On the Destination Confirmation button and the route calculates.
screen, select Save. To edit Address Book entries:
4. The system displays the options 1. Select an item from the
Name, Address, Number, Icon address book.
and Done. Touch Done to save Choose a destination based on
the destination. 2. On the Destination Confirmation latitudinal and longitudinal
screen, select Edit. coordinates.
5. To customise the address book
entry, select Name, Address, 3. The system displays the options
Number or Icon. Name, Address, Number, Icon
and Delete. Touch Delete to
If a destination is already saved to delete the destination from the
the address book, touch Destination address book.
Entry on the Home Page to display
the Address Book screen button. 4. To customise the address book
entry, select Name, Number,
Choose a destination by selecting or Icon.
an address that has been stored in
the address book. 5. Select Done when complete.
1. Touch the Address Book screen To enter the location as coordinates,
button. A list displays the latitude and longitude:
address book entries. 1. Touch Destination on the Home
Page. Touch the Latitude and
Longitude screen button to
display the screen above.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
2. Select Latitude or Longitude to 3. Select New Favourite Route and Deleting a favourite route:
change. Enter the coordinates in enter a favourite route name. 1. Touch the Home Page
degrees, minutes, and seconds. 4. Touch OK and the display Destination screen button to
Then touch Back to save returns to the favourite route display the Favourite Routes
and exit. information screen. screen button. Touch this button
3. Touch the Search screen button 5. Add a waypoint by using any of to display the list of available
if the information is correct. the destination methods, such favourite routes.
4. Touch the Start Guidance screen as address entry, POI entry, etc. 2. Scroll and select the route to be
button. The route calculates. 6. Touch Back to save and exit. deleted.
Favourite Routes Selecting a Favourite Route: 3. Touch Delete Favourite.
1. Touch the Home Page 4. Touch Confirm to delete the

Destination screen button to Favourite Route.
display the Favourite Routes Changing the route name:
screen button. 1. Touch the Home Page
2. Touch the Favourite Routes Destination screen button to
screen button to display a list of display the Favourite Routes
Adding a Favourite Route: available favourite routes. screen button. Touch this button
1. Touch the Home Page 3. Scroll and select a favourite to display the list of available
Destination screen button to route. favourite routes.
display the Favourite Routes 2. Scroll and select the route
4. Touch the Start Guidance screen
screen button. to edit.
button. The route calculates.
2. Touch the Favourite Routes 3. Select Edit Name.
screen button to display New
4. Using the keypad, enter
Favourite Route.
the name.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
5. Touch the OK screen button. Select from Map Destination Confirmation

The new name will be in the Multiple options are available on the
Favourite Routes Menu. Destination Confirmation screen:
My Home Start Guidance: Touch to start a
route calculation to the displayed
destination.
Show on Map: Touch to switch to
1. Touch the Home Page the map view with the displayed
Destination screen button to destination centred on the map.
display the Select from Map
screen button. Touch this button Route Options: Touch to change
If no home destination is entered, to display the map screen with route options. See “Route Options”
save a destination by touching the the current location. following.
Home Page Destination screen
2. Touch the Zoom in/out button on Call: Touch to initiate a phone call
button. Enter a destination using
the screen and touch the map to to the displayed phone number,
any of the destination entry methods
locate the destination to select. if phone capability is available.
(Address Entry, POI Entry, etc.).
Select Save as Home from the Touch and hold a finger on the Save as Home: Touch to save the
Destination Confirmation screen. map to activate fast scrolling. displayed destination as your home
The scroll symbol will be centred destination. The home destination
If a destination is already saved as
on the map. will be stored at the top of the list of
home, touch the Home Page
destinations in the address book.
Destination screen button to display 3. Touch the Go button on the
the My Home screen button. Touch bottom of the screen to display Save/Edit: Touch to save the
this button to start route guidance. the Destination Confirmation displayed destination into the
screen. address book. If the displayed
destination is already stored in the
4. Touch the Start Guidance screen address book, Edit will show as the
button. The route calculates. menu item.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Route Options A checkmark placed next to each Menu with Route Guidance
preference indicates this. All of Active
these preferences are used when
calculating the route. If any of these
preferences are unselected, the
route will be calculated without
including these preferences.
Use Highways: Deselect to avoid
major roads.
Use Toll Road: Deselect to avoid
toll roads.
Touch to display various route
options. Use Ferries: Deselect to avoid Several functions can be performed
ferries. after a destination has been
Fastest: This calculates the
quickest route. Use Tunnels: Deselect to avoid entered. Touch the Home Page
tunnels. Destination screen button or press
Shortest: This calculates the the DEST button to access the
shortest route. Use Time Restricted: Deselect to Route Menu screen.
avoid time restricted roads.
Eco: This calculates the most Cancel Guidance
fuel-efficient route based on speed Use Car Train: Deselect to avoid
and distance. car trains. Touch Cancel Guidance to cancel
the current route.
Under the Route Options menu,
there are route preferences
that by default are all enabled.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Destination List To delete a waypoint: 4. Select the location to move the

Up to three waypoints can be added 1. From the Destination menu, waypoint to.
to the current route. The waypoints touch Delete Waypoint. 5. Touch Add.
can be sorted (moved) or deleted. Instead of deleting individual
waypoints, select Delete All to
delete all waypoints at the
same time.
To save a destination list as a
favourite route, select Save as
Favourite Route.
Turn List
2. Select the waypoints to be
To add a waypoint: deleted. Touch the Delete
1. From the Destination List menu, screen button.
touch Add Waypoint. The Sort Waypoints feature allows
2. Enter the waypoint by any of the reorganisation of the destination list.
add destination methods. The To sort a waypoint:
system calculates and highlights 1. From the Route menu, touch
the route and the route can be Destination List.
started. Select Turn List to view a list of
2. Touch Sort Waypoints. manoeuvres for the entire route.
3. To add more waypoints, touch
Add Waypoint to add the 3. Select the waypoint to move. Touch the Avoid screen button
waypoint in the order desired on next to one of the turn manoeuvres
the route.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
to avoid a segment of roads. Configure Menu Select Navigation Settings to

A maximum of 8 avoided segments access the navigation system
are allowed. settings menu.
Avoid List
Select Avoid List to display a list of
avoided road segments with the
option to remove the avoided items
from the list.
Voice Prompt
Select Voice Prompt to view options
Touch the Config button on the
to disable or manage navigation
Home Page to enter the setup
voice prompts and traffic alert Voice Prompt
menu. Rotate the TUNE/MENU
prompts.
switch or touch the scroll bar until
Detour the Navigation Settings option
Select Detour to display the route displays. Select this feature to make
detour options. Select to detour the changes to Voice Prompt, Traffic
whole route or by a specific Settings, Guidance Alert, Delete
distance. Saved Destinations, Bread Crumbs
and Route Simulation.
Route Options Some options are available only
This feature can be accessed from after a route is planned.
the Destination Confirmation Menu The Voice Prompt Menu allows
and Route Menu with Route changes to the voice prompt
Guidance Active. See “Destination features.
Confirmation” for more information.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Navigation Voice Prompts: Select Traffic Alert Prompts: Touch to

to turn the voice instructions on or enable or disable the traffic voice
off while travelling on a planned prompts.
route. Alert if better route is available:
Traffic Alert Prompts: Select to Touch to prompt an alert if a better
turn the traffic voice prompt on or off route is available.
while travelling on a planned route. Sort Method: Touch to display a
Navigation Volume: Select submenu of sort options.
Navigation Volume to change the . Sort by Distance: Touch to
. Show All: Touch to enable
volume of the navigation prompts. display traffic events in order of display of all traffic icons on
distance with the closest event the map.
Traffic Settings
shown first. . Hide All: Touch to disable
. Sort by Road Name: Touch to display of all traffic icons on
display traffic events in the map.
alphabetical road name order. . User Defined: Touch to define
Show Traffic Events on Map: the individual types of icons that
Touch to display traffic icons on are displayed for traffic flow and
the map. traffic conditions.
Traffic icons with route guidance Traffic Flow

inactive are displayed in colour. The traffic flow status will display in
Touch to display the Traffic green, yellow, or red lines beside
Settings menu. Traffic icons with route guidance
active will display in colour on the the road.
Traffic Events: Touch to enable or route selected, and in grey off the . Red indicates significantly
disable the traffic feature. route selected. impaired traffic flow with average
speed less than 40 km/h.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13

. Yellow indicates slightly impaired
traffic flow with average speed
between 40 and 73 km/h.
. Green indicates normal traffic
flow with average speed above
73 km/h.
Accident Road Closed Road Visibility Other
Closed Roads, Incidents, Traffic
Delays, Roadwork, Incidents, and
Advisories
Select the traffic event group for
display on the map screen. Some
events may cover more than one
traffic condition. See the following
traffic conditions. Lane Narrows Road Work, Delay
Construction
Traffic Conditions
The following traffic condition icons
may display:
Alert Road Condition
Stopped Traffic Traffic Jam

6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 6/6/13
Traffic Stations Guidance Alerts Delete Saved Destinations

Select to display the Traffic Stations
screen.
Select to enable the guidance alert Select to delete all saved

pop-up to be viewed on the map or destinations. A Delete Saved
on the main screens such as audio, Destinations submenu displays.
Select either Manual or Automatic
phone, etc. A f appears to indicate Select the desired options for
Station Selection mode to choose a deletion and press delete at the
radio station that broadcasts Traffic the guidance alert mode is on.
bottom to continue. A confirmation
Message Channel (TMC) screen displays requesting to delete
information. or cancel.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Bread Crumbs Route Simulation

Bread crumbs, when displayed, Select to display a route simulation.
show a previously followed route. Use Last Known Position: Select
to start the simulation from the last
known position.
Use Previous Destination: Select
to start the simulation from a
previous destination.
Touch Next to skip to the next turn,
Use Specified Location: Select to or touch Stop to pause the
start the simulation from a specified simulation.
location.
To stop the simulation, press DEST
Once the starting position for the and select Cancel Guidance.
Select Display to enable bread
simulation is selected, select
crumbs on the map display. To exit from Simulation mode, return
Navigation and the Map display will
It is possible to record and store be in Simulation mode. SIM is to the Navigation Settings menu,
bread crumbs to retrieve journeys displayed on the map. select Route Simulation, then select
for future reference. Cancel Route Simulation.
Select and enter the destination as
Previously stored bread crumbs can for a normal journey and select Start
be loaded from the Saved menu Guidance to calculate the route in
Global Positioning
item, and then displayed by Simulation mode. System (GPS)
selecting Show on Map. The position of the vehicle is
determined by using satellite
signals, various vehicle signals, and
map data.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13

. The vehicle changes direction
At times, other interference such as Vehicle Positioning more than once, or the vehicle is
the satellite condition, road
configuration, condition of the At times, the position of the vehicle turning on a turn table in a
vehicle, and/or other circumstances on the map could be inaccurate due parking lot.
can affect the navigation system's to one or more of the following . The vehicle is entering and/or
ability to determine the accurate reasons:
exiting a parking lot, garage or a
position of the vehicle. . The road system has changed. lot with a roof.
The GPS shows the current position . The vehicle is driving on slippery . The GPS signal is not received.
of the vehicle using signals sent by road surfaces such as sand,
GPS Satellites. When the vehicle is
. A roof rack is installed on the
gravel or snow.
not receiving signals from the vehicle.
satellites, a symbol appears on the
. The vehicle is travelling on . Tyre chains have been installed.
map screen. See Navigation winding roads or long straight
roads. . The tyres are replaced or worn.
Symbols on page 7-45.
. The vehicle is approaching a tall . The tyre pressure for the tyres is
This system might not be available
building or a large vehicle. incorrect.
or interference can occur if any of
the following are true: . The surface streets run parallel . This is the first Navigation use
to a freeway. after the map data is updated.
. Signals are obstructed by tall
buildings, trees, large trucks, . If a tunnel runs parallel to a . The 12-volt battery is
or a tunnel. surface road. disconnected for several days.
. Satellites are being repaired or . The vehicle has been transferred . The vehicle is driving in heavy
improved. by a vehicle carrier or a ferry. traffic where driving is at low
speeds and the vehicle is
For more information if the GPS is . The current position calibration
stopped and started repeatedly.
not functioning properly, see is set incorrectly.
Problems with Route Guidance on . The vehicle is travelling at high
page 7-61. speed.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13

. Automatic rerouting might
Problems with Route display a route returning to the
Map Data Updates
Guidance set waypoint if heading for a The map data in the vehicle is the
Inappropriate route guidance can destination without passing most up-to-date information
occur under one or more of the through a set waypoint. available when the vehicle was
following conditions: produced. The map data is updated
. The route prohibits the entry of a
periodically, provided that the map
. The turn was not made on the vehicle due to a regulation by
information has changed.
road indicated. time or season or any other
regulation which may be given. To check for the availability of
. Route guidance might not be updated maps, contact your dealer.
available when using automatic
. The route to the destination
rerouting for the next right or might not be shown if there are
new roads, if roads have Database Coverage
left turn.
recently changed, or if certain Explanations
. The route might not be changed roads are not listed in the map
when using automatic rerouting. Coverage areas vary with respect to
data. See Maps on page 7-44.
the level of map detail available for
. There is no route guidance when To recalibrate the vehicle's position any given area. Some areas feature
turning at an intersection. on the map, park with the vehicle greater levels of detail than others.
. Plural names of places might be running for two to five minutes, until If this happens, it does not mean
announced occasionally. the vehicle position updates. Make there is a problem with the system.
sure the vehicle is parked in a As the map data is updated, more
. It could take a long time to location that is safe and has a clear detail can become available for
operate automatic rerouting view of the sky and away from large areas that previously had limited
during high-speed driving. obstruction. detail. See Map Data Updates on
page 7-61.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13

. When the command is
Voice Recognition Press b / g twice on the steering
recognised, the system will
wheel to skip the voice prompt
Voice recognition allows for either perform the function or
messages.
hands-free operation of the ask to confirm the choice.
infotainment system features. Cancelling Voice Recognition . When the system does not
Voice recognition can be used when 1. Press and release $ / i on recognise the command, the
the infotainment system is on. The system says “pardon.”
the steering wheel control to
system maintains a minimum cancel a command, if the system . If experiencing difficulty with the
volume level. response does not match the system recognising a command,
Using Voice Recognition voice command, or say confirm that the command is
“Goodbye” or “Cancel.” correct. Try saying the command
1. Press b / g on the steering 2. The system replies, “Goodbye.”
clearly or wait for a brief moment
wheel. The audio system mutes. after the tone.
A voice prompt states, “Please Helpful Hints for Speaking . Background noise such as open
say a command.” Wait until the Commands windows, and very loud outside
tone is heard before speaking. noises, even if the windows are
. When multiple commands are
If there is no tone, make sure available, choose the command closed, can cause voice
that the volume is turned up. that works best for you. commands to be misunderstood.
While voice recognition is active, . Words in parentheses are
. To increase or decrease the
the system displays a g symbol optional. For example, for the voice volume during a voice
in the top right of the screen. command “Tune FM recognition session, turn the
(frequency),” saying “Tune FM volume switch of the radio,
2. Clearly speak one of the 87.7” or “Tune FM” are both or press the volume steering
commands listed later in this valid commands. wheel control. If the volume is
section. adjusted during a voice
recognition session, a Volume
bar appears on the screen
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
showing the voice volume level Help: The system plays back more Voice Recognition Commands
as it is being adjusted. This also specific help commands such as
The following list shows the voice
changes the volume of the Radio Settings for the user to
commands available for the
guidance prompts. choose from.
infotainment system with a brief
. When using navigation Radio: Use this command to learn description of each. The commands
commands, take the time to about how to select a band (AM or are listed with the optional words in
become familiar with the FM), and how to change radio parentheses. To use the voice
address. Long delays when stations by speaking frequency commands, see the previous
giving the address can result in numbers. instructions.
the system not recognising the Phone: Use this command to learn
address or routing to different Radio Commands
about how to dial, pair a device,
location than intended. or delete a device. Tune AM, Tune FM, Tune Pandora,
. When providing the house Tune Stitcher: Instructs the system
My Media: Use this command to to go to the specific band and the
number portion of the address, learn how to play specific tracks,
the system recognises both digit last station.
artists, albums, devices connected
format and numerical text. An to the USB port, or to change Tune AM (frequency) or Tune FM
example would be to say, sources. (frequency): Instructs the system
“3-0-0-1” or “Three to go to the specific station.
Thousand One.” Settings: Use this command to
learn about how to turn Verbose on Thumbs Up: Instructs the system
Voice Recognition Help or off, or set the language. to give the current song or station a
thumbs up in Pandora or Stitcher.
To enter the help playback session,
clearly speak one of the help Thumbs Down: Instructs the
commands. system to give the current song or
station a thumbs down in Pandora
or Stitcher.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Phone Commands Delete Device: Instructs the Search Artist (artist name):
system to delete a paired device. Instructs the system to show a list of
Dial or Call (phone number or
all songs by a specific artist. For
contact): Instructs the system to My Media Commands example, say "Search Artist
start a phone call. For example, say
CD, AUX, USB, or Bluetooth <artist name>.”
“Dial 1234 5678.” To call a phone
book contact, say “Dial” or “Call,” Audio: Instructs the system to Search Composer (composer
say the name and location, and then change the source. name): Instructs the system to
say “Dial.” For example, say “Call Play CD: Instructs the system to show a list of all songs by a specific
John at Home” or “Call John at play a CD. For example, say composer. For example, say
Work.” If a number is not “Play CD.” "Search Composer
recognised, the first number in the <composer name>.”
The following commands only apply
list will be called. to USB, iPod, and iPhone sources. Search Album (album name):
Pair or Connect: Instructs the They are supported after the device Instructs the system to show a list of
system to begin pairing a device. has been indexed. all songs by a specific album. For
example, say "Search Album
Digit Dial: Instructs the system to Play Artist (artist name): Instructs
<album name>.”
dial a phone number one digit at a the system to play songs by a
time. After saying the digits, specific artist. For example, say Search Genre (genre name):
say “Dial.” “Play Artist <artist name>.” Instructs the system to show a list of
all songs for a specific genre. For
Redial or Redial Last Number: Play Album (album title): Instructs
example, say "Search Genre
Instructs the system to dial the last the system to play a specific album.
<genre name>.”
phone number called. Play Song (song title): Instructs
Search Folder (folder name):
Select Device or Change Phone: the system to play a specific song.
Instructs the system to show a list of
Instructs the system to switch to a Play Genre (genre name): all songs in a specific folder. For
different paired device. The device Instructs the system to play songs example, say "Search folder
must be selected from the screen or of a particular genre. <folder name>.”
using the TUNE/MENU switch.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Search Playlist (playlist name): List Devices: Instructs the system Previous Page, Page Up: Instructs
Instructs the system to show a list of to give a list of devices to use. the system to scroll back one page
all songs in a specific playlist. For in a list.
example, say "Search playlist Other Commands
<playlist name>.” Goodbye: Instructs the system to Navigation Commands
Search Audiobook (audiobook end a phone call or voice The vehicle may have Navigation.
name): Instructs the system to recognition. To activate the navigation voice
show a list of all tracks in a specific Cancel: Instructs the system to recognition:
audiobook. For example, say cancel an action.
"Search audiobook 1. Press b / g on the steering
Go Back, Back, Previous: wheel. The audio system mutes.
<audiobook name>.”
Instructs the system to go back to a A voice prompt says, “Please
Search Podcast (podcast name): prior menu. say a command.” Wait until the
Instructs the system to show a list of tone is heard before speaking.
Main Menu: Instructs the system to
all tracks in a specific podcast. For
go to the main menu. If there is no tone, make sure
example, say "Search podcast
<podcast name>.” Yes, Yep, Yup, Ya, Sure, Right, the volume is turned up.
Correct, OK, Positive, You Got it, While voice recognition is active,
More Like This: Instructs the
Probably, You Bet: These can be the system displays a symbol in
system to create a playlist of tracks
used to say “Yes.” the top right of the screen.
similar to the current track playing.
No, Nope, Na, No way, Wrong, 2. Clearly speak the command
Settings Commands Incorrect, Negative, Not really, No “Navigation.”
Verbose (set) on (mode), Verbose I said, No I Did Not, No I Do Not:
(set) off (mode): Instructs the These can be used to say “No.” 3. Clearly speak one of the
system to turn voice prompts on or commands in this section.
Next Page, Page Down: Instructs
off. When off, this feature turns off the system to scroll forward one The following commands only apply
voice prompts. page in a list. once the Navigation command is
given.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Address or Destination: Allows Contact: When a phone is paired Add Waypoint: Allows addition
an address to be stated as a to the system, which contains of individual waypoints or the
one-shot method. The system will Address Information stored for destination. The system will ask for
recognise the address if stated all at contacts, the address associated the choice of entry method to
once or say a city centre. An with that contact can become a continue. An example is to say, “POI
example is to say, “191 Salmon route. If the system cannot resolve Along Route” or “Intersection.”
Street, Port Melbourne” the address, an error displays. Delete Waypoint: When guidance
or “Port Melbourne.” Points of Interest or POI: Allows a is active, this command allows the
Directed Address: Allows an Point of Interest to be stated as a deletion of individual waypoints or
address to be stated one step at a destination. Become familiar the destination. If guidance is not
time. The format will be City/Suburb, with the POI categories and active the system will indicate the
Street, then House Number. sub-categories in the system by destination list is empty.
Intersection: Allows an pressing Destination from the Home Where Am I?, My Location,
Intersection to be stated as the Page or DEST from the faceplate, or Current Position: Instructs the
destination. The format will be then selecting Point of Interest. POI system to give the current position
City/Suburb, Street, then Junction. commands for Along Route and of the vehicle.
Around Destination will be available
Home: Instructs the system to start if route guidance is active. Help: The system plays back more
guidance to address saved as specific help commands associated
My Home. with Navigation or a Navigation
sub-feature.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Settings 2. Touch the scroll bar until the

desired option displays. Select
12hr/24hr Format: Touch to select
12 hour or 24 hour time format.
The Configuration Menu is used to the desired settings to change. Touch the Back screen button to
adjust features and preferences,
Languages save the adjustments.
such as Sound, Radio, Nav
(Navigation), Display, or Time Note: English is the only available Radio Settings
Settings. language. Touch the Config button on the
Time and Date Home Page or press the CONFIG
button to enter the menu options.
Rotate the TUNE/MENU switch or
touch the scroll bar to scroll through
the available options. Press the
TUNE/MENU switch or touch Radio
Settings to display the radio settings
1. Touch the Config screen button menu. Select this feature to make
on the Home Page or press the changes for Auto Volume Control,
CONFIG button. radio information displayed, Startup
Volume and Number of Favourite
Select Time and Date to display the Pages.
Time and Date Settings menu. The Radio Settings are:
Set Time: Touch the + or − to Auto Volume: Select OFF, Low,
increase or decrease the Hours and Medium, or High sensitivity to
Minutes displayed on the clock. automatically adjust the volume to
Set Date: Touch the + or − to minimise the effects of unwanted
increase or decrease the year, background noise that can result
month and day. from changing road surfaces,
driving speeds, or open windows.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
This feature works best at lower Navigation Settings Park Assist Mode: Select to
volume settings where background choose the default display as the
See Configure Menu on page 7-55.
noise is typically louder than the rear-view camera, or the park
sound system volume. Display Settings assist graphic, when selecting
Gracenote Options: Touch to reverse gear.
Touch the Config button on the
enable/disable Normalisation used Home Page or touch the CONFIG Display Off: Touch to turn off the
to improve voice recognition and button, then select Display Settings display. The display will return when
media groupings. See CD Player on from the list. any buttons are pressed or the
page 7-27, USB on page 7-32, screen is touched.
Auxiliary Devices on page 7-38, and Map Settings: Select to enter the
Bluetooth Audio on page 7-39. submenu to change Automatic
Startup Volume: Touch to set the Zoom, enable Speed Limit display
maximum volume level for startup on map, and change Map Display
that will be used even if a higher settings.
volume had been set when the radio . Map Display: Touch to change
was turned off. the screen background.
Number of Favourite Pages: To change the overall brightness
Touch to select the number of FAV setting for the display, use
The following options may display:
pages to be displayed. the vehicle interior lighting
Software Version Menu: Touch to Home Page Menu: Touch to instrument panel illumination
display information about the customise the first page of the control.
system and software. Home Page.
‐ The Automatic setting adjusts
Rear Camera Options: Touch to
Phone Settings the screen background
adjust the rear camera options. automatically depending on
See Bluetooth on page 7-69 the exterior lighting conditions.
in the “Phone” section for more
information on phone settings.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
‐ The Day setting brightens the Bluetooth Phone/ phones. Available features and
map background. functions may be dependent on the
‐ The Night setting darkens the
Devices device.
map background. Bluetooth® Controls
.
Bluetooth
Speed Limits: Select to display Use the buttons on the infotainment
the posted speed limit on the Overview system and the steering wheel to
map, when available. operate the Bluetooth® system.
For vehicles equipped with
Vehicle Settings Bluetooth® capability, the system Steering Wheel Controls
can interact with many mobile
See Vehicle Personalisation on phones and devices, allowing: b / g (Push to Talk): Press to
page 5-32. answer incoming calls and start
. Placing and receiving hands-free voice recognition.
calls.
$ / i (Mute/End Call): Press to
. Sharing of the mobile phone's end a call, decline an incoming call,
address book or contact list with or cancel voice recognition.
the vehicle. The phone book will
only display when that phone is + x − (Volume): Press + or − to
connected. increase or decrease the volume.
. Placing outgoing calls by voice Infotainment System Controls
recognition.
For information about how to
The system can be used while the navigate the menu system using
infotainment system is on. The the infotainment controls, see
range of the Bluetooth® system Overview on page 7-3.
can be up to 9.1 m. The radio can
connect to most Bluetooth®-enabled 5 /> (Phone/Mute): Press to
enter the Phone main menu. Press
and hold to mute or unmute.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Voice Recognition Bluetooth® Audio phone changes or the mobile

See Bluetooth Audio on page 7-39. phone is deleted from the
The voice recognition system uses
system.
commands to control the system
and dial phone numbers.
Pairing with Infotainment . Only one paired mobile phone
Controls can be connected to the
When using voice recognition:
A Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone Bluetooth® system at a time.
. The system may not recognise must be paired and then connected . If multiple paired mobile phones
voice commands if there is too to the vehicle before it can be are within range of the system,
much background noise. used. See your mobile phone the radio will connect to the first
. A tone sounds to indicate that manufacturer's user guide for phone in the list or to the phone
the system is ready for a voice Bluetooth® functions before pairing that was previously connected.
command. Wait for the tone and the mobile phone.
then speak. Pairing a Phone/Device
Pairing Information
. Speak clearly in a calm and 1. Press CONFIG or touch
. A Bluetooth®-enabled phone and Config on the Home Page or
natural voice. an audio playback device can be
press 5 / >.
See Voice Recognition on paired to the system at the
page 7-62. same time. 2. Select Phone Settings.
Audio System
. Up to five devices can be paired 3. Select Bluetooth.
to the Bluetooth® system. 4. Select Pair Device. The
Sound comes through the vehicle's
front audio system speakers and
. The pairing process is disabled infotainment system displays
overrides the audio system. Use the when the vehicle is moving. “Pairing Code: XXXX”. Confirm
O /VOL switch during a call to or enter number:” If the device
. Pairing only needs to be
change the volume level. The supports a four-digit Personal
completed once, unless the
adjusted volume level remains in Identification Number (PIN), it
pairing information on the mobile
memory for later calls. The system will display. The PIN is used in
maintains a minimum volume level. Step 6.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
5. Start the pairing process on the 8. Repeat to pair additional Connecting to a Different Phone
mobile phone to be paired to the phones. To connect to a different phone, the
vehicle. See the mobile phone new phone must be in the vehicle
manufacturer's user guide. Listing All Paired and Connected
Phones/Devices and available to be connected to the
6. Locate and select the device Bluetooth® system before the
named Mylink in the list on the 1. Press CONFIG, touch Config on
process is started.
mobile phone. Follow the the Home Page and select
Phone, or press 5 / >. 1. Press CONFIG, touch Config on
instructions on the mobile phone the Home Page and select
to enter the PIN provided in 2. Select Phone Settings.
Step 4, or to confirm the six-digit Phone, or press 5 / >.
code matches. The system 3. Select Bluetooth. 2. Select Phone Settings.
recognises the new connected 4. Select Device List.
phone after the pairing process 3. Select Bluetooth.
is complete. Deleting a Paired Phone/Device 4. Select Device List.
7. If the phone prompts to accept 1. Press CONFIG, touch Config on 5. Select the new phone to connect
connection or allow phone book the Home Page and select to and follow the screen
download, select always accept Phone, or press 5 / >. prompts.
and allow. The phone book may 2. Select Phone Settings.
not be available if not accepted. Pairing with Voice Recognition
Some phones will put 3. Select Bluetooth. A Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone
connection request or 4. Select Device List. must be paired and then connected
phonebook request in a pull to the vehicle before it can be
down task bar at the top of the 5. Select the phone to delete, used. See the mobile phone
screen. Drag down the task bar select Delete and follow the manufacturer's user guide for
and look for connection/ screen prompts. Bluetooth® functions before pairing
phonebook request and accept. the mobile phone.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Pairing a Phone 5. Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to pair 3. The system responds with: “To
additional phones. delete a device, please select its
1. Press b / g. The system name from the list.” Select the
responds “Please Say a Listing All Paired and Connected device to delete on the display
Command,” followed by a tone. Phones and it will be removed.
2. Say “Pair.” The system responds The system can list all mobile To cancel this command,
with “Please search for phones paired to it. If a paired
mobile phone is also connected to press $ / i on the steering wheel
Bluetooth® devices on your
phone, select your vehicle, the vehicle, the system responds control or press the / BACK button.
confirm or enter the PIN number with “is connected” after that
phone name. Connecting to a Different Phone
provided on the screen.” or Device
3. Start the search for Bluetooth® 1. Press b / g. The system To connect to a different mobile
devices on the phone. Then responds “Please Say a phone, the system looks for the next
select the device and follow the Command,” followed by a tone. available mobile phone. Depending
instructions on the phone by on the mobile phone to be
either entering the four-digit PIN 2. Say “List Device.”
connected, this command may need
or confirming the six-digit Deleting a Paired Phone to be repeated.
passcode. The PIN is used in
If the phone name to delete is
Step 4. 1. Press b / g. The system
unknown, see “Listing All Paired
4. Locate and select the device and Connected Phones.” responds “Please Say a
named MyLink in the list on the Command,” followed by a tone.
mobile phone. Follow the 1. Press b / g. The system 2. Say “Change Phone.”
instructions on the mobile phone responds “Please Say a
to enter the PIN provided in Command,” followed by a tone.
. To select a device, press
Step 3 or to confirm the six-digit the name on the display.
2. Say “Delete Device.”
code matches. The system . If another mobile phone is
responds “successfully paired.” not found, the original
phone remains connected.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Making a Call Using Phone The radio will display the first 4. Select the name or number
Book and Infotainment 1,000 contacts and the phone to call.
Controls numbers for each contact including 5. Select Call.
Home, Work, Mobile, and Other.
For mobile phones that support the Making a Call Using the
phone book feature, the Bluetooth® To make a call using the Phone
Book menu: Infotainment Controls
system can use the contacts stored
on the mobile phone to make To make a call:
1. Press 5 / > or touch the Phone
calls. See the mobile phone
manufacturer's user guide or
screen button. 1. Press 5 / > or touch the Phone
contact the wireless provider to find 2. Select Phone Book. screen button.
out if this feature is supported. 3. Select the letter group of the 2. Touch Enter number.
When a mobile phone supports the phone book entry to scroll 3. Enter the phone number.
phone book feature, the Phone through the list of names/
numbers. 4. Select OK to start dialling the
Book and Call Lists menus are
number.
automatically available. 4. Select the name.
To make a call using voice
The Phone Book menu allows 5. Select the number to call. recognition, see “Making a Call”
access to the phone book stored in
To make a call using the Call under Hands-Free Phone on
the mobile phone to make a call.
Lists menu: page 7-75.
The Call Lists menu allows access
to the phone numbers from the 1. Press 5 / > or touch the Phone Accepting or Declining a Call
Incoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, and screen button. When an incoming call is received,
Missed Calls menus on the mobile 2. Select Call Lists. the infotainment system mutes and
phone to make a call. a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
3. Select the Incoming Calls,
Outgoing Calls, or Missed
Calls list.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Using the Infotainment Controls Call Waiting Using Steering the wireless service carrier to work.
Rotate TUNE/MENU to “Answer” or Wheel Controls This feature is only supported when
“Decline” and press TUNE/MENU or the vehicle is not moving.
Call waiting must be supported on
touch Accept or Decline on the the mobile phone and enabled by To start a conference while in a
screen. the wireless service carrier. current call:
Using Steering Wheel Controls . Press b / g to answer an 1. Select Enter Number.
Press b / g to answer or $ / i to incoming call when another call 2. Enter the phone number and
decline the call. is active. The original call is select OK.
placed on hold. 3. After the call has been placed,
Call Waiting Using the rotate TUNE/MENU and choose
Infotainment Controls
. Press b / g again to return to
the original call. Merge Calls.
Call waiting must be supported on 4. To add more callers to the
the Bluetooth® phone and enabled
. To decline answering the
incoming call, touch Decline on conference call, repeat
by the wireless service carrier Steps 1−3. The number of
to work. the screen or take no action.
callers that can be added is
Switching Between Calls (Call
. Press $ / i to disconnect the limited by your wireless service
Waiting Calls Only) current call and switch to the call carrier.
on hold.
To switch between calls rotate and Ending a Call
press TUNE/MENU and select Conference Calling Using the Using the Infotainment Controls
Switch Call or touch Switch Call on Infotainment Controls
the screen. Rotate and press TUNE/MENU to
Conference calling and three-way select Hang Up, or press Hang Up
calling must be supported on the on the screen.
Bluetooth® phone and enabled by
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Using Steering Wheel Controls To Transfer Audio from the Using the Infotainment Controls
Bluetooth® System to a Mobile
Press $ / i. Phone
1. Select Enter Number.
2. Select the digits on the screen
Muting a Call During a call with the audio in the then touch OK to send.
During a call, all sounds from inside vehicle, touch the Transfer Call
button on the screen or press and
the vehicle can be muted so that the Hands-Free Phone
person on the other end of the call hold the b / g button on the
cannot hear them. steering wheel. Using Bluetooth® Voice
To Transfer Audio to the
Recognition
Using the Infotainment Controls
Bluetooth® System from a Mobile To use voice recognition, press the
Rotate and press TUNE/MENU to
select Mute Call. Select again to
Phone b / g button on the steering wheel.
Use the audio transfer feature on Use the commands below for the
cancel mute.
the mobile phone. See your mobile various voice features. For
Transferring a Call phone manufacturer's user guide additional information, say “Help”
for more information. Touch the while in a voice recognition menu.
Audio can be transferred between
the Bluetooth® system and the Transfer to Handset button on the Making a Call
mobile phone. screen or press and hold the b / g
Calls can be made using the
The mobile phone must be paired button on the steering wheel. following commands.
and connected with the Bluetooth® Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Dial or Call: These commands can
system before a call can be (DTMF) Tones be used interchangeably to dial a
transferred.
The in-vehicle Bluetooth® system phone number.
can send numbers during a call. Digit Dial: This command allows a
This is used when calling a phone number to be dialed by
menu-driven phone system. entering the digits one at a time.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Re-dial: This command dials the Once connected, the person called Using the “Re-dial” Command
last number used on the mobile will be heard through the audio
phone. speakers. 1. Press b / g. The system
responds “Please Say a
Using the “Dial” or “Call” Using the “Digit Dial” Command Command,” followed by a tone.
Command This allows a phone number to be 2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.” The
To call a number: dialed by entering the digits one at system dials the last number
a time. called from the connected
1. Press b / g. The system
mobile phone.
responds “Please Say a 1. Press b / g. The system
Command,” followed by a tone. responds “Please Say a Once connected, the person called
Command,” followed by a tone. will be heard through the audio
2. Say “Dial” or “Call.” speakers.
3. Say the entire number without 2. Say “Digit Dial.”
pausing. The system responds 3. Say each digit, one at a time, to Clearing the System
with the entered number. dial. After each digit is entered, Unless information is deleted out of
4. Say “Dial” or “Call”. the system repeats back the the vehicle Bluetooth® system, it will
digit it heard followed by a tone. be retained. This includes phone
Once connected, the person called After the last digit has been pairing information. For directions
will be heard through the audio entered, say “Dial.” on how to delete this information,
speakers. see “Deleting a Paired Phone/
If an unwanted number is repeated
To call using a name tag: back, say “Clear” to clear the last Device.”
number.
1. Press b / g. The system
responds “Please Say a Once connected, the person called
Command,” followed by a tone. will be heard through the audio
speakers.
2. Say “Dial” or “Call” and then say
the name tag. For example “Call
John at Work.”
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 6 / 6 /13
Infotainment System
7-73
Text Messaging
Making a Call Using Phone Using Textwill
The radio Messaging
display the first 4. Select the name or number
Book
The and Infotainment
infotainment system can 1,000 contacts and the phone to call.
Controls
display text messages, play back numbers for each contact including 5. Select Call.
Home, Work, Mobile, and Other.
aFor
message
mobile over
phonesthe that
audio system,
support the
and send a predefined message To make a call using the Phone Making a Call Using the
phone book feature, the Bluetooth® Infotainment Controls
reply.
system can use the contacts stored Book menu:
Not all phones
on the mobile support
phone toallmake To make a call:
1. Press 5 / > or touch the Phone
functions
calls. Seeand thework
mobilewithphone
Bluetooth. screen button. 1. Press 5 / > or touch the Phone
manufacturer's user guide or
The infotainment system only 2. Select
screena button.
message for viewing.
contact the wireless provider to find 2.Touch
1. Select
thePhone Book.button on
Messages Viewing messages is only
supports
out if thisthe receiptis of SMS text
feature supported. the Home Page
3. Select the letter or group
select of
Text
the 2. available whilenumber.
Touch Enter the vehicle is not in
messages. A request may need to
When a mobile phone supports the Messages
phone book fromentry
the Phone main
to scroll motion.
be accepted on the phone or some 3. Enter the phone number.
screen.
through the list of names/
4. Depending
Select OKonto the
startphone
phonesettings
phone book feature,
may needthe Phone
to be
numbers. dialling the
Book andtoCall
changed Lists
allow textmenus are
messaging Note: The Messages button on connected,
number. either existing
automatically
to function. Seeavailable.
the mobile phone the
4. home
Selectpage and Phone main
the name. messages or messages as they
screen option will only be visible if a To make a call using voice
manufacturer’s
The Phone Book user guide.
menu allows 5. Select the number to call. are received are displayed.
paired phone supporting SMS text recognition, see “Making a Call”
access
The text to the phonefeature
messaging book stored in
messages
To make awithcall correct
using thesettings
Call is under Hands-Free Phone on
the also
can mobile
be phone
initiatedtovia
make
voicea call.
connected.
Lists menu: page 7-75.
recognition.
The Call Lists menu allows access
to the phone numbers from the iPhone:
1. PressEnsure
5 / >Show Notifications
or touch is
the Phone Accepting or Declining a Call
Incoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, and ON in the paired
screen MyLink settings on
button. When an incoming call is received,
Missed Calls menus on the mobile the phone. the infotainment system mutes and
2. Select Call Lists.
phone to make a call. Android: Accept and activate a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
3. SelectAccess
Message the Incoming Calls, if
Profile (MAP)
Outgoing Calls, or Missed
requested.
Calls list.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 6/6/13
7-78
7-74 Infotainment
Infotainment System
System
Using the Infotainment Controls Replying

Call to Text
Waiting Messages
Using Steering Incoming
the wirelessText Messages
service carrier to work.
Rotate TUNE/MENU to “Answer” or Wheel Controls This feature is only supported when
“Decline” and press TUNE/MENU or the vehicle is not moving.
Call waiting must be supported on
touch Accept or Decline on the the mobile phone and enabled by To start a conference while in a
screen. the wireless service carrier. current call:
Using Steering Wheel Controls . Press b / g to answer an 1. Select Enter Number.
Press b / g to answer or $ / i to incoming call when another call 2. Enter the phone number and
is active. The original call is select OK.
3. View the
decline the message.
call. The message
view screen is not available while
placed on hold. A pop-up
3. After the screen is displayed
call has when
been placed,
.1. Select the desired message
Call Waiting Using the there is an
rotate incoming text
TUNE/MENU message.
and choose
the vehicle is in motion. Press b / g again to return to
Infotainment Controls from the display of predefined The pop-up
Merge will remain on the
Calls.
• Touch Listen to hear the the original call.
messages to send as the reply. screen until Dismiss is selected.
Callmessage
waiting must be supported
through the audio on 4. To add more callers to the
the Bluetooth® phone and enabled
. To decline answering the • Touch Listencall,
to hear the message
system. incoming call, touch Decline on conference repeat
by the wireless service carrier through
Steps 1−3.the The
audio system.
number of
to• work.
Touch Call to dial the contact the screen or take no action.
• Touch
callersView to view
that can the message.
be added is
or number associated with the . Press $ / i to disconnect the The message
limited by yourview screen
wireless is not
service
text message.
Switching Between NotCalls
all phones
(Call
current call and switch to the call available
carrier. while the vehicle is in
allowCalls
Waiting calling the sender of the
Only)
message and will result in not on hold. motion.
To switch between calls rotate and Ending a Call
being able to select • Touch Reply to reply to the text
press TUNE/MENU andCall.
select Conference Calling Using the
message
Using using a predefined
the Infotainment Controls
• Touch
Switch CallReply to reply
or touch withCall
Switch a on Infotainment Controls
message.
predefined message, to a text
the screen. 2. Touch Send to send Rotate and press TUNE/MENU to
Conference calling andthe message.
three-way • Touch
select HangCall to or
Up, dialpress
the contact
Hang Up or
message that was received as Alternatively, touch Back tothe
calling must be supported on cancel
an incoming message. Not all ®
number
on the associated with the text
screen.
and return
Bluetooth to theand
phone previous screen.
enabled by message.
phones support the sending of
messages. • Touch Dismiss to close the pop-up
incoming message screen.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 6/6/13
Infotainment System
7-75
Text Messaging
Using Steering Settings
Wheel Controls ToUse the touch
Transfer Audioscreen
fromkeyboard
the to Using the Infotainment Controls
enter the®message.
Bluetooth System to a Mobile
Press $ / i. Touch Done to store.
Phone
1. Select Enter Number.
2. Select the digits on the screen
Muting a Call •During
To delete a predefined
a call message,
with the audio in the then touch OK to send.
During a call, all sounds from inside select the
vehicle, message
touch and touch
the Transfer Call Yes
to confirm.
button on the screen or press and
the vehicle can be muted so that the Hands-Free Phone
person on the other end of the call •hold
Touch b/g
the Text Alerts to choose
button on the the
cannot hear them. alert behaviour
steering wheel. for incoming text Using Bluetooth® Voice
Tomessages:
Transfer Audio to the
Recognition
Using the Infotainment Controls
In the Text Message Inbox, touch - Text alert
Bluetooth ®
with tonefrom a Mobile
System To use voice recognition, press the
Rotate and
Settings press TUNE/MENU
to access to
the Text Message
select Mute Call. Select again to
Phone
- Tone only b / g button on the steering wheel.
Settings menu. Use the commands below for the
cancel mute. Use the audio transfer feature on
- Off
the mobile phone. See your mobile various voice features. For
Transferring a Call phone manufacturer's user guide additional information, say “Help”
for more information. Touch the while in a voice recognition menu.
Audio can be transferred between
the Bluetooth® system and the Transfer to Handset button on the Making a Call
mobile phone. screen or press and hold the b / g
Calls can be made using the
The mobile phone must be paired button on the steering wheel. following commands.
and connected with the Bluetooth® Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Dial or Call: These commands can
system before a call can be (DTMF) Tones
•transferred.
Touch Manage Predefined be used interchangeably to dial a
The in-vehicle Bluetooth® system phone number.
Messages to create a user defined
message that can be used later to can send numbers during a call. Digit Dial: This command allows a
reply to a text message. This is used when calling a phone number to be dialed by
menu-driven phone system. entering the digits one at a time.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 6/6/13
7- 80
1-14 Infotainment
In Brief System
2 NOTES
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control 2. Zone button

3. Windscreen demister button
Systems
4. Face mode button
Climate Control Systems
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . 8-1 Air Conditioning System 5. Fan speed knob
The climate control panel is located 6. Bi-level mode button
Air Vents
in the centre of the dashboard. 7. Air conditioning on/off button
Adjustable Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Fixed Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Temperature settings for the driver 8. Automatic climate control button
and passenger can be adjusted
Maintenance independently. 9. Temperature control knob:
Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 driver side
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 10. Recirculation on/off button
Air Conditioning Regular 11. Floor mode button
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
12. Floor and windscreen demist
(blend) mode button
13. Rear window demister button
Temperature Controls
. Rotate the temperature control
knobs clockwise (warmer) or
anticlockwise (cooler).
. The settings for each side
Controls
appear on the temperature
1. Temperature control knob: control knob displays and the
passenger side infotainment display.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
8-2 Climate Controls

. Turning the temperature control Enter Dual-Zone mode by adjusting Leave the system in automatic
knob clockwise past 30°C, will the passenger side temperature operation to:
show HI (hottest). control knob when in . Turn the air conditioning on
Turning the temperature control Single-Zone mode. and off.
knob anticlockwise past 16°C, Automatic Operation .
will show LO (coolest). Vary the temperature of the air
1. Turn the ignition on. entering the cabin.
. A temperature setting between
22°C and 24°C is recommended 2. Press AUTO if the LED on the . Switch between recirculate or
as an initial starting point for Automatic Climate Control fresh air.
comfort. button is not illuminated. . Vary the fan speed.
Single and Dual Zone 3. Use the temperature control . Alter air delivery mode vent
knobs to adjust the temperature. selection.
Press ZONE to synchronise the
driver and passenger temperatures. 4. Adjust the angle of the air vents Note: The automatic climate control
for personal comfort. system may not work properly if one
Driver has control will be displayed
5. Allow the system to stabilise for or more dashboard vents are
on the infotainment display and
a few minutes. closed.
the system will operate in
Single-Zone mode. Note: Manual Operation
In this mode the system . The automatic climate control Fan speed
temperature is adjusted using the setting does not change when
driver side temperature the ignition is turned off or on. . Rotate ^ to increase or
control knob. decrease the fan speed.
. The automatic climate control
Dual-Zone mode sets the fan speed automatically. . The fan speed appears on the
infotainment display.
Dual-Zone mode allows different It is not necessary to set a cooler or
temperatures to be set for the left hotter temperature to ensure fast . Pressing ^ will turn the system
and right sides. cooling or heating. on/off.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Note: . Floor mode d directs most of Auto

. When manually adjusting the the air to the floor vents and . Pressing AUTO switches the
fan speed, the system will console vents, some to the outer system to automatic climate
revert to semi-automatic dashboard vents, windscreen control.
operation. and side window demist vents.
. AUTO appears on the
. To return to automatic
. Floor and windscreen demist infotainment display.
operation, press AUTO. (blend) mode 4 directs air
Note: The AUTO icons on the
between the windscreen,
Mode infotainment display are not
console vents and floor vents,
displayed when the system is
Press the mode buttons to switch some to the outer dashboard
operating manually.
between the following positions: vents and side window demist
vents. Air Conditioning
. Face mode 0 directs air to both
dashboard and console vents. The selected air delivery mode . Press # to switch the air
settings appear on the conditioning on and off.
. Bi-level mode 1 directs air to infotainment display.
both dashboard and console Note:
. # On appears on the
vents and most of the remaining infotainment display when
air to the floor vents.
. Manual selection of any air switched on.
delivery mode will revert the
Cooler air is directed to the system to semi-automatic . # Off appears on the
upper outlets and warmer air to operation. infotainment display when
the floor vents. switched off.
. To return to automatic
Console vent temperature is a operation, press AUTO.
mix of dashboard and floor
vent air.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Note: Recirculation Pollution mode

. When 5 is selected, the air . Press / to switch the air The vehicle may have
conditioning is automatically intake between recirculated air pollution mode.
switched on to improve and outside air. . Pollution mode selects
defogging performance. recirculation when the vehicle
. / appears on the speed is less than 15 km/h to
. Air conditioning removes infotainment display when
moisture and heat from prevent exhaust fumes entering
operating in recirculation mode. the interior in heavy, start/stop
the air.
Note: traffic.
. Switch the air conditioning on
for at least 5 to 10 minutes
. Recirculation reuses interior Windscreen demister
once every 2 weeks to air so is not recommended
for long periods of time.
. Press 5 to demist the
lubricate the system, even in
winter. windscreen and front passenger
If left on, fresh air is let into side windows.
. Air conditioning cannot be the cabin periodically.
turned off in demist mode.
. Air conditioning and fresh air
. Do not use recirculation if mode are switched on
. Air conditioning may switch occupants are smoking. automatically.
off during heavy acceleration, . Recirculation cannot be
towing or when there is activated in demist mode.
. 5 appears on the infotainment
abnormal system pressure or display.
very cold outside . AUTO / is displayed
when the system is
. Press 5 again to turn the
temperatures.
automatically controlling the demister off and revert to the
mixture of fresh and previously selected mode.
recirculated air for optimal
performance.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Rear window demister Quick cool down Water

. Press + to turn the rear When entering the vehicle on a hot Water condensation can leave
demister on or off. day, open the windows for a short traces of clear water on the ground
time to allow the hot air to escape. underneath the vehicle.
. An LED on the button indicates
that the demister is on. Ignition keys Unsealed roads (prevention of
. For vehicles equipped with personal dust entry)
The rear demister switches off
automatically. identity keys, pressing K sets
. When following another vehicle
the climate control to the last on unsealed roads and the dust
Off is airborne, select
adjustments used for that key. See
. Press ^ to switch the system “Personal identity keys” under Keys recirculation /.
off/on. on page 2-1. . If the dust is not airborne select
. When the system is off, only the Automatic transmission fresh air and set the fan to high
rear window demister and speed to help prevent dust entry.
If the vehicle is stopped for a long
recirculation mode can be used. time in hot weather with the engine . Ensure in both cases that all
Regular operation running and the air conditioning windows are closed.
operating, move the shift lever . Do not use recirculation for long
Adjusting the temperature to N or P. periods of time.
When the climate control system Hissing
has stabilised, and if passengers
are not comfortable, adjust settings A slight hissing sound when the air
one degree at a time. conditioning switches off is normal.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Sensors It can be affected by radiant heat Air Vents

The automatic climate control uses when the vehicle is stationary.
sensors to maintain temperatures: To prevent false temperature Adjustable Air Vents
. The sunlight sensor is located readings, the displayed
on top of the dashboard. See temperature will not update at
Instrument Panel Overview on low vehicle speeds.
page 5-3. If the vehicle has been switched
It monitors solar radiation when off for less than 4 hours, the
operating in AUTO mode, temperature at start up will be
adjusting temperature, fan speed recalled from previous operation.
and air delivery mode. Switching climate control off
Cooler air may be supplied to If climate control is switched off:
the side of the vehicle facing .
the sun. Background noises may still be
heard.
Recirculation mode will be
activated as necessary.
. Recirculation and the rear
window demister can still be
Do not cover the sensor as the used .
system may not work properly.
Cigarette smoke
. The outside temperature sensor
is located in front of the radiator Do not use recirculation if occupants
and relies on air moving are smoking.
across it.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
The dashboard and console vents Direct the flow of air by tilting and The vents have shut-off doors to
can be adjusted up or down and left swivelling the vanes. adjust the air volume, e.g. air flow at
or right to allow directional air flow. the centre vents can be reduced to
enhance air flow at the rear seat
vents.
Fixed Air Vents

The demister and floor-level outlets
are fixed. They direct air to the
windscreen, side windows and feet.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Maintenance Air Conditioning Regular

Operation
Air Intake Switch air conditioning on for at
Outside air is drawn into the vehicle least 5 to 10 minutes once every
through the opening between the 2 weeks to lubricate the system,
bonnet and the windscreen, unless even in winter.
recirculation has been selected.
Keep the area clear of debris.
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
Pollen/dust filter
A passenger compartment air filter
may be fitted to filter contaminants
such as pollen and dust from
entering the vehicle. This can be
fitted by a Holden Dealer. See the
Service and Warranty Booklet for
the maintenance schedule.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Brakes Side Blind Zone

Antilock Brake Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Operating System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Rear Vision
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . 9-15 Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Lane Departure
Driving Information Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-16 Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Driving Environment . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Ride Control Systems Driver Assistance Systems
Starting and Operating Traction Control Advanced Parking Assist . . . . 9-36
New vehicle running-in . . . . . . . . 9-2 System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Electronic Stability Fuel
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Retained Accessory Competitive Driving Mode Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 (Redline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Cruise Control Towing
Automatic Transmission Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-9 Trailer Sway
Transmission Display . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Object Detection Systems Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Shift Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Conversions and Add-Ons
Manual Transmission Add-On Electrical
Park Assist.
Parking . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ............. .. 9-26
Assist 9-26
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-12
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
9-2 Driving and Operating

. Drivers must always obey locally
Driving Information Starting and posted speed limits.
Operating . Avoid making hard stops for the
Driving Environment first 350 km to avoid premature
Before entering the vehicle New vehicle running-in wear and early replacement of
brakes.
Check that windows, mirrors and Use the following precautions to
lamps are clean. improve performance: . It is recommended that the new
. vehicle be driven for at least
Visually check tyre inflation. Check For the first 1,000 km:
1,500 km before towing. See
tyre pressures weekly. Do not make full throttle starts. “Running-in when towing” under
Before driving off Avoid downshifting to brake or Trailer Towing on page 9-47.
1. Close and secure all doors. slow the vehicle. Brakes
2. Position the seat for comfortable Do not drive at any one constant Do not let the vehicle run down hills,
driving. speed. or coast with the engine off as the
3. Adjust rear view mirrors. Use moderate acceleration in power assistance does not operate.
lower gears. Ensure that nothing is under the
4. Fasten seat belts.
Avoid vehicle speeds above brake pedal which could limit its
5. Check that warning indicators 110 km/h. use, such as poorly fitting
illuminate when turning the floor mats.
ignition on. See Instrument . Between the first 1,000 km and
Cluster on page 5-13. 5,000 km, heavy acceleration in Continuous or heavy use of brakes
lower gears may be used. will shorten the life of the
brake pads.
Vehicle speeds above 110 km/h
should be limited to five minutes
per use.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Power steering Loading the vehicle

Warning (Continued)
The power steering fitted to the Loading the vehicle changes
vehicle has been designed to handling when driving. See Vehicle Ensure any transportation of gas
reduce steering effort. Weight on page 12-6. cylinders complies with the
Do not turn and hold the steering Loose articles applicable regulations.
wheel in the fully turned position
when stationary. Do not leave loose articles or
luggage in the passenger Tyre grip
If power steering is not working, due compartment. Secure in the boot Tyre grip decreases when water,
to the engine stalling for example, (Sedan)/cargo area (Sportwagon). snow, ice, gravel or other materials
the vehicle can still be steered. are on the road. Adjust your driving
Have the steering repaired as soon
as possible by a Holden Dealer.
{ Warning to the road conditions:
. Reduce speeds during wet
Mobile phones and CB radios Portable gas cylinders can leak,
conditions.
creating a risk of fire or explosion.
Use mobile phones and CB As a precaution, ensure adequate . Replace tyres when tread wear
equipment that utilise an antenna ventilation when carrying gas indicators are visible. See Tread
fitted to the outside of the vehicle cylinders. They must be Depth on page 10-42.
whenever possible.
restrained from rolling around and . Regularly check that tyres are
If using mobile phones or CBs with where possible, placed in the properly inflated. See Tyre
an integrated antenna inside the boot (Sedan) or cargo area Pressure on page 10-41.
vehicle, avoid using near the (Sportwagon) of the vehicle. It is
dashboard area, as some functions recommended that if gas
may be affected. cylinders are frequently
transported that a purpose-built
carrying compartment be used.
(Continued)
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Water crossing Ignition Positions

Before crossing water, switch off the
air conditioning. { Warning
Crossing deep water can damage
the engine:
. Avoid crossing water deeper not be any power assist for the
than 175 mm. brakes.
. Limit vehicle speed to a Never remove the key while the
walking pace. vehicle is moving, as this will lock
To dry out the brakes: the steering.
. Ensure there is a clear area LOCK: When the key is in the LOCK
ahead. The vehicle may have an ignition position, some electrical
. Lightly apply the brakes. lock/switch. accessories and the engine are off.
. Maintain a slow forward speed The key can only be inserted and
until performance returns to removed from the LOCK position.
normal. The engine is automatically disabled
shortly after removing the key from
the ignition.
The steering wheel is automatically
locked when the key is removed.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
To release the steering lock, Note: If the vehicle stalls after

re-insert the key and turn it towards 5 seconds, return the key to the
the front of the vehicle. If still LOCK position. Slowly rotate the
locked, turn the steering wheel key to the START position. If the
slightly to the right or left while security warning lamp flashes,
turning the key towards the front of contact a Holden Dealer.
the vehicle.
ACCESSORIES: When the key is in { Warning
the ACCESSORIES position, the
audio system and wipers operate. Do not switch the engine off while
ON: When the key is in the ON not be any power assist for the
position, the engine is ready to start brakes.
and all electrical systems are active. The vehicle may have an electronic
keyless ignition with pushbutton
Warning lamps will illuminate. See start.
Instrument Cluster on page 5-13.
Engine Start/Stop Button
Pressing the button cycles it through
Do not leave the switch in the ON
position for a long time, unless the
{ Warning three modes:
engine is running, otherwise the
. ACC/ACCESSORY
vehicle's battery will discharge. the vehicle is moving as there will . ON/RUN/START
START: Turn the key to the START not be any power assist for the . Stopping the Engine/OFF
position momentarily and then brakes.
release.
The engine starts automatically.
The key returns to the ON position
when released.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
The transmitter must be in the If the vehicle is not in P (Park), Do not turn the engine off when the
vehicle for the system to operate. the ignition will return to ACC/ vehicle is moving. This will cause a
If the pushbutton start is not ACCESSORY and display the loss of power assist in the brake
working, the vehicle may be near a message SHIFT TO PARK in the and steering systems.
strong radio antenna signal causing Driver Information Centre (DIC). If the vehicle must be shut off in an
interference to the keyless access See Transmission Messages on emergency:
system. See Remote Keyless Entry page 5-31 for more information.
(RKE) System Operation on When the vehicle is shifted into 1. Brake using a firm and steady
page 2-5 for more information. P (Park), the ignition system will pressure. Do not pump the
switch to OFF. brakes repeatedly. This may
On automatic transmission vehicles, deplete power assist, requiring
to shift out of P (Park), the vehicle The vehicle has an electric steering increased brake pedal force.
must be in ACC/ACCESSORY or column lock. The lock is activated
ON/RUN and the brake pedal must when the ignition is switched to off 2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).
be applied. and either front door is opened. This can be done while the
A sound may be heard as the lock vehicle is moving. After shifting
Stopping the Engine/OFF (No to N (Neutral), firmly apply the
Indicator Lights): When the actuates or releases. The steering
column lock may not release with brakes and steer the vehicle to a
vehicle is stopped, press the safe location.
ENGINE START/STOP button once the wheels turned off centre. If this
to turn the engine off. happens, the vehicle may not start, 3. Come to a complete stop.
and a DIC message will be
The ignition will turn off, and displayed. Turn the steering wheel 4. Shift to P (Park) and press the
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) to the left or right while attempting to ENGINE START/STOP button
will remain active. See Retained start the vehicle. See Starting the once to turn the engine off.
Accessory Power (RAP) on Vehicle Messages on page 5-31 for 5. Set the parking brake. See
page 9-8 for more information. more information. If this does not Electric Parking Brake on
Note: Automatic transmission work, see your dealer. page 9-15.
vehicles — The vehicle must be in
P (Park) for the ignition to turn off.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
If the vehicle cannot be pulled over, See Starting the Engine on 2. Automatic transmission: Move
and must be shut off while driving, page 9-7 for more information. the shift lever to position P or N.
press and hold the ENGINE START/ The ignition will then remain in The engine will not start if the
STOP button for longer than ON/RUN. shift lever is in any other
two seconds, or press twice in position.
five seconds. Service Only Mode
Manual transmission: Push the
ACC/ACCESSORY (Amber This power mode is available for clutch pedal to the floor, move
Indicator Light): This mode allows service and diagnostics, and to the shift lever to the neutral
you to use some electrical verify the proper operation of the position then start the engine.
accessories when the engine is off. malfunction indicator lamp as may
be required for emission inspection 3. Turn the key to the START
With the ignition off, pressing the purposes. With the vehicle off, and position momentarily and
button once without the brake pedal the brake pedal not applied, release it. The engine starts
applied will place the ignition system pressing and holding the button for automatically. The key
in ACC/ACCESSORY. more than five seconds will place automatically returns to the ON
The ignition will switch from ACC/ the vehicle in Service Only Mode. position.
ACCESSORY to OFF after The instruments and audio systems Keyless start: When the ignition
five minutes to prevent battery will operate as they do in ON/RUN, is off and the brake pedal is
rundown. but the vehicle will not be able to be applied, press the ENGINE
driven. The engine will not start in START/STOP button once and
ON/RUN/START (Green Indicator Service Only Mode. Push the button
Light): This mode is for driving and release when engine cranking
again to turn the vehicle off. begins. Engine cranking will
starting. With the ignition off, and
the brake pedal applied, pressing continue until the engine starts.
the button once will place the
Starting the Engine
ignition system in ON/RUN/START. 1. Apply the park brake. Release it
Once engine cranking begins, only after starting the engine and
release the button. Engine cranking you are ready to drive off.
will continue until the engine starts.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Note: Note: The audio system will be

. Manual transmission: The clutch deactivated only if the driver's door { Warning
must be pushed to the floor is opened.
Be careful where you park or
while turning the key, or the drive. As with any vehicle, do not
vehicle cannot be started. Parking park or operate the vehicle in
. Do not press the accelerator 1. Apply the park brake. areas where combustible
pedal while starting the engine. 2. Automatic transmission: Select materials such as dry grass or
. Do not subject the engine to full position P. leaves can come in contact with a
throttle acceleration or high hot exhaust system.
Manual transmission: If facing
speeds until it has reached uphill or on flat ground, select Exhaust gases are hazardous,
normal operating temperature. 1st gear. If facing downhill, especially if they concentrate in
Premature engine wear or select reverse gear. closed rooms.
damage may result.
3. Shut all windows. Never leave the engine running in
Retained Accessory 4. Turn the ignition off and remove an enclosed space such as a
the key. closed garage or underground
Power (RAP) car park.
The power windows will operate 5. Press the Q button on the key to
when the key is in the ON or lock all doors and to arm the
ACCESSORIES positions. alarm system. See Vehicle
Once the ignition is turned off, the
RAP allows the power windows to Note: The engine fan may keep
continue to operate for up to going for several minutes after the
10 minutes. If a door is opened ignition has been turned off. This is
during this time, they will be normal.
deactivated.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Automatic Shift Lever

{ Caution
Transmission Selecting position P while the
vehicle is still moving can cause
damage to the transmission.
Do not press the accelerator
pedal with the brakes on in any
gear except position P or N. This
will overheat the transmission.
R: Place in reverse gear only when

the vehicle is stationary. The
reverse lamps will illuminate.
The engine will not start unless the N: In neutral the vehicle can be
shift lever is in position P or N. moved without the engine running,
Press the select button on the front
of the shift lever to move into any P: In park position, the wheels are e.g. to be towed or pushed.
position. locked. Apply the park brake before
leaving the vehicle.
Transmission Display
When the shift lever position is
changed, the lever position is
indicated on the bottom of the DIC.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
To shift up a gear, briefly pull the Driving on gradients

{ Warning lever rearwards (+) and release it. When driving on a grade, the
To shift down a gear, briefly push transmission may hold the current
To prevent the vehicle from the lever forwards (–) and release it.
moving when position N is gear. Upshift or downshift to assist
See “Active Select (A/S) mode” later in maintaining vehicle speed and/or
selected, always apply the park in this section.
brake, press the foot brake or use reduce brake wear.
suitable chocks to block the Note: If the road levels out and/or the
wheels. . It is recommended that cruise accelerator is pressed, the
control in normal shift mode be transmission will shift until the
Do not coast the vehicle in
used for towing. appropriate gear is reached.
position N – this decreases your
control and ability to accelerate . A/S mode may also be used A/S mode may be switched to
quickly in an emergency. under light load conditions. override this feature.
. A small increase in engine
D: Used for general driving. The speed may occur during some
transmission automatically selects downshifts.
the appropriate gear according to
the current load and driving { Caution
conditions.
Do not use the accelerator pedal
+/-: For sport shift mode, move the to hold the vehicle stationary on
shift lever to position D then push to
an uphill gradient. Use the
the left.
brakes.
While in sport shift mode, move the
shift lever to the + or – position to
enable A/S mode.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Sport shift mode To activate sport shift mode: Active Select (A/S) mode
1. Move the shift lever to A/S mode allows gears to be
position D. selected manually.
2. Push the shift lever to the left. It can also provide engine-braking
Sport Mode On is displayed on by selecting the appropriate lower
the DIC. gear on a steep downhill grade.
Do not move the shift lever to +
or –, otherwise A/S mode will be
enabled.
3. To return to normal shift mode,
move the shift lever right, to
position D.
Sport shift mode can be selected Sport Mode Off is displayed on
where maximum responsiveness is the DIC.
required. On the bottom of the display, S
When operated in sport shift mode, appears as long as sport shift mode
the transmission will delay upshifts is selected.
and allow earlier downshifts.
Normal shift mode To enable A/S mode:
In addition, the transmission can
Normal shift mode is recommended 1. Move the shift lever to
sense enthusiastic driving, at which
for normal or freeway driving, as it position D.
point it may delay upshifting and
provides optimum fuel economy.
downshift earlier when braking. This 2. Push the lever to the left.
is designed to maximise vehicle When the shift lever is moved to
performance. position D, normal shift mode is
selected.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
3. Shift to the required gear: Continuing to hold the lever in Manual Transmission
To shift up a gear, briefly pull the the – position will select the
lever rearwards (+) and requested gear as soon as the
release it. engine speed decreases to the
allowed speed for that gear.
To shift down a gear, briefly push
the lever forwards (–) and
. If the engine speed becomes too
release it. low for the currently selected
gear, the transmission will
After changing the gear and automatically shift down, even
releasing the shift lever, it returns to though A/S mode is still
the centre position on the left side of selected.
the selector. . While in A/S mode, 2nd or 3rd
On the bottom of the display, M and gear starts (V8) or 2nd gear
the currently selected gear appears starts (V6) can be selected from
as long as A/S mode is selected. a standing start. This is useful
Note: for gentle acceleration on
slippery surfaces.
. The transmission will shift to a
selected gear only if the engine To disable A/S mode and return to
speed is within a suitable range. normal shift mode, push the shift
lever to the right, to position D (on
If not suitable, Shift Denied the bottom of the display, D is
will be displayed and the displayed).
transmission will not shift
gears. To disable A/S mode and return to
Sport shift mode, hold the shift lever
in the + position for more than
1 second (on the bottom of the
display, S is displayed).
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Shift pattern V6 and V8 engines equipped with

. For vehicles fitted with a manual
manual transmissions have six transmission; when on level
forward gears and a reverse gear, roads, in an unladen condition, it
shown on top of the shift lever. is permissible to drive off in 2nd
gear, in the interest of fuel
Manual operating notes economy.
. When shifting from one gear to . Do not drive with your foot
another, push the clutch pedal to resting on the clutch pedal.
the floor. . When stopped on an incline, do
. Do not engage reverse gear not hold the vehicle stationary
while the vehicle is still moving. using the clutch. Use the park
. To select R, move the shift lever brake or foot brake.
sideways against spring . Shift to a lower gear when
pressure to engage climbing steep gradients, before
reverse gear. the engine starts to labour.
Note: On V6 vehicles, moving the . Shift to a lower gear before
lever with momentum will reduce the descending steep gradients.
effort required to select R. . Do not over rev the engine when
. Pause between pressing the shifting to a lower gear.
clutch pedal and moving into
reverse gear.
. V8, when vehicle speed is
14 km/h or less, engine speed is
. Whenever reverse gear is limited to 5,000 RPM.
selected with the ignition on, the
reverse lamps illuminate.
. V6, when in neutral or the clutch
is depressed, engine speed is
limited to 6,000 RPM.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 6/6/13
Brakes Warning (Continued) { Warning

Antilock Brake conditions. Always maintain an When the ignition is turned on,
System (ABS) adequate distance to the vehicle the ! warning light briefly
in front of you. illuminates. The self-check of the
The ABS:
ABS may be audible.
. Continuously monitors the Operation
vehicle's braking system If the ! warning light (ABS off)
preventing the wheels from ABS operation
ABS operation is
is noticeable
noticeable by
by on the instrument panel display
locking up. pulsing of
pulsing of the
the brake
brake pedal
pedal and
and the
the does not extinguish, or illuminates
noise of the regulation
regulation process.
process. when driving, a malfunction has
. Allows maximum braking effort
while full steering control is The initial
Keep self-check
the brake pedalmayfullyalso be
pressed occurred.
retained, even in the event of audible.
throughout the braking process,
Note: The vehicle's brake system
panic braking. without
Keep the pumping it. fully pressed
brake pedal remains operational, but without
throughout
If the vehicle theisbraking process,
travelling above ABS assistance. Have a Holden
{ Warning without
50 km/hpumping
and ABSit.braking occurs, Dealer check the system as soon
the
If thecentrally
vehicle mounted rear
is travelling high level
above as possible.
Do not let this special safety brake
50 km/h lamp
andwill
ABSflash.
braking occurs,
feature tempt you into taking risks the centrally mounted rear high level
when driving. Traffic safety can brake lamp will flash.
only be achieved by adopting a
responsible driving style. You
should always adjust the vehicle's
speed to suit road and traffic
(Continued)
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Electric Parking Brake Applying the Parking Brake decelerate as long as the switch is
held in the up position. Releasing
The EPB can be applied any time
the EPB switch during the
the vehicle is stopped. The EPB is
deceleration will release the parking
applied by momentarily lifting up
brake. If the switch is held in the up
on the EPB switch. Once fully
position until the vehicle comes to a
applied, Y $ illuminates. While the stop, the EPB will remain applied.
brake is being applied, the status
light will flash until full apply is Releasing the Parking Brake
reached. If the light does not come To release the EPB, turn the ignition
on, or remains flashing, you need to switch to the ACC or ON/RUN
have the vehicle serviced. Do not position, apply and hold the brake
drive the vehicle if Y $ is flashing. pedal, and push down momentarily
See your dealer. See Brake System on the EPB switch. If you attempt to
Warning Light on page 5-17 for release the EPB without the brake
The electric parking brake (EPB) more information. pedal applied, a chime will sound,
switch is located between the front and the DIC message STEP ON
seats.
{ Warning BRAKE TO RELEASE PARK
BRAKE will be displayed. The EPB
The EPB takes the place of the
manual parking brake system. The If the EPB fails to apply, the rear is released when the Y$ light is off
EPB can always be activated, even wheels should be blocked to and the DIC message PARK
if the ignition is off. To avoid prevent vehicle movement. BRAKE RELEASED is displayed.
draining the battery, do not operate
the EPB too often without the
If the EPB is applied while the
engine running.
vehicle is in motion, a chime will
In case of insufficient electrical sound, and the DIC message
power, the EPB cannot be applied RELEASE PARK BRAKE SWITCH
or released. will be displayed. The vehicle will
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly

{ Warning stop or slow down the vehicle. The Warning (Continued)
stability system hydraulic brake
$ is on may cause
Driving while Y control module increases brake conditions. Always maintain an
injury to yourself and others. pressure at each corner of the adequate distance to the vehicle
Have the brake system checked vehicle until the ABS activates. in front of you.
immediately if this occurs. Minor brake pedal pulsation or
pedal movement during this time is Hill Start Assist (HSA)
normal and the driver should
Automatic EPB Release continue to apply the brake pedal The HSA system assists in
The EPB will automatically release if as the driving situation dictates. preventing rollback when driving off,
the vehicle is running, placed into The brake assist feature will while on an incline.
gear, and an attempt is made to automatically disengage when the 1. Release the brake pedal.
drive away. Avoid rapid acceleration brake pedal is released or brake
when the EPB is applied, to pedal pressure is quickly 2. Automatic transmission — Press
preserve park brake lining life. decreased. the accelerator pedal.
Manual transmission —
Brake Assist { Warning Simultaneously press the
accelerator pedal and
This vehicle has a brake assist Do not let this special safety progressively release the clutch
feature designed to assist the driver feature tempt you into taking risks pedal.
in stopping or decreasing vehicle
when driving. Traffic safety can
speed in emergency driving The brakes remain on for
only be achieved by adopting a approximately 2 seconds or until the
conditions. This feature uses the
stability system hydraulic brake responsible driving style. The HSA system has detected vehicle
control module to supplement the vehicle's speed should always be drive off.
power brake system under adjusted to suit road and traffic
conditions where the driver has (Continued)
quickly and forcefully applied the
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Ride Control Systems If the vehicle is in cruise control

when TCS begins to limit wheel
spin, the cruise control will
Traction Control automatically disengage. The cruise
System (TCS) control may be re-engaged when
road conditions allow. See Cruise
The vehicle has a TCS that limits
Control on page 9-21.
wheel spin. This is especially useful
in slippery road conditions. The When the g light is on solid, the
system operates only if it senses system will not limit wheel spin.
that the rear wheels are spinning Adjust your driving accordingly.
too much or are beginning to lose
traction. When this happens, the The Traction Control System is
system works the rear brakes and automatically enabled whenever the To turn the system off or on,
reduces engine power by closing vehicle is started. To limit wheel
spin, especially in slippery road press g and release.
the throttle and managing engine
spark to limit wheel spin. conditions, always leave the system The i light illuminates in the
enabled. TCS can be turned off if
instrument cluster to indicate that
The d light will flash when the needed.
TCS has been turned off.
traction control system is limiting It is recommended to leave the
wheel spin. Note: ESC is still enabled when
system on for normal driving
only TCS has been turned off.
The system may be heard or felt conditions, but it may be necessary
while it is working, but this is to turn the system off if the vehicle
normal. is stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow,
and you want to “rock” the vehicle to
attempt to free it.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
{ Caution Caution (Continued) Warning (Continued)

If the wheel(s) of one axle are damage to the transmission. Do vehicle's speed should always be
allowed to spin excessively while not attempt to shift gear when the adjusted to suit road and traffic
the ESC/TCS, ABS and Brake wheels do not have traction. conditions.
warning lights and the SERVICE
ESC and/or SERVICE When you first start the vehicle and
TRACTION CONTROL messages Electronic Stability
begin to drive away, the system
are displayed, the differential Control (ESC) performs several diagnostic checks
could be damaged. The repairs The vehicle has an Electronic to ensure there are no problems.
may not be covered by the Stability Control (ESC) system The system may be heard or felt
vehicle warranty. Reduce engine which combines antilock brake, while it is working. This is normal
power and do not spin the traction and stability control systems and does not mean there is a
wheel(s) excessively while these and helps the driver maintain problem with the vehicle. The
lights and this message are directional control of the vehicle in system should initialise before the
displayed. most driving conditions. vehicle reaches 40 km/h.
If the system fails to turn on or
{ Warning activate, the d light illuminates in
{ Caution Do not let this special safety the instrument cluster and the
appropriate message will be
When traction control is turned feature tempt you into taking risks
displayed.
off, it is possible to lose traction. when driving. Traffic safety can
only be achieved by adopting a See Ride Control System Messages
If you attempt to shift gear with on page 5-30.
the wheels spinning with a loss of responsible driving style. The
traction, it is possible to cause (Continued)
(Continued)
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
This d will flash on the instrument If the vehicle is in cruise control When the ESC system is turned off,
cluster when the ESC system is when the system begins to assist the i light and the g warning light
both on and activated. the driver maintain directional will both be on to warn the driver
control of the vehicle, the d light will that both traction control and ESC
The system may be heard or felt
while it is working; this is normal. flash and the cruise control will are disabled.
automatically disengage. The cruise It is recommended to leave the
When the g light is on solid, the control system may be re-engaged system on for normal driving
system will not assist the driver in when road conditions allow. See conditions, but it may be necessary
maintaining directional control of the Cruise Control on page 9-21. to turn the system off if the vehicle
vehicle. Adjust your driving is stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow,
accordingly. and you want to “rock” the vehicle to
The Electronic Stability Control attempt to free it. It may also be
(ESC) system is automatically necessary to turn off the system
enabled whenever the vehicle is when driving in extreme off-road
started. To assist the driver with conditions where high wheel spin is
vehicle directional control, required.
especially in slippery road Note: On Sportwagon vehicles with
conditions, the system should LPG, when the temporary spare
always be left on. But, ESC can be wheel is fitted, if the vehicle speed
turned off if needed. exceeds 40 km/h, ESC will switch
back on and remain on until vehicle
speed is below 40 km/h and g is
To disable both traction control and
pressed again.
ESC, press and hold the button for
5 seconds.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
ESC may also turn off automatically Competitive Driving Mode and Competitive Driving Mode controls
if it determines that a problem exists Launch Control modify the engine power while the ESC system
with the system. The appropriate performance of certain safety helps maintain directional control of
messages and the d light will be on features and should only be used, the vehicle by selective brake
solid to warn the driver that ESC is with caution, in closed conditions. application. In this mode, TCS is
disabled and requires service. If the Drivers who prefer to allow the optimised and Launch Control is
problem does not clear after system to have more control of the available. Adjust your driving style
restarting the vehicle, see your engine and brake systems are to account for the available engine
dealer for service. See Ride Control advised to turn the normal TCS and power. See “Launch Control” later in
System Messages on page 5-30. ESC systems on. this section.
The g light is on when the vehicle is
Competitive Driving Mode { Caution in the Competitive Driving Mode.
(Redline) Do not attempt to shift gear when This optional handling mode can be
the drive wheels are spinning selected by pressing the g button
{ Warning and do not have traction. This quickly two times. The appropriate
may cause damage to the message displays in the Driver
Competitive Driving Mode and transmission. Damage caused by Information Centre (DIC). See Ride
Launch Control are systems racing or misuse of the vehicle Control System Messages on
designed for a closed course race may not be covered by the New page 5-30 for more information.
track and not intended for use on Vehicle Voluntary Warranty.
public roads. The systems are not When the g button is pressed
intended to compensate for lack Note: Racing or misuse will again, the TCS and ESC systems
of driver experience or familiarity contribute to the premature wear are on. The appropriate message
with the race track. of brakes, tyres and driveline displays briefly in the DIC.
components.
The ESC system is also
automatically enabled whenever
the vehicle is started.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Launch Control (Redline with The Launch Control feature will Cruise Control
manual transmissions only) initially limit engine speed as
the driver rapidly applies the
Launch Control is a form of traction accelerator pedal to wide open
control that manages wheel spin throttle. A smooth, quick release of
while launching the vehicle. the clutch, while maintaining the
Launch Control is only available fully pressed accelerator pedal, will
when the following criteria are met: manage wheel slip.
. Competitive Driving Mode is After the vehicle is launched, the
selected. system continues in Competitive
Driving Mode.
. The vehicle is not moving.
. The steering wheel is pointing
straight ahead.
. The clutch is pressed and the The cruise control:
vehicle is in first gear.
. Maintains the vehicle's speed
. The accelerator pedal is rapidly without pressing the accelerator
applied to wide open throttle. pedal.
. Will only operate at speeds
above 40 km/h.
. Switches are located on the
steering wheel.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
3. When travelling at the desired

{ Warning Warning (Continued) speed, rotate the wheel down
to SET/-.
Do not use the cruise control When climbing steep hills
when road or driving conditions (particularly when towing), the The current speed is stored and
require varying speeds. vehicle may lose speed. In this maintained.
A constant speed is not practical case, use the accelerator pedal. I illuminates green.
in heavy or varying traffic or on Release the accelerator pedal
winding, slippery or rough roads. when the speed returns to the set 4. Release the accelerator pedal.
speed. Vehicle speed can be increased
Remember that when I by pressing the accelerator
illuminates green, the cruise The cruise control is cancelled
if Traction Control (TC) or pedal. When the accelerator
control is maintaining the pedal is released, the previously
vehicle's speed. Taking your foot Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
stored speed is resumed. The
off the accelerator pedal does not becomes active, indicated
gears can be changed while
reduce the speed. To deactivate by d flashing on the instrument cruise control is activated.
the cruise control, press the brake panel display.
pedal, press the clutch pedal Adjusting the set speed
(manual transmission) or push *. Setting a speed To reduce the set speed, rotate the
wheel down to SET/- or briefly
The cruise control does not apply 1. Turn the ignition on. rotate SET/- repeatedly.Speed
the vehicle's brakes. The vehicle decreases continuously or in small
may gain speed when going down 2. Press I. increments.
steep hills. I illuminates white. To increase the set speed, rotate
(Continued) the wheel up to RES/+ or briefly
rotate RES/+ repeatedly.Speed
increases continuously or in small
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
increments.Alternatively, accelerate
. The shift lever is placed in N.
to the desired speed and store by
Object Detection
. Traction Control (TC) or
rotating to RES/+. Electronic Stability Control Systems
Deactivation (ESC) is operating.
Resuming a stored speed
Forward Collision Alert
Press *. (FCA) System
Rotate the wheel up to RES/+ at a
I illuminates white. speed above 40 km/h. The vehicle may have Forward
Cruise control is deactivated. Collision Alert (FCA).
The stored speed is resumed.
The stored speed is maintained. The FCA system may help to avoid
Turning cruise control off or reduce the harm caused by
Cruise control automatically
Press I. front-end crashes. FCA provides a
deactivates when:
flashing visual alert and beeps when
. Vehicle speed is below I extinguishes. approaching a vehicle directly
approximately 30 km/h. The stored speed is deleted. ahead too quickly. FCA also
. The brake pedal is pressed. provides a visual alert if following
Alternatively, turn the ignition off. another vehicle much too closely.
. The clutch pedal is pressed for The V indicator and the FCA alert
more than a few seconds.
are displayed in the Head-Up
Display (HUD).
The forward-looking FCA camera
sensor is on the windscreen ahead
of the rear view mirror. FCA detects
vehicles within a distance of
approximately 60 m and operates at
speeds above 40 km/h.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Detecting the Vehicle Ahead

{ Warning { Warning
FCA is a warning system and FCA does not provide a warning
does not apply the brakes. When to help avoid a crash, unless it
approaching a slower-moving or detects a vehicle. FCA may not
stopped vehicle ahead too rapidly, detect a vehicle ahead if the FCA
or when following a vehicle too sensor is blocked by dirt, snow,
closely, FCA may not provide a or ice, or if the windscreen is
warning with enough time to help The green vehicle ahead indicator damaged. It may also not detect a
will appear when a vehicle is
avoid a crash. FCA does not warn vehicle on winding or hilly roads,
detected ahead. Whenever this
of pedestrians, animals, signs, or in conditions that can limit
indicator does not appear, FCA will
guardrails, bridges, construction not respond. The indicator may visibility such as fog, rain,
barrels, or other objects. Always disappear on curves, highway exit or snow, or if the headlamps or
be ready to take action while ramps, hills, or due to poor visibility. windscreen are not cleaned or in
driving and apply the brakes. The FCA system will not detect proper condition. Keep the
another vehicle ahead until it is windscreen, headlamps, and FCA
completely in the driving lane. sensors clean and in good repair.
Tailgating Alert
The V indicator changes to amber
when following another vehicle too
closely.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Collision Alert Selecting the Gap Setting The faster the vehicle speed, the
further away the alert will occur.
Consider traffic and weather
conditions when selecting the alert
timing. The range of selectable alert
timing may not be appropriate for all
drivers and driving conditions.
Unnecessary Alerts
When your vehicle approaches
another vehicle too rapidly, the red FCA may sometimes set
FCA display will flash and sound unnecessary alerts to turning
eight beeps. When this occurs, the vehicles, vehicles in other lanes,
brake system prepares for driver objects that are not vehicles,
braking to occur more rapidly. or shadows. These alerts are
Continue to apply the brake pedal normal operation and the vehicle
The Collision Alert control is on the does not need service.
as the driving situation dictates.
steering wheel. Press [ to set the
gap setting to far, medium, near or Other Messages
off. The first button press shows the There are messages that may
current control setting on the HUD. appear on the Driver Information
Additional button presses will Centre (DIC) in the instrument
change this setting. The chosen cluster to provide information about
setting will remain until it is changed FCA. See Object Detection System
and will affect both the Collision Messages on page 5-30.
Alert and the Tailgating Alert
features. The timing of both alerts
will vary based on vehicle speed.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Cleaning the System

Warning (Continued)
If the FCA system does not seem to
operate properly, clean the outside is only an aid and is neither
of the windscreen area in front of intended to, nor able to take over
the camera sensor before any responsibility.
considering taking the vehicle in for
service. The park sensors may not be
able to detect all objects under
Park Assist
Parking Assist every condition e.g. objects too
close to the vehicle, objects
above or below the sensors,
or objects with a surface that
The PA system is able to detect absorbs ultrasonic waves.
obstacles in the front and the rear of Additionally, some ambient
the vehicle when moving forward conditions like ultrasonic waves
and reversing. or heavy rain can cause
The PA consists of sensors on the disruptive reflections from an
front and rear bumpers, a control object's surface. Such objects
unit and speakers in the front and may not be detected.
rear of the vehicle's interior. Always manoeuvre the vehicle
slowly to allow yourself sufficient
{ Warning time to react. The warning tones
will sound only while the vehicle's
The driver is always responsible speed is below 15 km/h.
for taking care and attention while
manoeuvring the vehicle. The PA
(Continued)
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
When an object is detected:

{ Caution . A warning tone sounds.
Sensors are not working when: . As the distance decreases, the
. A confirmation tone does not repetition rate of the tone
sound. increases.
. Park Assist Fault appears . At a distance of about 30 cm,
on the DIC. the warning tone sounds
continuously.
Check and clean the sensors.
. If the distance remains constant,
If the problem persists, contact after about 5 seconds, the tone
your dealer. will stop. . When reverse is selected the
. If the distance to the object animation is displayed on the
Note: increases, the tone will stop. infotainment screen if the Rear
. The range of the rear sensors is . When reverse gear is selected Vision Camera (RVC) is
approximately 240 cm. and the rear and front sensors de-activated, see Rear Vision
both detect objects, only the Camera (RVC) on page 9-31.
. The range of the front sensors is
approximately 150 cm. closest object will be indicated. . The default display Park Assist
. If two objects at the same or Rear View Camera may be
distance are detected, the object selected in the Park Assist mode
at the rear of the vehicle will be menu. See Default Display
given priority. Selection under Rear Vision
Camera (RVC) on page 9-31.
• IfIf the
. the sensors
sensors are
are activated,
activated, an
an animation
animation willwill display
display thethe
detection range
range.if the RVC is
de-activated.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
•. IfIf an
an object
object enters
enters the
therange,
range, the Operation
When a forward gear is selected Manual adjustment
sector
the will will
sector illuminate
illuminate green. green. afterPA reverse, the front and rear
When the distance decreases, The is activated automatically
When the distance decreases, sensors
when thewill remainoccur:
following operational until
additional sectors
additional sectors will will illuminate
illuminate the vehicle's speed exceeds
and the colour will change to •15 km/h.
The ignition is turned on.
and the colour will change to
yellow, orange and finally red.
yellow, orange and finally red.
• Reverse gear is selected.
•Ifthea The
forward gear is selected, only
park brake is released.
• Front
Whensensor
drive isdetection
selected,occurs the
.
front sensors are activated and
animation
when PA isisturned
shownononly when
by pressing When
the tone a forward gearfrom
will sound is selected
the frontafter
Xthe sensors detect an object and
or by selecting reverse reverse,
speaker.the front and rear sensors
the vehicle's speed is below
gear first. The light in the button will remain operational until the
15 km/h. Note: The PA:
illuminates. vehicle's speed exceeds 15 km/h.
. Automatically deactivates when
. If a short
• When drivetone is heard when
is selected, the If a forward gear is selected, only
the vehicle's speed exceeds
there are no objects visible,
animation is shown only when the front sensors are activated and
15 km/h.
it may be due to ground
the sensors detect an object and the tone will sound from the front
reflections, children or animals. speaker.
. Is reactivated if changing from a When the vehicle's speed is below
the vehicle's speed is below
Be aware. 15 km/h:
forward to reverse gear or vice
15 km/h. Note: The PA:
versa, or if the ignition is turned
• IfKeep bumper sensors free from • Automatically
.
a short tone is heard when off then on again.deactivates when . To deactivate the PA, press X
dirt, scratches, grime, ice, frost the vehicle's speed exceeds once. The light in the button will
there are no
and snow objects
with a softvisible,
cloth. it . When
15 km/h.manually deactivated, will turn off.
may be due to ground reflections,
not automatically activate until
children or animals. Be aware.
Operation • Is reactivated if changing from a
the PA has been manually . To reactivate the PA, press X
•TheKeep
PA isbumper
activated sensors free from
automatically forward to reverse gear or vice
reactivated. once. The light in the button will
dirt,the
when scratches,
followinggrime,occur:ice, frost versa, or if the ignition is turned illuminate and the front sensors
and off then on again.
The snow withis aturned
soft cloth. will activate.
ignition on. • When manually deactivated,
.
Alternatively, select
. 5HYHUVHgHDULVVHOHFWHG will not automatically activate
reverse gear.
. The park brake is released. until the PA has been manually
reactivated.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
If the PA is activated and the light in Adjustment for a tow bar Note:
the X button: When a tow bar is fitted, the rear . This adjustment is for Holden
. Does not illuminate, check that park sensors require adjustment to approved tow bars fitted by a
the ignition is turned on, the allow for the tow ball tongue: Holden Dealer.
vehicle is in gear and the park 1. Turn the ignition on. . If a different tow bar is fitted, the
brake is not activated. system may detect it as an
2. Press VOL } to turn the attached object and will be
. Flashes when the button is infotainment system on.
pressed. deactivated.
3. Press HOME then touch the
Contact a Holden Dealer. Config screen button. Side Blind Zone
Objects attached to the vehicle 4. Select the Vehicle Alert (SBZA)
When any device is attached to the Settings menu. The vehicle may have Side Blind
rear of the vehicle, such as a trailer 5. Select the Collision Detection Zone Alert (SBZA).
or a bicycle rack, the PA will: Settings menu. The SBZA system is a
. Detect this as an attached 6. Select Park Assist. lane-changing aid that assists
object. drivers with avoiding crashes that
7. Select On with Tow Bar
. Deactivate automatically about occur with vehicles in the side blind
Attached.
10 seconds after the vehicle's zone (or spot) areas.
forward speed exceeds 15 km/h. The option selected is indicated
by f.
. Be reactivated automatically
when the object is removed, the
ignition is turned off then on
again and the vehicle's forward
speed exceeds 15 km/h.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
SBZA Detection Zones

{ Danger The SBZA sensor covers a zone of
SBZA does not detect vehicles approximately one lane over from
rapidly approaching outside of the both sides of the vehicle, or 3.5 m.
side blind zones, pedestrians, This zone starts at each side mirror
cyclists or animals. Failure to use and goes back approximately 5 m.
The height of the zone is Left Side Mirror Right Side Mirror
proper care when changing lanes Display Display
may result in injury, death or approximately between 0.5 m and
2 m off the ground.
vehicle damage. Before making a When the vehicle is started, both
lane change, always check Use caution while changing lanes outside mirror SBZA displays will
mirrors, glance over your when towing a trailer, as the SBZA briefly come on to indicate the
shoulder and use the turn signals. detection zones that extend back system is operating. When the
from the side of the vehicle do not vehicle is moving forward, the
move further back when a trailer is left- or right-side mirror display will
towed. light up if a vehicle is detected in
How the System Works that blind zone. If the turn signal is
activated and a vehicle is also
The SBZA symbol lights up in the detected on the same side, the
side mirrors when the system display will flash as an extra
detects a vehicle in the side blind warning not to change lanes.
zone, indicating it may be unsafe to
SBZA displays may come on when
change lanes. Before making a lane
a passed vehicle remains in or
change, check the SBZA display,
drops back into the detection zone.
check mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and use the turn signals.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
SBZA can be disabled through SBZA may not operate when the Rear Vision
vehicle personalisation. See SBZA sensors in the left or right
“Collision Detection Systems” corners of the rear bumper are
Camera (RVC)
under Vehicle Personalisation on covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice,
page 5-32. If SBZA is disabled by or slush, or in heavy rainstorms. For { Warning
the driver, the SBZA mirror displays cleaning instructions, see “Washing
will not light up. the Vehicle” under Exterior Care on Never rely solely on the reverse
page 10-74. If the DIC still displays camera when reversing the
When the System Does Not the SIDE DETECTION SYSTEM vehicle.
Seem to Work Properly UNAVAILABLE message after There is a blind spot that cannot
SBZA may not always alert the cleaning the rear bumper corners, be sensed by the rear view
driver to vehicles in the blind zone, see your dealer. This message may camera.
especially in wet conditions. The also be displayed when driving near
system does not need to be sites where the SBZA system could The reverse camera is not
serviced. The system may light up cause interference. intended to replace the driver's
due to guardrails, signs, trees, judgement or attention toward the
If the SBZA displays do not light up
shrubs, and other non-moving when vehicles are in the blind zone rear of the vehicle when
objects. This is normal system and the system is clean, the system reversing.
operation; the vehicle does not need may need service. Take the vehicle Before entering the vehicle
service. to your dealer. always check that the area
When SBZA is disabled for any around the vehicle is clear of
reason other than the driver turning obstacles and people.
it off, the Side Blind Zone Alert On Always perform head checks and
option will not be available on the use the vehicle's mirrors when
personalisation menu. reversing.
(Continued)
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Note:
Warning (Continued) . The distance of the objects seen
If the vehicle sustains any on the screen differs from the
damage in the area of the reverse actual distance.
camera (rear number plate . The area displayed depends on
surround), the camera may the road condition and vehicle
become misaligned. Contact a orientation.
Holden Dealer.
Cleaning
Always keep the camera lens free
from dirt, snow or ice. Only use
mild soap and water with a soft
cloth to clean the lens. Sportwagon shown
. The camera is located at the top
A view of the area behind the of the rear number plate
vehicle is displayed on the surround.
infotainment screen, when reverse . The lens requires regular
gear is selected.
cleaning to ensure optimum
The RVC cannot display objects: performance.
. Close to the corners of the . Use only a soft cloth, mild soap
vehicle. and water.
. Forward of the camera. Sedan shown
. Higher than the camera.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
8. Touch Back to exit. 3. Press Home then touch the

{ Warning 9. Select reverse gear. Config screen button.
Do not use abrasive cleaners or 4. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to
scouring pads as they could highlight Display Settings.
scratch the lens, impairing the 5. Press the centre of the TUNE/
systems performance. MENU knob to select the
Display Settings menu.
Operation 6. Select Park Assist Mode.
1. Turn the ignition on. 7. Select Show Rear View Camera
or Show Park Assist.
2. Press VOL } to turn the
infotainment system on. The option selected is indicated
by f.
3. Press Home then touch the
Config screen button. 8. Touch Back to exit.
10. The camera display appears
4. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to Note:
on the infotainment screen.
highlight Display Settings. . Objects of different heights will
5. Press the centre of the TUNE/ Default Display Selection appear to be different distances
MENU knob to select the The default display Park Assist or from the vehicle.
Display Settings menu. Rear View Camera may be . The RVC display will override all
6. Select Rear Camera Options. selected: other operating displays.
7. Select Camera and/or Symbols. 1. Turn the ignition on. . The RVC display may be
The option selected is indicated 2. Press VOL } to turn the temporarily interrupted when
infotainment system on. some audio system or climate
by f. control settings are changed.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13

. The PA animation on the Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
infotainment screen will not be
On vehicles equipped with the Rear
{ Danger
seen when the reverse camera
is
is enabled.
enabled. See
See Park Assist
Parking Assist Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA), a red The LDW system is an aid to help
on page 9-26. warning triangle with an arrow may the vehicle stay in the driving
also display on the infotainment lane. It does not steer the vehicle.
. The PA warning tones will still be display to warn of traffic coming
heard when the reverse camera The LDW system may not:
from either direction. This system
is enabled.
is enabled. See
See Park Assist
Parking Assist detects objects coming from up to
. Provide enough time to avoid
on page 9-26. 25 m from the left or right side of the a crash.
The reverse camera system may be vehicle. When an object is detected, . Detect lane markings under
affected by the following: two beeps sound from the left or bad weather conditions or if
right, depending on the direction of the windscreen is dirty.
. If sun or headlamp beams are the detected vehicle.
shining directly into the . Detect lane markings and will
camera lens. not detect road edges.
Lane Departure
. If the vehicle sustains any Warning (LDW)
. Warn that the vehicle is
damage in the area of the crossing a lane marking if the
camera lens. Contact a Holden The vehicle may have Lane system does not detect the
Dealer. Departure Warning (LDW). lane marking.
. If dirt, snow or ice has built up, Read the entire section before using If LDW only detects lane
clean the lens. See “Cleaning” this feature. markings on one side of the road,
previously in this section. it will only warn you when
departing the lane on the side
where it has detected a lane
marker. Even with LDW, always
keep your attention on the road
(Continued)
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
LDW operates at speeds of 56 km

Danger (Continued) or greater. If LDW is on, the @
and maintain proper vehicle indicator will appear green if the
position within the lane, or system detects a left or right lane
vehicle damage, injury, or death marking. This indicator will change
to amber, flash, and three chimes
could occur. Always keep the
will sound if the vehicle crosses a
windscreen clean and do not use
detected lane marking without using
LDW in bad weather conditions. the turn signal.
To change the volume of the
When the vehicle crosses a warning chime, see “Chime Volume”
detected lane marking, the LDW under Vehicle Personalisation on
indicator will flash and three beeps To turn LDW on and off, press page 5-32 for more information.
will sound. LDW will not warn if the
the @ button on the steering wheel.
turn signal is on or if a sharp When the System Does Not
The control indicator will light when
manoeuvre is made (steering, Seem To Work Properly
LDW is on.
accelerator or brake inputs).
If @ does not appear:
How the System Works . The lane markings on the road
The LDW camera sensor is on the may not be seen.
windscreen ahead of the rear view
mirror.
. The camera sensor may be
blocked by dirt, snow or ice.
. The windscreen may be
When the vehicle is started, the @ damaged.
indicator on the instrument panel . The weather may be limiting
will come on briefly. visibility.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
This is normal operation; the vehicle LDW warnings may occasionally Driver Assistance
does not need service. Clean the occur due to tar marks, shadows,
windscreen. cracks in the road, or other road Systems
imperfections. This is normal system
{ Warning operation, the vehicle does not need Advanced Parking Assist
Advanced Parking Assist
service.
LDW does not provide a warning Advanced
Advanced Parking
Parking
to help avoid a crash, unless it
LDW Messages Assist
Assist (APA)
(APA)
detects the lane markings. LDW FRONT CAMERA BLOCKED, The
The vehicle
vehicle maymay have
have APA.APA.
may not detect the lane markings CLEAN WINDSCREEN: This
message may appear because the When
When APA is active, thesystem
APA is active, the system
if the camera sensor is blocked detects
front camera is blocked and cannot detects available
available parallel
parallel or or
by dirt, snow, or ice, or if the perpendicular
operate properly. It may also perpendicular (90°)(90°) parking
parking spaces.
spaces.
windscreen is damaged. It may
activate during heavy rain or due to The
The APA system uses the frontand
APA system uses the front and
also not detect a lane on winding
or hilly roads, or in conditions that
road spray. rear
rear parking
parking sensors,
sensors, as as well
well as
as two
two
can limit visibility such as fog, LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEM front
front side
side sensors
sensors during
during operation.
operation.
rain, or snow, or if the headlamps UNAVAILABLE: This message The
The system
system guides
guides thethe vehicle
vehicle into
or windscreen are not cleaned or may appear if LDW does not into
a final parked position by by
a final parked position
in proper condition. Keep the activate due to a temporary automatically
automatically controlling
controlling the the
windscreen, headlamps, and condition. steering.
steering. The
The driver
driver remains
remains in in
camera sensors clean and in SERVICE FRONT CAMERA: This control
control ofof the
the accelerator,
accelerator, brakes,
brakes,
good repair. message may appear to indicate transmission
transmission and and clutch
clutch (manual
(manual
that LDW is not working properly. transmission)
transmission) at at all
all times.
times. Directions
Directions
If this message remains on after are provided by by messages
messages displayed
continued driving, the system needs on the DIC.onThese
displayed the DIC.directions
These will
service. Take the vehicle to your include
directionsthewill
gear required,
include the
the gear
dealer. direction of vehicle movement and
steering control indication.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Suitable parking space Press and hold for 2 seconds to The APA searches for a suitable
dimensions are: initiate a perpendicular parking parking space on the left side of
• Parallel space length — vehicle space search. the vehicle.
length plus 1.1 m up to 12.0 m Note: To search for a parking space
on the right side of the vehicle, push
• Perpendicular space length —
the turn and lane-change signal
vehicle width plus 1.0 m up to 4.8 m
lever down.
When a suitable parking space
is found, a message is displayed
on the DIC to stop the vehicle. A
chime will sound.
It is possible to continue moving
forward to search for subsequent
parking spaces.
3. Bring the vehicle to a complete
Searching parking space is standstill.
displayed on the DIC.
4. Select R (reverse).
Note: Pressing O or X will 5. Reverse into the parking space at
1. With the vehicle in D (Drive) or a deactivate the APA system. less than 8 km/h, using only the
forward gear, press O to initiate 2. Drive forwards at less than brake and accelerator pedals to
APA for a parallel parking space 30 km/h, at a distance from the control the vehicle. If the vehicle
search. parked vehicles of: exceeds 8 km/h, the APA will
Note: The APA system is constantly Parallel search — 0.5 m to 1.5 m cancel.
scanning while the vehicle is moving Perpendicular search — 0.7 m The APA will automatically control
forward. APA can be initiated even if the steering and display messages
to 1.5 m is recommended for
the space has just been passed. on the DIC with the required gear
optimum detection
changes.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
6. When the parking manoeuvre is

. The APA system will only
complete, a message displays Warning (Continued) park the vehicle in a space
on the DIC and a chime will between two objects.
sound. close to the vehicle, objects . Drive parallel and straight for
above or below the sensors,
Confirm that the front and rear best results.
or objects with a surface that
clearance distances are absorbs ultrasonic waves. . Allow the APA to autosteer
acceptable and adjust if Additionally, some ambient with the vehicle at a standstill
required. conditions like rain, hail or snow for best results.
can cause disruptive reflections . When perpendicular parking,
{ Warning from an object's surface. Such the APA system may stop
objects may not be detected. short and require manual
The driver is always responsible
Always manoeuvre the vehicle position adjustment due to
for taking care and attention while
objects detected within the
manoeuvring the vehicle. The slowly to allow yourself sufficient
parking space.
APA is only an aid and is neither time to react. The warning tones
intended to, nor able to take over will sound only while the vehicle's . The APA system may steer
any responsibility. speed is below 8 km/h. across or into kerbs in some
situations. This may be due
The driver should intervene and to kerbs at a reclined angle
take control of the steering and Note: or leaves in the gutter which
cancel the APA if there are any . If the steering wheel is held prevent the APA system from
concerns about the risk of firmly while the APA system receiving a good ultrasonic
collision. is operating, the APA will signal. As always, the driver
cancel. is responsible in these
The park sensors may not be
situations and should
able to detect all objects under . If the vehicle speed exceeds intervene to prevent damage
every condition e.g. objects too 8 km/h, the APA system will to the vehicle.
(Continued) cancel.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13

. If Genuine Holden Accessory
wheels are fitted, the APA Fuel Danger (Continued)
system calibration may
require reprogramming by { Danger To protect against exhaust gases
your dealer. entering the vehicle, the exhaust
EXHAUST WARNING – system and body should be
. Ensure tyre pressures are
CARBON MONOXIDE inspected:
correct to ensure APA
POISONING
system functionality. . Each time the vehicle is
. If a Genuine Holden Exhaust gases can contain serviced.
Accessory roo bar is fitted, carbon monoxide, a dangerous . Whenever a change is
the APA system will be gas, which can cause noticed in the sound of the
required to be deactivated by unconsciousness and even death exhaust system.
your dealer. to both humans and animals.
. Whenever the exhaust
. The APA system may not Gases could be inhaled if the system, underbody or rear of
function if objects are exhaust system on your vehicle is the vehicle is damaged.
attached to the front or rear faulty.
Take the vehicle to a Holden
bumper fascias. (Continued) Dealer if you think the vehicle
needs inspecting for any of the
above reasons.
(Continued)
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Danger (Continued) { Danger { Warning

Do not sit (or leave children or FUEL LPG
pets) in a parked vehicle for any Fuel is extremely flammable and LPG is heavier than air and if not
extended period of time with the highly explosive. dispersed tends to collect in
engine running. Do not run the low-lying areas.
engine in an enclosed area (such Always switch off the engine of
as the garage) any longer than is the vehicle and any mobile Accident or fire
needed to move the vehicle. phones when refuelling. Call the emergency fire services
Driving with the boot (Sedan) or Do not smoke or allow open to the scene and keep people
tailgate (Sportwagon) open is not flames or sparks near the vehicle away from the vehicle.
recommended. If you must travel when refuelling. While filling
with the boot (Sedan) or tailgate If fuel fumes are smelt while
(Sportwagon) open, close all Ensure that there is no gas
driving, the cause should be leakage. If a leak is detected
windows, ensure that the heater found and corrected without delay
controls are set to outside (rather while filling the vehicle, stop filling
by a Holden Dealer. the vehicle and notify the filling
than recirculate) with air directed
to the face and the fan on the station operator of a potential
highest speed. problem with the pump. If the
odour still persists when
disconnected, carry out the
emergency procedure steps. See
“LPG emergency procedures”
later in this section.
(Continued)
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Warning (Continued) { Caution { Warning

Take the vehicle to nearest FUEL ADDITIVES – Petrol USE OF FUEL CONTAINING
Holden Dealer for advice. Various additives are used in the ETHANOL – Petrol
Note: If frost is present do not formulation of good quality fuel When filling the fuel tank with an
touch the area until the frost has and the use of supplementary ethanol-petrol fuel blend, under
dissipated. additives in fuel is not required no circumstances should fuel
unless specified by Holden. containing more than 85%
Suspected gas leak Under no circumstances should ethanol be used.
Carry out the emergency fuel containing the manganese Use of such fuels may result in
procedure steps. See “LPG additive known as MMT (methyl engine malfunction, starting and
emergency procedures” later in cyclopentadienyl manganese operating difficulties and materials
this section. Once the steps have tricarbonyl) be used, as this degradation. These adverse
been followed and the odour is no additive is known to cause effects could result in permanent
longer present, take the vehicle to contamination of catalytic damage to the vehicle and
the nearest Holden Dealer for converters, spark plugs personal injury.
advice. and the malfunction of
On-Board-Diagnostic (OBD) The use of fuel containing more
systems. The use of fuel additives than 85% ethanol may also affect
that are not recommended by your New Vehicle Voluntary
Holden may affect your New Warranty to the extent that
Vehicle Voluntary Warranty to the Holden considers that the fuel
extent that Holden considers affects the specifications and
that the additives affect the quality of your vehicle.
specifications and quality of the (Continued)
vehicle.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued)

It is also important to note that The use of any fuel, other than
when ethanol blends are used, the fuel specified, may seriously
fuel consumption can be damage the vehicle and may void
expected to increase due to the the warranty. See Recommended
lower energy content of ethanol. Fuel on page 9-43. Only clean
The vehicle may be refuelled with fuel of good quality should
E10, E85 and unleaded fuel be used.
containing no ethanol. It is
acceptable to mix these fuels in LPG emergency procedures
any combination. 4. Remove the service valve
Manual service valve access cover by rotating
In cold ambient temperatures you anticlockwise.
LPG has an odour that enables any
may experience an increase in
leaks in the vehicle's LPG system to
the time it takes for the engine to
be detected.
start. If you are experiencing cold
start issues with only E85 in the If this odour is detected in or around
fuel tank, it is advised to fill the the vehicle or in the event of an
fuel tank with a mixture of accident, fire or other abnormal
E85 and unleaded petrol. circumstance:
(Continued) 1. Turn the ignition off.
2. Open the boot.
3. Lift the carpet.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Note: When the service valves are For more information on E85
closed, the LPG tank is isolated and availability, visit:
from the rest of the LPG system and www.holden.com.au
the vehicle cannot be started.
LPG
3. Contact your dealer.
LPG should meet the LPG Australia
Specification for Liquefied
Recommended Fuel Petroleum Gas for Automotive use
Unleaded petrol 2004. LPG blends may vary from
time to time and may affect vehicle
Use unleaded petrol of regular performance and range.
91 Research Octane Number (RON)
rating or higher. LPG fuel system
5. Rotate the outlet service
valve (2) on the LPG tank Use of Premium unleaded petrol Introduction
clockwise to close. (95 RON or higher) may provide a
small improvement in performance The Holden LPG Fuel system has
Your vehicle may have an inlet and fuel economy. been designed to comply with the
service valve. relevant Australian Standard.
E85/ethanol
1. Rotate the inlet service valve (1) It is recommended that you advise
on the LPG tank clockwise to E85 should meet the requirements your insurance company that your
close. of the Fuel Quality Standards Act new vehicle operates on LPG as
2000, Fuel Standard (Ethanol E85) failure to do so may invalidate your
2. Replace the service valve Determination 2012. Filling the fuel insurance policy.
access cover.
tank with fuel mixtures that do not
Your vehicle is required to display
meet these requirements can affect
the LPG decal on both the front and
driveability and could cause * to rear number plates.
illuminate.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13

. When the vehicle is switched off,
When turning the ignition on, the
shortly after starting in cold
Filling the Tank
opening of the solenoid valves at
the front and rear of the vehicle may temperatures, a small quantity of Fuel filler flap
be heard. This is normal. LPG may be released from the
vaporiser, located behind the
LPG warm up mode right front wheel. An odour may
When starting the vehicle from cold, be detected. This is normal and
LPG warm up mode may activate. does not indicate a leak, if it
During warm up mode, reduced does not persist.
engine power may be noticeable. Suspected gas leak
A message will display on the
instrument panel. See “LPG cold Carry out the emergency procedure.
start animations” under Fuel System See “LPG emergency procedures”
Messages on page 5-29. Once under Fuel on page 9-39.
warm up mode is complete, a Vehicle storage
message is also displayed.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
Cold conditions long time, rotate the outlet service To open the fuel filler flap:
. Water vapour, visible as steam valve (2) to the closed position. See 1. Unlock the vehicle.
from the exhaust, may be more “LPG emergency procedures” under
Fuel on page 9-39. 2. Push on the rear edge of the fuel
noticeable in cold conditions. filler flap located on the right
side of the vehicle.
3. To close, push on the fuel filler
flap until it clicks into place.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Petrol Tank capacity

Always fill the fuel tank at the See Capacities and Specifications
intermediate or fast fill rate. Do not on page 12-10.
add any more fuel after the fuel filler
first clicks off or fuel blows back. LPG
This allows room for the fuel to
expand inside the tank. { Warning
Only trickle-fill fuel tanks when the Observe the filling instructions
vehicle is to be driven for more than and warnings displayed at the
50 km immediately after the tank is filling station.
filled. However, this is not
recommended on days over 30 °C. Ensure there are no flames or
1. Turn the ignition off. sparks in the vicinity of the
Wipe off any overflowing fuel
The fuel cap, under the fuel filler vehicle.
immediately from the vehicle.
flap, is a ratchet type cap that is
Replace the fuel cap and close the
tethered to the vehicle.
fuel opening then spray or splash Note: Before filling with LPG,
with water. 2. To open, rotate the cap ensure the vehicle is on level
anticlockwise. ground.
3. Hang the tether over the hook 1. Turn the engine off.
on the fuel filler flap.
4. After refilling, tighten the cap by
rotating clockwise until a clicking
noise is heard.
5. Close the fuel filler flap.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13

. The volume of LPG required
{ Warning to fill the LPG tank (as
indicated on the LPG
Do not continue trying to add bowser) can vary from fill to
more LPG once the bowser fill with conditions such as
automatically shuts off. temperature and fuel
composition.
Note: 5. Disconnect the LPG filler nozzle.
. A small discharge of gas 6. Screw the LPG filler dust cap
from the nozzle is normal. back on.
. The AFL (Automatic Fill Note: Do not over tighten the LPG
2. Remove the LPG filler dust cap Limiter) shuts off the LPG filler dust cap.
by rotating anticlockwise. flow when the LPG cylinder
is 80% full. This is to allow Tank capacity
3. Connect the LPG filler nozzle for liquid expansion. See Capacities and Specifications
then squeeze and hold the on page 12-10.
. LPG bowser pressure can
trigger.
vary and may result in
4. Release the trigger when the bowser shut-off when the
bowser automatically shuts off. LPG cylinder is less than
80% full.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 6/6/13
Towing Maximum towing capacities (kg) – braked trailer

Engine 3.0L V6 3.6L V6 6.0L V8
Trailer Towing Transmission Automatic Manual Automatic Manual Automatic
Trailer towing Sedan 1200 1600 2100 1600 2100
The word trailer is used throughout (*1600)
this section and includes all types of Sedan - - 2100 - -
towed vehicles, such as caravans, with LPG
boat trailers or any other special
purpose trailer. Sportwagon 1200 - 2100 - 2100
(*1600)
Towing
Sportwagon - - 2100 - -
Handling, durability and economy with LPG
may be affected by towing a trailer.
Note:
Note:
For recommended and mandatory
towing equipment, see “Towing and • . *1600 kg towing capacity is available on Evoke models and is achieved by
*1600 kg towing capacity is available on Evoke models and is achieved
loading equipment” later in this removing the aero blockers in the front fascia lower grille (1600 kg tow bar
by removing the aero blockers in the front fascia lower grille. See Aero
section. must also be fitted). See Aero blockers removal (Evoke) later in this section.
blockers removal (Evoke) later in this section.
A Holden Dealer will assist with • . The maximum unbraked towing capacity for all vehicles is 750 kg.
The maximum unbraked towing capacity for all vehicles is 750 kg.
supply and installation of towing
equipment.
Overloading All mandatory equipment must be
Never exceed the loads given for fitted, otherwise you may void the
the towing equipment fitted to the New Vehicle Voluntary Warranty, to
vehicle. the extent that Holden considers the
overloading or missing equipment to
have affected the specifications or
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
quality of the vehicle. See “Towing

and loading equipment” later in this Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued)
section.
It is inadvisable to mix and match For further information about
different brands of towing carbon monoxide, see Fuel on
{ Warning equipment, as equipment is page 9-39.
Holden towing equipment is usually designed as an integrated
recommended where it is package. Manual transmission
available. Where it is not When towing, do not exceed
available, no recommendation is 100 km/h. Local laws may require a
made as to the make of
equipment which should be used.
{ Warning lower maximum speed.
Holden will not accept liability for When towing a trailer, exhaust Automatic transmission
defects occurring in towing gases may collect at the rear of For the recommended automatic
equipment not marketed by the vehicle and enter if the boot shift modes to use when towing, see
Holden or for defects in the or tailgate is open. Shift Lever on page 9-9.
vehicle arising from the use of When towing a trailer:
such equipment or for loss or
injury caused by use of such
. Do not drive with the boot or
equipment. The use of such tailgate open.
equipment may void your New . Fully open the dashboard
Vehicle Voluntary Warranty, to the vents and set the Climate
extent that Holden considers the Control to face or bi-level
non-recommended equipment mode and outside
affects the specifications or air / off.
quality of your Holden vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Aero blockers removal (Evoke) Trailer recommendations
The tow ball load should be

between 5% and 10% of the loaded
On Evoke vehicles, when towing A trailer hitched to a vehicle places trailer weight. Adjust by moving
between 1,201 kg and 1,600 kg, it is a weight on the tow bar. This weight items forwards or backwards within
necessary to remove the aero is called the tow bar ball weight or the trailer, to change the balance.
blockers from the front fascia lower tow ball load (1). If the tow ball load is too light or too
grille. See your Holden Dealer for heavy, the steering and handling of
assistance. the vehicle may be affected.
Axle loads must not be exceeded
when the tow ball load is included.
See “Axle loads” under Vehicle
Weight on page 12-6.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
If maximum axle loads are Towing and loading equipment

exceeded, weight should be
removed from the rear of the vehicle Tow load Mandatory equipment Recommended equipment
and transferred onto the trailer. Up to Holden 1,200 kg rated
Ensure the weight of the packed 1,200 kg tow bar
trailer is not greater than the towing Holden trailer wiring harness
capacity of the Holden approved
tow bar package fitted to the Brakes on the trailer if the
vehicle. aggregate trailer mass
(ATM) is more than 750 kg
Between Holden 1,600 kg rated Load distribution hitch
1,201 kg and tow bar
1,600 kg
Holden trailer wiring harness Superlift shock absorbers
(Sedan)
Brakes on the trailer
Adjust pressure per Note 1
Evoke — Removal of aero on the following page up to
blockers. See “Aero a maximum pressure of
blockers removal (Evoke)” 650 kPa
previously in this section.
Between Holden 2,100 kg rated Superlift shock absorbers
1,601 kg and tow bar (Sedan)
2,100 kg Adjust pressure per Note 1
Holden trailer wiring harness
on the following page up to
Brakes on the trailer a maximum pressure of
650 kPa
Load distribution hitch
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Recommended trailer wiring harness maximum loads vehicle. Overloading of axle

parts may shorten the life of the
Output Circuit Maximum circuit rating at 12 V vehicle.
Trailer brake lights 3.5 A Note:
Trailer left indicator 1.8 A 1. Superlift shock absorbers help to
Trailer right indicator 1.8 A raise the rear of the vehicle and
improve ground clearance.
Trailer reverse 3.5 A However, as superlift pressure is
Trailer taillamps 5.7 A increased, the weight distribution
changes, i.e. the proportion of
*Electric brake controller 10.0 A load on the rear axle increases.
This means that very high
superlift pressures combined
Note: *Electric brake controller A load distribution hitch transfers with a fully laden vehicle may
provision is provided in the Holden load to the vehicle's front wheels exceed the rear axle load limit.
Genuine Accessory Trailer Wiring aiding brake performance. This also Do not exceed the maximum
Harness. Holden recommend that enables more load to be carried in pressure of 650 kPa.
only this provision is used when the vehicle without exceeding the
2. Adjust superlift inflation pressure
using an electric brake controller. rear axle load limit.
so that the bottom edges of the
Load distribution hitch Superlift shock absorbers (Sedan) vehicle doors are horizontal. Do
not exceed the maximum
The vehicle may have a load The vehicle may have superlift
pressure of 650 kPa.
distribution hitch. shock absorbers.
3. Superlift air pressure must never
The load distribution hitch must be They do not increase the carrying
be less than 100 kPa or the
removed when not in use. Do not capacity of the vehicle. Do not
airbags will be torn, even when
leave the hitch assembly in the exceed maximum loads for the
no trailer is attached to the
receiver unless a trailer is attached.
vehicle.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 6/6/13

. Ensure that superlift shock •. Use a lower gear and the brakes,
Use a lower gear and the
{ Warning absorbers are adjusted correctly. when descending steep hills.
brakes, when descending steep
At no time may the total front or

See “Superlift shock absorbers” • hills.
Automatic transmission:
previously in this section. . At highway speeds it is
Automatic transmission: At
rear axle load exceed the . Tighten the tow ball retaining nut recommended that cruise
highway speeds it is
maximums specified. See “Axle
to 140 Y (Newton metres) and control be used. Cruise control
recommended that cruise control
loads” under Vehicle Weight on check the torque frequently. prevents the transmission from
be used. Cruise control prevents
page 12-6.
. Vehicles handle differently when unnecessarily changing gears,
the transmission from
Superlift shock absorber (Sedan) towing. Take a couple of short particularly on gradients. See
unnecessarily changing gears,
inflation pressure should never distance trips with the trailer Shift Lever on
particularly on page 9-9 for further
gradients. See
operate below the minimum or before taking a long trip. Shift Lever on page 9-9 for
recommendations when towing.
further recommendations when
above the maximum values . Have the vehicle and trailer • Do not use axle-mounted hitches.
towing.
shown on the tag attached to the
inflation valve.
correctly maintained and •. Ensure that the tow bar does not
Do not use axle-mounted
serviced, with particular attention obscure the rear number plate.
hitches.
given to the brakes, tyres, Remove the tow bar tongue when
Towing precautions suspension, wheel bearings, .
not required for towing.
Ensure that the tow bar does not
towing coupling and lighting. obscure the rear number plate.
. When heavily loading the vehicle • If a tow bar is removed, have any
Remove the tow bar tongue
or when towing, inflate tyres to . Use an extended-arm mirror on mounting holes in the underbody
when not required for towing.
the maximum recommended both sides of the vehicle if sealed to prevent entry of exhaust
pressure. See Tyre Pressure on necessary. .
fumes, dust and water.
If a tow bar is removed, have
page 10-41. any mounting holes in the
. Headlamps may need re-aiming • The M10 anti-rattle bolt and nut
underbody sealed to prevent
. Ensure that a load distribution after the loaded trailer has been should be removed when towing
entry of exhaust fumes, dust and
hitch is correctly distributing the hitched, particularly if a load to prevent damage to the bolt or
water.
tow ball load. See “Towing and distribution hitch is not used. tow bar tongue.
loading equipment” previously in
this section.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13

. Park Assist (PA) will require Vehicle maintenance
adjustment to allow for the Conversions and
More frequent vehicle maintenance
installation or removal of the tow
is required when using the vehicle
Add-Ons
bar tongue. See “Adjustment for
a
a towbar”
towbar” under
under Park Assist
Parking on
Assist to tow. Refer to the Service/
Warranty Booklet in the vehicle's Add-On Electrical
page
on page9-26.
9-26.
glove box. Equipment
Trailer brakes
Trailer Sway Fitting driving lamps or insect
. Trailer brakes are mandatory on screens
trailers with an aggregate trailer Control (TSC)
mass (ATM) of more than
750 kg. If the system detects trailer sway
movements, engine power is
. Consult the appropriate reduced and the vehicle/trailer
regulatory body in your State combination is selectively braked
or Territory for the legal until the trailer sway ceases. While
requirements of trailer brakes. the system is working, keep steering
Running-in when towing as still as possible.
It is recommended that a new TSC is a function of the Electronic
vehicle be driven for at least Stability Control (ESC) system and
1,500 km before towing. may be disabled by turning the
Traction Control System (TCS) or
If towing is necessary before this, ESC off. See Traction Control
do not exceed 80 km/h. This also System (TCS) on page 9-17 and Do not fit any accessory over the
applies if the vehicle is fitted with a Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on upper or lower air intakes at the
new or reconditioned engine, page 9-18. front of the vehicle, as this may
transmission or rear axle. affect engine cooling.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
The Holden Genuine Accessories Fitting roo bars

are an exception, however they If a roo bar is to be fitted, it is critical
{ Warning
should be removed in high load and that the Holden approved roo bar be
high temperature conditions. Fitting other types of roo bars
used. Other types must not be fitted. may affect crash performance,
airbag performance and engine
{ Caution The Holden roo bar is available from
a Holden Dealer and has been cooling.
In high load and high temperature compatibility tested with the
applications (e.g. towing) no vehicle's design, including the Roo bars should not be fitted to
objects should be fitted over the Holden airbag system. vehicles operating in suburban
upper or lower air intake at the The Holden roo bar has alternative areas, as they increase the risk of
front of the vehicle, as this could front position and indicator lamps injury to a pedestrian in the event of
affect cooling. This includes which are connected in place of the a collision.
removing Holden Genuine standard vehicle lamps.
Accessories in this area, in these FPA and APA will be deactivated
conditions. when the Holden Genuine
Accessory Roo Bar is fitted by a
Holden Dealer.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-1
Vehicle Care Electrical System

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
General Information
Where specified, use only Holden
Vehicle Tools genuine parts and accessories.
General Information Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Emission Information . . . . . . . . 10-1 Wheels and Tyres Emission Information
Emission Control System . . . . 10-1 Tyre Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 The emission control systems are
Tread Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 designed to reduce the amount of
Vehicle Checks Tyre Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43 hydrocarbons (HC), carbon
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Buying New Tyres . . . . . . . . . . 10-44 monoxide (CO), and oxides of
Engine Compartment Wheel Alignment and Tyre nitrogen (NOx) that are emitted from
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44 the engine and fuel system into the
Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Tyre Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45 atmosphere. HC and NOx, when
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Tyre Sealant and exposed to sunlight under certain
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45 conditions, contribute to
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Tyre Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51 photochemical smog. In addition,
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Jump Starting CO is toxic to inhale.
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
Emission Control System
Bulb Replacement Towing the Vehicle
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-73 Major emission control systems that
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
the vehicle may have are:
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Front Turn Signal Lamps . . . 10-21 Appearance Care . Evaporative emission control
Tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22 Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74 system. This system is designed
Number Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-27 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77 to prevent the escape of fuel
Interior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78 vapour from the fuel system and
recycle the vapours through the
normal combustion process.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-2 Vehicle Care

. Crankcase emission control Reducing fuel consumption
system. This system is designed { Warning
to prevent blow-by gases from Engine
escaping into the atmosphere Any person who removes,
Have the vehicle serviced regularly
and recycle them through the modifies or hinders any part of in accordance with the maintenance
combustion process. the emission control system may schedule in the Service/Warranty
. Exhaust emission control be contravening Australian Booklet.
system. The various Design Rules. It is also illegal to
drive a vehicle modified in Transmission
components of this system
operate collectively to limit HC, this way. For vehicles fitted with a manual
CO and NOx emissions in the transmission; when on level roads,
exhaust gas. The exhaust Maintenance requirements in an unladen condition, it is
emission control system consists permissible to drive off in 2nd gear,
of components including Have the vehicle serviced at the in the interest of fuel economy.
electronic control of spark, fuel frequency shown in the
Maintenance schedule, in the Tyre pressure
and idle speed. In addition
vehicles have a catalytic Service/Warranty Booklet. Keep the tyres at the recommended
converter and closed loop It is recommended that servicing be pressures.
mixture control system. carried out by an authorised Holden Wheel alignment
It is recommended that service and Dealer who will maintain the
vehicle's emission control system as Maintain correct front and rear
repair to fuel or emission systems wheel alignment.
be carried out by an authorised per the Service/Warranty Booklet.
Holden Dealer. It is recommended that all fluid Warm ups and idling
levels are checked weekly. Avoid long engine warm ups. They
Owner responsibility
are unnecessary and waste fuel.
The engine, engine control system
and exhaust system of the vehicle Avoid long engine idling.
must NOT be modified in any way.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-3
Accelerating, driving and braking Vehicle Checks

Accelerate gently and avoid rapid
starts. Bonnet
Drive the vehicle at steady speeds Opening
where possible (after running-in).
Manual transmission: It is desirable
to reach top gear as soon as
possible, but do not force the engine
to labour in top gear.
Riding the brake
Do not rest your foot on the brake Push the release catch to the right
pedal when you do not intend to and lift the bonnet. Gas struts
brake. automatically take over to lift and
Air conditioning hold the bonnet in the open position.
Switch off the air conditioning when Closing
not required, however, once every
Pull the lever towards you.
2 weeks, with the engine running,
switch the air conditioning on for
{ Warning
5 to 10 minutes to lubricate the To avoid injury and/or damage to
seals (even in winter). the vehicle, check each time,
before the bonnet is closed, that
the contact area is unobstructed.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-4 Vehicle Care
Lower the bonnet and allow it to Engine Compartment Overview

drop into the catch. Check that the
bonnet is engaged.
{ Warning
If while driving you notice that the
bonnet has not been properly
closed, pull the vehicle over to the
side of the road at the earliest
possible moment and close the
bonnet correctly.
Note:
. If the wiring of the bonnet switch
is damaged or tampered with, it
will be detected by the vehicle
control system. The alarm will
sound when the alarm system is V6 Engine
armed.
. If the bonnet is not engaged 1. Clutch/brake fluid reservoir, see 4. Windscreen washer fluid
when the vehicle is locked, A Brake Fluid on page 10-14 reservoir, see Washer Fluid on
will flash immediately. Unlock the 2. Engine oil filler cap, see Engine page 10-14
vehicle, close the bonnet Oil on page 10-6 5. Engine coolant reservoir, see
securely and relock. Engine Coolant on page 10-7
3. Dipstick for engine oil, see
Engine Oil on page 10-6
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-5
Engine Cover
{ Warning
Do not place hands on any under
bonnet components when the
engine is HOT or RUNNING.
Before removing the engine
cover, allow the engine to cool
sufficiently.
Removal
Remove the engine cover to access
the radiator cap (V6 engine).
V8 Engine the key from the vehicle.
2. Place the shift lever in P and
1. Clutch/brake fluid reservoir, see 4. Windscreen washer fluid apply the park brake.
Brake Fluid on page 10-14 reservoir, see Washer Fluid on
2. Dipstick for engine oil, see page 10-14
Engine Oil on page 10-6 5. Engine coolant reservoir, see
3. Engine oil filler cap, see Engine Engine Coolant on page 10-7
Oil on page 10-6
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 6/6/13
10-6 Vehicle Care
Engine Oil 4. Remove and read the oil level.

The level should be between the
Checking oil level lower and upper area/marks.
The engine must be at operating Add oil if the level is at or below
temperature and the ignition turned the lower area/mark.
off for at least 10 minutes. Dilution
1. Park the vehicle on a level When a vehicle is frequently driven
surface. on short trips, the engine often fails
to reach normal operating
temperatures:
. The oil becomes diluted by fuel
3. Open the bonnet. Lift the cover and moisture that settles in the
upwards approximately 15 cm. oil pan.
4. Pull the cover towards the front . This may raise the oil level
of the vehicle. creating a false reading on the
engine oil dipstick.
Replacement
For example, in a vehicle that has
1. Place the cover over the rear
accumulated 1,500 km of short
guide tabs.
distance or intermittent city
2. Lower the front of the cover so operation and has consumed a
that the hole on the left side 2. Remove the dipstick and wipe normal amount of oil, the level may
slides over the oil filler cap. clean. not have dropped from the upper
3. Press down on both front area/mark, due to dilution. If this
3. Insert the dipstick firmly.
corners to engage the fasteners. vehicle is driven for some distance
Pull upwards on the cover to V6 Only: Rotate the dipstick two
ensure it is secure. turns.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 6/6/13
Vehicle Care 10-7
at highway speeds the dilution 4. Replace the engine oil filler cap
elements evaporate, resulting in a tightly by rotating clockwise.
sudden drop in oil level. Note: Non-detergent and other low
quality oils, the use of break-in oil,
tune up compounds, friction
reducing compounds and other
supplemental additives are not
recommended. Their use increases
costs, may be detrimental to the
operation of the vehicle and may
void the New Vehicle Voluntary
Warranty, to the extent that Holden
1. Rotate the engine oil filler cap considers the non-recommended
anticlockwise and remove. fluid to have affected the
2. Add enough oil to reach within specifications or quality of the
the upper area/mark. vehicle.
Different dipsticks are used Engine oil change intervals
3. Check the level on the dipstick
depending on engine variant.
and add further oil if necessary. Refer to the Service/Warranty
Arrows indicate the lower and upper Booklet.
The engine oil must not exceed
area/marks.
the upper area/mark.
Adding engine oil Engine Coolant
See Recommended Fluids and { Caution Note: For all engine variants, the
Lubricants on page 11-2 and coolant reservoir is in the same
Capacities and Specifications on Overfilled engine oil must be position within the engine
page 12-10. drained or suctioned out. compartment.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-8 Vehicle Care
Engine coolant level

Check the coolant level at least
once a week. The cap is yellow with
the word DEXCOOL.
Checking coolant level
{ Warning
Do not remove the radiator cap if
the engine and radiator are still
hot. Scalding fluid and steam can
be blown out under pressure 2. Rotate the coolant reservoir cap 3. When the engine is cold, the
which could cause serious burns. one-eighth of a turn coolant level should be at or
anticlockwise and slowly pull out above the minimum mark (2).
1. Turn the ignition off. the dipstick. When the engine is warm, the
level should be between half full
and the maximum mark (1).
Adding coolant
{ Caution
Do not spill coolant on the
vehicle's exterior surfaces as it
can damage the paintwork. If you
do, wash it off immediately.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-9
For engine coolant specifications If the coolant requires regular If the engine overheats or loses
and water-to-coolant ratio, see topping up, contact a Holden coolant, see Engine Overheating on
Recommended Fluids and Dealer. page 10-9.
Lubricants on page 11-2. Always
How the engine coolant works
use the specified ratio. Engine Overheating
1. Mix a solution of Holden coolant
. The coolant contains special
corrosion inhibitors.
and clean fresh water. { Caution
2. Add coolant into the coolant
. Coolant helps the cooling
system in hot weather by Immediate action is required if the
dipstick tube (where the dipstick
increasing the boiling point. engine overheats. This is
is stored).
. Coolant protects against freezing indicated by one or more of the
3. Check the level on the dipstick following:
and add further coolant if down to –37 °C, provided the
necessary. specified concentration is . The engine temperature
maintained. gauge needle moving over to
4. Replace the dipstick. the H.
5. Rotate the cap one-eighth of a { Warning . An engine overheated
turn clockwise until secure and message appearing on the
the word DEXCOOL can be read Corrosion inhibitors and DIC, see Engine Cooling
from the front of the vehicle. antifreeze fluids are poisonous. System Messages on
Use extreme care when handling. page 5-28.
In emergency situations, plain clean
If swallowed, seek medical
fresh water may be used temporarily . Steam escaping from under
until the correct Holden coolant is attention. Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap if the engine the bonnet.
obtained. Replace as soon as
possible from the nearest Holden and radiator are still hot. Scalding . A loss of power.
Dealer. fluid and steam can be blown out (Continued)
under pressure which could
cause serious burns.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-10 Vehicle Care
If the fan is working and the engine

Caution (Continued) Danger (Continued) temperature gauge needle has not
returned to its normal position within
. A loud knocking or pinging Do not remove the radiator cap if a few minutes:
noise. the engine and radiator are still
hot. Scalding fluid and steam can 1. Turn the ignition off and remove
Continued driving EVEN FOR A the key from the vehicle.
SHORT TIME could cause engine be blown out under pressure
damage. Stop the vehicle as soon which could cause serious burns. 2. Check the air intake area in the
as it is safe to do so and perform Do not place hands near under front bumper to ensure that it is
the cooling system checks. clear. See Air intake under
bonnet components as the
Exterior Care on page 10-74.
cooling fan may start working
unexpectedly even when the
engine is not running and the { Warning
{ Danger ignition is turned off. Take care when checking these
Do not open the bonnet if you can areas as they may still be hot.
see or hear steam or coolant Cooling system checks
escaping from the engine
1. Leave the engine idling. 3. Look for leaks at the radiator
compartment. Scalding fluid and
2. Ensure that the shift lever is in P hoses and connections, heater
steam can be blown out under
or neutral and apply the park hoses and connections, radiator
pressure which could cause and water pump.
serious burns. Wait until no steam brake.
or coolant can be seen or heard 3. Exit the vehicle and audibly 4. If you do not find anything
before opening the bonnet. check that the cooling fan is wrong, check the engine coolant
working. level. See Engine Coolant on
(Continued) page 10-7.
5. DO NOT run the engine until any
problems have been corrected.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-11
Low coolant level
{ Danger
Do not remove the radiator cap if
the engine and radiator are still
hot. Scalding fluid and steam can
be blown out under pressure
which could cause serious burns.
V6 Engine
When the engine is cool, check the Note: For all engine variants, the
coolant reservoir level and radiator coolant reservoir is in the same
level and fill as follows: position within the engine
compartment.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-12 Vehicle Care
Danger (Continued)
steam can be blown out under
pressure which could cause
serious burns.
Remove the engine cover if
required. See Engine Cover on
page 10-5.
2. Locate the radiator cap (1).

On V6 variants, remove the
engine cover. See Engine Cover
on page 10-5.
3. Cover the cap with a thick cloth
and rotate slowly anticlockwise
V8 Engine to remove.
1. Check the coolant reservoir

level (2). Add coolant if low. See { Danger { Caution
Engine Coolant on page 10-7. Do not spill coolant on the
Do not remove the radiator cap
if the engine and radiator are
still hot. Scalding fluid and
(Continued)
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-13
4. As well as adding coolant to the Note: The following may cause the
coolant reservoir, add coolant engine to temporarily operate at
directly through the radiator cap high temperatures, especially on
opening until full. hot days:
5. Wait 30 seconds for the coolant . Climbing a long hill.
to settle. . Stopping immediately after high
6. Add more coolant if the level speed driving.
drops. . Idling for long periods in traffic.
{ Caution . Towing a heavily laden trailer or

caravan.
Take care not to spill coolant on 11. Check the coolant reservoir If the engine temperature gauge
the accessory drive belts. dipstick and add further coolant shows H, switch off the air
If a spill occurs, rinse the belts if necessary, up to level (3). conditioning.
immediately with fresh water. Note: Filling to this level provides
additional coolant to allow for any
7. Start the engine. air that may remain in the cooling
system.
8. Add coolant through the radiator
cap opening until full. Check the coolant reservoir level for
the next two days.
Wait 30 seconds and top up if
the level drops. If the coolant requires regular
topping up, contact a Holden
9. Replace the radiator cap. Dealer.
10. Turn the ignition off.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-14 Vehicle Care
Washer Fluid 2. Secure the cap. The level should be between the
MIN and MAX area.
Brake Fluid If the fluid level is correct, do not
(Automatic transmission) remove the reservoir cap, as brake
fluid exposed to the atmosphere will
quickly absorb moisture.
{ Warning
Adding brake fluid
Brake fluid is poisonous and
corrosive and will damage the Use heavy duty brake fluid. See
paint finish of the vehicle if spilt. Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11-2.
Checking the brake fluid level
2. Wipe the sides of the cap clean.
The washer fluid reservoir supplies 3. Rotate anticlockwise to remove.
water to the front windscreen 4. Top up with heavy duty brake
washer and rear window washer fluid.
(Sportwagon).
Check the fluid level weekly. { Warning
Adding washer fluid Using brake fluid other than GM
1. Use the correct amount of recommended brake fluid may
washer fluid additive. Refer to a cause corrosion to components of
Holden Dealer. the braking system and reduced
Do not use ordinary soap or braking performance.
detergent as they froth up and Check the brake fluid level weekly. (Continued)
damage the wiper rubbers.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-15
Checking the clutch/brake fluid Adding clutch/brake fluid

Warning (Continued) level Use heavy duty brake fluid. See
Use only new brake fluid. Use of Recommended Fluids and
old, used or inferior brake fluid Lubricants on page 11-2.
may endanger the functioning of 1. Turn the ignition off.
the brake system.
2. Wipe the sides of the cap clean.
3. Rotate anticlockwise to remove.
5. Secure the cap and clean up
any spilt fluid. 4. Top up with heavy duty brake
fluid.
If the brake fluid requires regular
topping up, contact a Holden Dealer
immediately. { Warning
Clutch/brake fluid Using brake fluid other than GM
Check the clutch/brake fluid recommended brake fluid may
(Manual transmission)
reservoir weekly. cause corrosion to components of
the braking system and reduced
{ Warning The level should be between the braking performance.
MIN and MAX area.
Clutch/brake fluid is poisonous Use only new brake fluid. Use of
If the fluid level is correct, do not
and corrosive and will damage old, used or inferior brake fluid
remove the reservoir cap, as brake
the paint finish of the vehicle if may endanger the functioning of
fluid exposed to the atmosphere will
spilt. quickly absorb moisture. the brake system.
5. Secure the cap and clean up

any spilt fluid.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-16 Vehicle Care
If the clutch/brake fluid requires

regular topping up, contact a Holden Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued)
Dealer immediately.
Take care with all metal objects The battery vent tube must be
and tools including items you may installed correctly to ensure the
Battery wear (for example jewellery, rings explosive gases are vented
and metal watch bands) near outside the vehicle.
{ Warning battery terminals. Only use a manufacturer
Batteries emit an explosive gas recommended battery as a
mixture which may be ignited. Battery replacement replacement, otherwise the
Therefore, you should keep electric power management
sparks and flames away from the { Warning (EPM) system may not operate
battery at all times. Never smoke correctly.
near a battery. A specifically developed battery
with a ventilation system is
Batteries contain sulphuric acid. For replacement, refer to a Holden
required for this vehicle. Any
If acid contacts skin or clothing, Dealer or authorised repairer.
other standard battery may cause
flush immediately with plenty of The battery is located inside the
explosive gases to enter the rear
water. In case of eye contact, boot (Sedan), in the cargo area
compartment or passenger cabin.
flush with plenty of water and (Sportwagon), on the left, behind an
contact a doctor immediately. Do not remove the caps on the access panel. For removal
Battery acid also damages paint top of the battery. The battery (Sportwagon), see “Sportwagon
and fabrics. To minimise damage, supplied in the vehicle is taillamp access” under Tail lamps on
wash off immediately. maintenance free and does not page 10-22.
(Continued) require checking or filling.
(Continued)
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-17
Battery disconnection If the battery is disconnected: Bulb Replacement

The battery may discharge if the . Some trip computer displays will
Contact a trained service technician
vehicle is not used for be reset.
if unsure about the bulb
approximately six weeks. . Some personal identity key replacement process.
If the battery is disconnected it settings may be forgotten. The
When replacing bulbs:
may discharge after approximately driver's settings will be
12 weeks. Trickle feed on a battery remembered the next time the . Turn the ignition off and remove
charger overnight, before installing features are adjusted. See the key from the vehicle.
back into the vehicle. “Personal identity keys” under . Turn off related switches.
If the battery is disconnected or Keys on page 2-1.
. Fit bulbs of the specified
discharged, the tailgate For emergency starting when the wattage only.
(Sportwagon) will not open normally. battery is flat, see Jump Starting on
. Do not touch bulbs or reflectors
See “Manual tailgate release” under page 10-71.
Tailgate on page 2-15. with bare hands.
. Clean stained bulbs with
methylated spirits.
Bulbs to be changed by a Holden
Dealer
. Fog lamps
. Instrument panel lamps
. Side indicator lamps
. Rear high level brake lamp
. Boot lamp (Sedan)
. Sun visor lamps
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-18 Vehicle Care

. Footwell lamps
Headlamps 4. Drain the filler neck before
. Door puddle lamps pulling out.
Front lamp access
. Exterior mirror lamps Place a clean rag over the
opening of the coolant reservoir.
. Front interior dome/reading
lamps
{ Caution
Condensation may temporarily
appear on the inside of exterior
lamp lenses after rain or washing
the vehicle. Condensation occurs
when there is a temperature
difference between the inside and
outside of the lamp allowing a fine
mist on the inside surface of the 1. Open the bonnet.
lamp lens. This condensation will 2. Locate the coolant reservoir to 1. Open the bonnet.
disappear when the vehicle is in a access driver side:
dry environment or the lamp is on. 2. Locate the air filter box to
. Front park bulb access passenger side:
If water does collect in the lamp
contact a Holden Dealer.
. Low beam bulb . Front park bulb
. High beam bulb . Low beam bulb
3. Pull up on the coolant reservoir . High beam bulb
filler neck (including the cap).
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-19
3. Unclip the air filter box cover and Outboard low beam
move rearward. 1. To access the headlamps, follow
4. Disconnect the air flow meter the steps in “Front lamp access”
connector (1) (V8 only). earlier in this section.
Front lamp assembly
Driver side shown

1. Front turn signal lamp
(WY21W bulb)
2. Headlamp outboard low beam
(H7LL bulb) 2. Rotate the outboard dust cap
3. Headlamp inboard high beam anticlockwise and remove.
(H9 bulb, 60W)
4. Park lamps (W5W bulb)
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-20 Vehicle Care
Inboard high beam

1. To access the headlamps, follow
the steps in “Front lamp access”
earlier in this section.
3. Pull to remove the wiring 5. Remove the bulb from the

harness connector from the rear headlamp.
of the bulb.
6. Fit the new bulb into the
4. Press and unclip the bulb spring headlamp ensuring the location
retainer and pivot clear of tang is located correctly.
the bulb. 2. Rotate the inboard dust cap
7. Refit the bulb spring retainer into anticlockwise and remove.
Note: Check the orientation of the its original position.
bulb tang for replacement. 3. Remove the wiring harness
8. Install the wiring harness connector by squeezing the two
connector and dust cap. tangs on the harness connector
9. Install components removed in and pulling the connector
Step 1. downwards.
10. Check lamp operation.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-21
Park lamps 5. Install the holder by rotating

clockwise.
Front park lamps
6. Install components removed in
1. To access the headlamps, follow Step 1.
the steps in “Front lamp access”
earlier in this section. 7. Check lamp operation.
Front Turn Signal Lamps

1. The front turn signal lamps are
accessed by loosening the
wheel arch liner.
4. Twist the bulb anticlockwise to

remove.
Note: The different sized locating
tangs on the bulb base allow the
bulb to sit correctly into the
headlamp in one position only.
5. Twist the bulb clockwise to
2. Remove the park lamp bulb
install.
holder by rotating anticlockwise.
6. Install the wiring harness
3. Remove the park lamp bulb by
connector and dust cap.
pulling it straight out of the
7. Install components removed in holder.
Step 1. 2. Using the torx tool from the
4. Insert the new bulb into the toolkit, see Tools on page 10-38,
8. Check lamp operation. holder. remove the six screws at the
front of the wheel arch liner.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-22 Vehicle Care
3. Dislodge the wheel arch liner to 7. Install the holder by rotating

provide access to the rear of the clockwise.
front lamp. 8. Check lamp operation.
9. Refit the wheel arch liner and
stow the torx tool.
Tail lamps
Sedan taillamp assembly
Driver side shown

1. Reverse lamp (W16W bulb)
2. Brake lamp (W5WLL bulb)
4. Remove the turn signal bulb 3. Stop/taillamp (P21/5W bulb)
holder by rotating anticlockwise.
4. Turn signal lamp (PY21W
5. Remove the turn signal bulb by amber bulb)
pulling it straight out of the
holder. Sedan taillamp access
6. Insert the new bulb into the To access the taillamp turn
holder. signal (4), stop/tail (3) bulbs:
Ensure that the same colour 1. Open the boot.
bulb is used.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-23
2. Raise the spare wheel cover and

. Rotate anticlockwise and 7. Pull the boot lining away to
attach the T-piece to the boot lid. remove the two T-shaped reveal the rear of the lamp.
See Tyre Changing on retaining screws.
When replacing the boot lining
page 10-51. If the vehicle has a securing pin(s), push directly
convenience net, there will into the hole(s).
be four T-shaped retaining
screws. 8. To replace the trim, align the
guide tabs with the holes and
4. Grasp the plastic boot trim and push the trim down.
pull directly upwards to remove.
9. When the trim is refitted ensure
the lip of the rubber boot seal is
positioned on top of the trim.
3. There are two types of fastening

systems for the plastic boot trim:
. Using a flat-blade
screwdriver, remove the two
retaining pins.
5. Remove the boot lining securing
When replacing the
pin(s) by rotating anticlockwise
retaining pins, push them
and pulling down at the
directly into the holes. To access the taillamp stop (2) and
same time.
reverse (1) bulbs:
6. Lower the spare wheel cover.
1. Open the boot.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-24 Vehicle Care
2. Remove the boot lid lining 6. Install the components removed

securing pins with a flat-blade in “Taillamp access” earlier in
screwdriver. this section.
3. Dislodge the boot lid lining Sportwagon taillamp assembly
without bending to reveal the
rear of the lamp.
4. Re-install the boot lid lining in
the reverse order.
Sedan taillamp bulb replacement
To replace the bulbs:

1. From the rear of the assembly,
rotate the bulb holder
anticlockwise to release.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out of the holder. Driver side shown
3. Install the new bulb into the bulb 1. Turn signal lamp (PY21W
holder. amber bulb)
Ensure that the same colour 2. Stop/taillamp (P21/5W bulb)
bulb is used. 3. Reverse lamp (P21W bulb)
4. Install the bulb holder into
the lamp.
5. Check lamp operation.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-25
Sportwagon taillamp access 2. To access the driver side lamp,

To access the rear turn signal, stop/ remove the cover from the top
tail and reverse bulbs: and pull away from the cargo
area trim.
5. Remove the lamp assembly.

Disconnect the wiring connector
by pushing the tab at the bottom
of the connector.
Driver side shown
Passenger side shown
1. Open the tailgate.
3. To access the passenger side
lamp, remove the battery
compartment cover by rotating
the latches anticlockwise.
4. Undo the three lamp assembly
securing nuts.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-26 Vehicle Care
6. Reconnect the wiring connector, Sportwagon taillamp bulb

replace the lamp assembly and replacement
refit the securing nuts.
Driver side shown

7. To install the covers, align the
locating tabs along the bottom
edge of the cover with the slots Driver side shown
Passenger side shown in the trim. 1. Reverse lamp (PY21W bulb)
8. Push the cover at the top until 2. Stop/taillamp (P21/5W bulb)
engaged and if fitted, rotate the 3. Turn signal lamp (PY21W
latches clockwise to secure. amber bulb)
4. Rear lamp wiring connector
To replace the bulbs:
1. From the rear of the assembly,
rotate the bulb holder
anticlockwise to release.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-27
2. Lightly press the bulb and twist Number Plate Lamp 3. Remove the bulb holder from the
anticlockwise out of the holder. lamp by rotating the bulb holder
(W5W bulb) anticlockwise.
3. Install the new bulb into the bulb
holder by pushing it into the 4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb
holder and rotating it clockwise. holder.
Ensure that the same colour 5. Push the new bulb into the bulb
bulb is used. holder.
4. Install the bulb holder into 6. Install the bulb holder into the
the lamp. lamp by rotating the bulb holder
5. Check lamp operation. clockwise.
6. Install the components removed, 7. Insert the right hand side of the
see “Sportwagon taillamp lamp into the opening and pivot
access” earlier in this section. the lamp upwards into position.
8. Push on the left hand side of the
Sedan lamp until the clip engages.
1. Push the left hand side of the 9. Check lamp operation.
lamp towards the right Sportwagon
hand side.
1. Push the locking tang at the end
2. Remove the lamp from the of the lamp housing towards
opening by pivoting the lamp the lens.
downwards.
2. Pull the lamp assembly
downwards.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-28 Vehicle Care
3. Remove the bulb holder from the Interior Lamps 2. From the rear side, remove the
lamp housing by rotating the bulb holder from the lamp
bulb holder anticlockwise. Rear dome/reading lamps housing by rotating the bulb
4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb (W5W bulb) holder anticlockwise.
holder. Note: Do not remove the lens from
5. Push the new bulb into the bulb the lamp assembly.
holder. 3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb
6. Install the bulb holder into the holder.
lamp housing by rotating the 4. Push the new bulb into the bulb
bulb holder clockwise, ensuring holder.
that the seal is undamaged. 5. Install the bulb holder into the
7. Place the fixed tang into the lamp housing by rotating the
number plate surround. bulb holder clockwise.
8. Push the lamp upwards to 6. Refit the lamp into the rearward
engage the locking tang. facing locating tabs.
9. Check lamp operation. If the vehicle has rear interior dome/ 7. Push the forward facing edge
reading lamps: upward into the head lining until
firmly in place.
1. Pull the forward edge of the
dome lamp downwards, using 8. Check lamp operation.
only fingers.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-29
Glove box lamp Electrical System The amperage is shown on the

(5W bulb) fuse's head:
Fuses Colour Rating (amps)
Grey 2
{ Warning Tan 5
Turn off the ignition and any Brown 7.5
electrical equipment before Red 10
changing a fuse.
Blue 15
A fuse puller is provided in the rear Yellow 20
fuse panel, which can be used on Natural 25
each of the three fuse panels.
Green 30
Spare fuses of various ratings are
1. Open the glove box. provided in the rear and engine Replace the fuse cover securely
2. Remove the lens housing with a compartment fuse/relay boxes. after use.
fine flat-blade screwdriver. Replace blown fuses promptly.
3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb Always replace a blown fuse with
holder. one of the same amperage.
4. Push the new bulb into the bulb
holder.
5. When the new bulb is in place,
feed the wiring back into the
cavity and push the lens housing
back into place.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-30 Vehicle Care
Fuses and relays

{ Warning
Rear fuse panel
When replacing a fuse be
The fuse panel is located on the left
sure to use a fuse of the side of the boot/cargo area, above
specified amperage. the battery.
Never install a wire or similar, in . Rotate the catch(es)
place of a fuse, as it could anticlockwise to unlatch the
damage electrical components cover.
and cause a fire. . To refit, replace the cover and
Any improper alterations to the rotate the catch(es) clockwise to
electrical system may cause a fire secure.
hazard and engine damage. To Sportwagon shown
maintain your own safety and that 1. Fuse panel
of the vehicle, have any work Remove the battery compartment
involving the electrical system or cover to gain access. See
the replacement of high current “Sportwagon taillamp access” under
fuses or relays carried out by a Tail lamps on page 10-22.
Dealer.
Sedan shown
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-31
Fuse and relay index The vehicle may not be equipped

with all of the fuses, relays and
features shown.
Fuses
F1 DRIVER FRONT / 30A
LH REAR WINDOW
F2 EMER / VEH / ACCY 10A
F3 TRUNK RELEASE 15A
15A
F4 PASSIVE ENTRY 30A
PASSIVE
START-BATT 2
F5 RADIO 15A
F6 - -
F7 - -
F8 FUEL SYSTEM 20A
CONTROL MODULE
F9 MRTD 30A
F10 DECKLID FLASHING 20A
LAMPS / EDI
MODULE
F11 AUXILIARY 10A
BATTERY
F12 - -
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-32 Vehicle Care
F13 - - F26 TAILGATE MODULE 10A F39 - -

F14 REAR SEAT 10A F27 CAMERA IGN 10A F40 TRAILER MODULE 40A
ENTERTAINMENT F28 FRT VENT SEAT IGN 15A
F15 AUTOMATIC 15A Relays
F29 TRAILER 10A R1 TRUNK RELEASE
HEADLAMP MODULE IGN
LEVELLING R2 ACCESSORY
F30 ADVANCED PARK 15A
F16 - - ASSIST / SIDE BLIND R3 -
F17 - - ZONE ALERT R4 RUN
F18 ONSTAR 10A F31 ENGINE CONTROL 10A R5 -
F19 MIRROR / WINDOW 5A MODULE
R6 RETAINED ACCESSORY
MODULE F32 AUXILIARY GAUGES 10A POWER
F20 CANISTER VENT 10A F33 RETAINED 10A R7 LOGISTICS MODE
SOLENOID ACCESSORY
POWER R8 -
F21 PASSIVE ENTRY 5A
PASSIVE F34 BATTERY VOLTAGE 5A R9 -
START-BATT 1 SENSING R10 -
F22 MEMORY SEAT 10A F35 TAILGATE MOTOR 30A R11 CHILD LOCKS
MODULE F36 REAR ACCESSORY 20A
F23 AMPLIFIER 30A POWER OUTLET Note: Relays R1, R2, R3 and R5
are PCB mounted relays.
F24 PASSENGER FRONT 30A F37 INTERIOR 20A
/ RH REAR WINDOW ACCESSORY
F25 ELECTRIC PARK 30A POWER OUTLET
BRAKE F38 FRT / LTR 20A
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-33
Cabin fuse panel
Removing fuse panel cover

Insert a screwdriver in the slot
indicated and lever off the fuse
panel cover.
Refitting fuse panel cover
1. Insert the rear edge of the fuse
panel cover under the door seal.
2. Locate the hooks on the cover
into the end of the instrument
panel.
3. Rotate and push the cover back
into position.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-34 Vehicle Care
Cabin fuse and relay index F12 AIRBAG / AOS 10A F27 BODY CONTROL 30A
The vehicle may not be equipped F13 INSTRUMENT 15A MODULE 8
with all of the fuses, relays and CLUSTER F28 BLOWER FAN 40A
features shown.
F14 HVAC CONTROL 15A F29 ACCESSORIES 15A
Fuses MODULE F30 BODY CONTROL 15A
F1 BODY CONTROL 15A F15 RAIN SENSOR 10A MODULE 7
MODULE 1
F16 BODY CONTROL 15A
F2 DIAGNOSTIC 10A MODULE Relays
CONNECTOR R1 LOGISTICS
F17 LPG SHUT-OFF 15A
F3 LPG SHUT-OFF 30A SOLENOID R2 LPG SHUT-OFF
SOLENOID SOLENOID
F18 - -
F4 BODY CONTROL 15A R3 LPG SHUT-OFF
MODULE 2 F19 SWC BKLT 2A SOLENOID
F5 IGNITION SWITCH 2A F20 - -
F6 ELECTRIC 15A F21 - -
STEERING F22 SHUNT 2 30A
CONTROL LOCK
F23 BODY CONTROL 15A
CB7 - - MODULE
F8 - - F24 BODY CONTROL 15A
F9 - - MODULE
F10 - - F25 BODY CONTROL 10A
MODULE
F11 SHUNT 1 30A
CB26 - -
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-35
Engine compartment fuse panel
1. Main fuse/relay box

Remove the clip-on cover to
access.
Ensure the cover is replaced
securely.
2. LPG fuse/relay box
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-36 Vehicle Care
Engine compartment fuse and F13 SPOT LAMP LH 15A F28 IGN / INJ 20A
relay index EVEN - V8
F14 ABS PUMP 60A
The vehicle may not be equipped F29 ECM-V8, INJ-V6 / 15A
with all of the fuses, relays and F15 ABS VALVES 30A
EMIS 1
features shown. F16 - -
F30 - -
F1 HEATED 10A F17 - -
MIRRORS F31 - -
F18 HEATED FRONT 15A
F2 - - SEATS F32 FOG LAMPS 15A
F3 REAR DEMISTER 30A F19 - - F33 IGNITION-IP 10A
/ BODY
F4 - - F20 - -
F34 FUEL SYSTEM 10A
F5 SPOT LAMP RH 15A F21 FRONT 7.5A CONTROL
F6 DRIVER 30A PASSENGER MODULE
POWER SEAT WINDOW SWITCH
F35 - -
F7 WASHER PUMP 20A F22 REAR WIPER 20A
F36 ESCL 15A
F8 PASSENGER 30A F23 SUNROOF 20A
F37 EMIS 2 / IGN 15A
POWER SEAT F24 FRONT WIPERS 30A EVEN-V6
F9 EMER / VEH / 15A F25 AOS IGN / 5A F38 ECM-V6, INJ 20A
FT / LP IPC IGN ODD-V8
F10 - - F26 LRBEC IGN 20A F39 INCLR PUMP 10A
F11 DRIVING LAMPS 20A F27 - - F40 - -
F12 HEADLAMP 25A
WASHER
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-37
F41 TRANSMISSION 15A F51 ENGINE 15A R10 INCLR PUMP

CONTROL CONTROL R11 -
MODULE / MODULE IGN
ELECTRIC R12 REAR WIPER CONTROL
F52 BRAKE 30A
POWER VACUUM PUMP R13 FOG LAMPS
STEERING
F53 AIR 10A R14 LOW BEAM HEADLAMPS
F42 STARTER MOTOR 30A CONDITIONING R15 HIGH BEAM HEADLAMPS
F43 - - CLUTCH
R16 STARTER
F44 LH HID 15A F54 VAPORISER 10A
HEADLAMP CONTROL R17 RUN / CRANK
F45 RH HID 15A MODULE R18 BRAKE VACUUM PUMP
HEADLAMP R19 AIR-CONDITIONING
Relays
F46 LH & RH HI BEAM 10A CONTROL
R1 DRIVING LAMPS
HEADLAMP R20 HORN
R2 HEADLAMP WASHER
F47 HORN 15A
R3 REAR WASHER PUMP Note: Relays R3, R4, R12,
F48 ENGINE 60A R13 and R20 are PCB mounted
COOLING FAN R4 FRONT WASHER PUMP relays.
F49 AUTOMATIC 10A R5 REAR DEMISTER
HEADLAMP R6 FRONT WIPER CONTROL
LEVELLING
R7 WIPER SPEED
F50 TRANSMISSION 15A
CONTROL R8 ENGINE CONTROL
MODULE IGN MODULE
R9 -
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-38 Vehicle Care
LPG fuse and relay index LPG Relays Vehicle Tools

PTC1 VAPORISER HEATER 1
RELAY Tools
RELAY Headlamp tool
PTC3 SPARE
RELAY
LPG Fuses
PTC1 VAPORISER (40A)
HEATER 1
PTC2 VAPORISER (40A)
HEATER 2 The vehicle may have a torx tool for
use when replacing the front
PTC3 SPARE headlamp bulbs. See Bulb
PTC4 VAPORISER (40A) Replacement on page 10-17.
HEATER 3 This tool is stored with the
emergency tyre sealant and air
compressor kit or with the jack and
wheel wrench package.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-39
Tyre repair kit

The vehicle may have an
emergency tyre sealant and air
compressor kit in place of the jack,
tools and spare tyre.
For LPG vehicles, it is located in the Sedan shown

boot/cargo area beneath a carpet
cover. See Tyre Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 10-45.
Spare wheel – petrol
The vehicle may have a spare
For petrol vehicles, it is located in a
wheel, located in a compartment in
foam container in the boot/
the floor of the boot/cargo area. See
cargo area.
Tyre Changing on page 10-51.
Sportwagon shown
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-40 Vehicle Care
Spare wheel – LPG Tools

The vehicle may have a spare The vehicle may have the following
wheel, located on the floor of the jacks and tools.
boot/cargo area or against the side
of the boot/cargo area. See
“Procedure – LPG sedan vehicles”
or “Procedure – LPG sportwagon
vehicles” under Tyre Changing on
page 10-51.
Sportwagon shown
The LPG sportwagon spare wheel
requires inflating before use. See
“Procedure – LPG sportwagon
vehicles” under Tyre Changing on
page 10-51.
Sedan shown
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-41
Wheels and Tyres The front tyre pressures are shown

in the left column and the rear tyre
pressures are shown in the right
Tyre Pressure column.
Keep the tyres at the recommended The placard may display the tyre
pressures to avoid increased fuel size and pressures using the
consumption, uneven and following icons:
premature tyre wear.
p: Tyre size, minimum load rating,
minimum speed rating
j: Tyre pressure at normal load
k: Tyre pressure for fuel
1. Jack economy driving at normal load
2. Wheel wrench i: Tyre pressure at
3. Wheel strap – LPG sportwagon maximum load
o: Spare tyre pressures.
. Temporary spare: T155/70
R18 112M – 420 kPa (60 psi)
. Temporary spare: T205/45
The correct pressures for tyres are R17 98P – 350 kPa (51 psi)
shown on the tyre placard in the . Full size spare: set to i tyre
driver's door opening (B pillar) and pressure
in the tyre pressure table. See Tyre
Pressure on page 12-11.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-42 Vehicle Care

. Tyre pressure should be . For constant long distance or
checked when cold as tyre rough road driving, daily
Tread Depth
pressure will increase as the checking is recommended.
tyres warm up. . Tyre pressures may need to be
. Check the air pressure of tyres increased depending on the load
(including the spare) weekly, to on the vehicle. See Vehicle
ensure occupant safety, as well Weight on page 12-6.
as reducing fuel consumption . If the vehicle is loaded to half
and increasing the life of the the maximum payload, the tyres
tyres. should be inflated half way
. Check pressures when the between the minimum and
vehicle has been stationary for maximum pressures given on
over 3 hours. If tyre pressures the tyre placard.
must be checked immediately
after driving more than 2 km, Low profile sports tyres
Replace the tyres when:
increase tyre placard pressure The vehicle may have low profile
by 10%. tyres.
. They are worn to the point
where the tread indicators
. Use a tyre pressure gauge to Low profile tyres are expected to appear.
check the tyres. Simply looking experience greater wear than
at the tyres is not sufficient. conventional tyres, depending on The tyres originally fitted to the
driving conditions. vehicle have built-in tread
. Replace any valve dust caps or indicators. When only 1.5 mm of
extensions. Follow the tyre care and tread remains, these indicators
. Check the condition of the tyre maintenance instructions to show as plain bars across the
tread and inspect for stones or maximise the life of the tyres. tread pattern at regular intervals
abnormal wear. around the tyre.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-43

. The tread or sidewall is cut, split,
or cracked deep enough to
Tyre Rotation
expose the cord or fabric. It is recommended that you:
. The tyre has a bump or bulge in . Rotate tyres approximately every
it, indicating some kind of year or 15,000 km, whichever
internal damage. occurs first.
. The tyre has a puncture, cut or Driving conditions, driving
other damage which cannot be techniques, vehicle loading and
repaired because of the size or weather may warrant more
location of the damage. frequent tyre checks and
rotation.
. The cord or fabric is showing.
Front and rear tyres can wear
{ Warning differently depending on:
Do not attempt to drive on a flat . Types of roads driven on
tyre more than is necessary to . Driving habits
stop safely. Driving even a short
distance can damage the tyre and
. Tyre pressures
wheel beyond repair. Tyres which . Wheel alignment and balance
have been repaired or retreaded New tyres should be fitted in pairs to
are not capable of being driven the front. If replacing only one tyre,
safely at high speeds. Therefore, pair it on the same axle with the
their use is not recommended. least worn of the other three.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-44 Vehicle Care
Tyres with heavy treads and those Wheel Alignment and

{ Warning made for better grip in the wet,
Tyre Balance
should only be operated within the
Vehicles fitted with different size limits recommended by the Improper wheel alignment or
tyres on the front and rear axles manufacturer. balance can cause:
should not be swapped front to
rear. They may be swapped left to Tyres with a higher speed or load . Tyres to wear fast and unevenly
right. rating are acceptable, provided they . The vehicle to pull to one side
are fitted to a suitable rim size.
. Vibration
Buying New Tyres { Warning If any of these problems exists,
Refer to the tyre placard on the have the vehicle checked by a
Tyres with a lower speed or load Holden Dealer.
vehicle for tyre size and load rating.
rating are NOT acceptable for
Using a different size or type of tyre fitment to the vehicle. Tyre condition is checked when the
may affect: vehicle is serviced by a Holden
Dealer. They are able to diagnose
. Ride Replacing the factory fitted wheels any unusual signs of wear. If tyres
. Handling and tyres with non-genuine wheels are rotated, it is recommended that
and tyres may affect the New balance be checked at the
. Speedometer accuracy Vehicle Voluntary Warranty as well same time.
. Vehicle ground clearance as the vehicle's insurance policy.
. Vehicle payload capacity Contact a Holden Dealer for advice
on suitable tyres.
. Maximum vehicle speed
. Tyre clearance
. Snow chain clearance
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-45
Tyre Chains Remove large hub caps and valve Tyre Sealant and
extensions that contact parts of the
Due to lack of clearance, tyre chains chain.
Compressor Kit
cannot be fitted to vehicles The vehicle may have an
equipped with the following wheel
and tyre configurations: { Warning emergency tyre sealant and air
compressor kit, in place of the jack,
. 245/45R18 18 x 8 Tyre chains may only be used at tools and spare tyre.
. 245/40R19 19 x 8 speeds up to 50 km/h. Tyre The tyre sealant and air compressor
chains should only be used for kit can be used to temporarily seal a
. 245/40R19 19 x 8.5 short distances if the roads are small puncture up to 6 mm in the
. 245/35R20 20 x 8 not snow covered. The hard road tread area of the tyre. It can also be
surface causes rapid wear and used to inflate an underinflated tyre.
. 245/35R20 20 x 8.5
the chain may break. Tyre chain
. 275/35R19 19 x 9 The vehicle must be driven for 8 km
links should not be thicker than
after the tyre is sealed and inflated
If these vehicles need to be driven 13 mm and the clasp should be to the recommended pressure, to
in the snow, consider changing to well away from the bodywork. ensure the sealant is distributed
the following wheel and tyre Thicker chains may damage the evenly.
configuration: vehicle body.
Take the vehicle to a Holden Dealer
. 225/60R16 16 x 7 to have the tyre repaired or replaced
(suitable for V6 vehicles only) Check the tyre placard for correct as soon as possible.
tyre pressures. See Tyre Pressure
Note: Redline vehicles cannot be on page 10-41.
fitted with smaller wheels to allow
for tyre chain fitment. Whenever tyre chains are fitted,
switch off the ESC. See Electronic
Tyre chains should be fitted only on Stability Control (ESC) on
the rear wheels. page 9-18.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-46 Vehicle Care
After usage, the tyre sealant 3. Unwrap the sealant-air delivery

canister and sealant-air delivery hose (5) from the side of the
hose must be replaced as an compressor.
assembly. 4. Remove the 12 volt power
Replacement tyre sealant canisters connection (6) from the kit.
are available from a Holden Dealer. Do not connect to the power
Temporary puncture repair socket yet.
5. Unscrew the tyre valve cap
anticlockwise and remove.
6. Attach the sealant-air delivery
hose (5) onto the tyre valve.
Tyre sealant Rotate it clockwise until tight.
The sealant cannot seal sidewall 7. Switch the on/off switch (1) to
damage, large punctures, or a tyre the O position.
that has unseated from the wheel.
8. Plug the 12 volt power
Follow the safety instructions on the connection into the vehicle
tyre sealant canister. power socket. See Power
Check the expiry date on the tyre Outlets on page 5-9.
sealant canister before use. The Do not jam the 12 volt power
tyre sealant canister must be 1. All passengers must exit the
vehicle. connection cable in the door,
replaced before its expiry date. boot/tailgate or window.
There is only enough sealant to seal 2. Inspect the damaged tyre.
9. Start the engine and let it idle to
one tyre. Do not remove any objects that ensure the battery does not
have penetrated the tyre. run down.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-47
12. Inflate the tyre to the inflation The compressor may be

{ Warning pressure on the tyre placard. switched on and off until the
See Tyre Pressure on correct pressure is reached.
Do not run the engine in an page 10-41.
enclosed area or with passengers 14. Switch the on/off switch (1) to
in the vehicle. See Fuel on The pressure gauge (2) will the O position.
page 9-39 for exhaust gas initially read high while the Note: The tyre is not sealed and
warnings. compressor injects the sealant will continue to leak air until the
into the tyre. Once the sealant vehicle is driven and the sealant is
injection is complete, the distributed in the tyre.
10. Switch the on/off switch (1) to pressure will quickly drop. It will
the I position. start to rise again as the tyre
The kit will begin to inject inflates with air. { Warning
sealant and air into the tyre. If the recommended pressure
Sealant may leak from the { Warning cannot be reached after
puncture hole until the vehicle approximately 15 minutes, the
Do not over inflate tyres due to
is driven and the hole has vehicle should not be driven. The
risk of injury or damage to the
sealed. tyre is too severely damaged
tyre. Refer to the tyre placard for
11. Check the air pressure and the tyre sealant and air
recommended inflation pressure.
gauge (2). compressor kit cannot inflate the
tyre. Disconnect and stow the tyre
If there is no pressure reading 13. Switch the compressor off to sealant and air compressor kit
while the compressor is get an accurate reading. back in its original position.
running, check for leaks at the Contact a Holden Dealer.
connection between the tyre The pressure gauge (2) reads
valve and the sealant-air slightly high while the
delivery hose (5). compressor is on.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-48 Vehicle Care
21. Stop at a safe location to check

{ Warning the tyre pressure. To inflate
tyres without sealant, see
Be careful when handling the tyre “Inflating tyres without sealant”
sealant and air compressor kit as later in this section.
they may be hot after usage.
22. If the tyre pressure has fallen
more than 10 psi (68 kPa),
15. Unplug the 12 volt power below the recommended
connection (6) from the power inflation pressure, do not
socket. continue driving. Contact a
16. Rotate the sealant-air delivery Holden Dealer.
hose (5) anticlockwise and If the tyre pressure has
remove. 19. After inflating the tyre, remove
dropped less than 10 psi
the maximum speed label and
17. Replace the tyre valve cap. (68 kPa), inflate to the
place it in a visible location on
recommended inflation
18. Place the tyre sealant and air the instrument panel.
pressure.
compressor kit back in the It reminds you to drive
boot/cargo area. 23. Wipe off any sealant from the
cautiously and not to exceed
wheel, tyre or vehicle.
90 km/h until the damaged tyre
{ Warning is replaced or repaired. 24. Dispose of the used tyre
sealant canister at a Holden
Always stow the tyre sealant and 20. Drive the vehicle immediately
Dealer or in accordance with
for at least 8 km to distribute
air compressor kit in its original local and State codes and
the sealant evenly within
position. Unsecured loads practices. Replace with a new
the tyre.
increase the risk of injury during canister.
heavy braking, sudden avoidance
manoeuvres or a collision.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-49
This is a temporary puncture repair. 4. Plug the 12 volt power

Take the vehicle to a Holden Dealer connection (6) into the vehicles { Warning
to have the tyre repaired or replaced power socket. See Power
as soon as possible. Outlets on page 5-9. Do not over inflate tyres due to
risk of injury or damage to the
Inflating tyres without sealant Do not jam the 12 volt power tyre. Refer to the tyre placard for
connection cable in the door, recommended inflation pressure.
boot/tailgate or window.
5. Start the engine and let it idle to 7. Check the pressure gauge (2).
ensure the battery does not
run down. If there is no pressure reading
while the compressor is running,
{ Warning check for leaks at the connection
between the hose and the tyre
Do not run the engine in an valve.
enclosed area or with passengers 8. Inflate the tyre to the
in the vehicle. See Fuel on recommended inflation pressure
page 9-39 for exhaust gas using the air pressure gauge (2).
warnings. The pressure gauge (2) reads
1. Lift the lever (7) and pull the
air-only delivery hose (4) from slightly high while the
the bottom of the kit. 6. Switch the on/off switch (1) to compressor is on.
the I position. 9. Switch the compressor off to get
2. Remove the tyre valve cap by
rotating it anticlockwise. an accurate reading.
3. Push the air-only delivery The compressor may be
hose (4) onto the tyre valve and switched on and off until the
push the lever (7) down to correct pressure is reached.
secure.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-50 Vehicle Care
10. Switch the on/off switch (1) to Replacing the tyre sealant canister 4. Rotate the tyre sealant
the O position. canister (3) anticlockwise so the
sealant-air delivery hose (5) is
{ Warning aligned with the slot in the
compressor.
Be careful when handling the tyre 5. Lift the tyre sealant canister (3)
sealant and air compressor kit as from the compressor and
they may be hot after usage. replace with a new tyre sealant
canister, available from a Holden
11. Disconnect the 12 volt power Dealer.
connection (6) and the air-only 6. Dispose of the tyre sealant
delivery hose (4). canister at a Holden Dealer or in
12. Replace the tyre valve cap. accordance with local or State
codes and practices.
13. Place the tyre sealant and air After a temporary puncture repair,
compressor kit back in the replace the tyre sealant canister. To install a new tyre sealant
boot/cargo area. canister:
To remove the canister:
1. Align the sealant-air delivery
{ Warning 1. Unlock the air-only delivery
hose (4) from the tyre sealant
hose (5) with the slot in the
compressor.
Always stow the tyre sealant and canister by pulling up on the
air compressor kit in its original lever (7). 2. Push the tyre sealant
canister (3) down and rotate it
position. Unsecured loads 2. Pull the air-only delivery hose (4) clockwise.
increase the risk of injury during from the tyre sealant canister.
heavy braking, sudden avoidance 3. Wrap the sealant-air delivery
3. Unwrap the sealant-air delivery hose (5) around the compressor
manoeuvres or a collision. hose (5) from the air channel.
compressor.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-51
4. Push the air-only delivery

hose (4) onto the tyre sealant Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued)
canister (3) inlet.
If using a jack (or hoist) other was fully inflated when the vehicle
5. Push the lever (7) down. than the jack supplied with the was new, it can lose air over time.
vehicle, see “Trolley jack or Check the inflation pressure
Tyre Changing vehicle hoist” under Tyre regularly. If your vehicle is fitted
Changing on page 10-51. with the deflated spare wheel
{ Warning Do not start or run the engine (LPG sportwagon), this tyre is
while the vehicle is supported by stored deflated and requires
All passengers must be out of the inflation before use. See
vehicle when it is being jacked. the jack.
Do not jack a vehicle with a trailer Use the jack only for lifting the vehicles” under Tyre Changing on
attached. Remove the trailer first. vehicle when changing wheels. page 10-51.
Only jack the vehicle on hard, Do not get under a vehicle that is After installing the spare tyre on
level surfaces. supported by a jack. No person the vehicle, stop as soon as
should place any portion of their possible to check the inflation
Ensure moving parts of the jack body under a vehicle that is pressure is correct. Have the flat
are adequately lubricated supported by a jack. tyre repaired or replaced and
before use. installed back on the vehicle as
Vehicles with alloy wheels may
Use the jack only at the have a steel spare wheel. Drive soon as possible.
designated lifting points. Use in carefully and do not exceed
other locations may result in the 80 km/h if the tyre size or tread For petrol vehicles, see
vehicle falling off the jack, pattern of the spare tyre is “Procedure – petrol vehicles” later in
or damage to the vehicle. different to the other tyres on the this section.
(Continued) vehicle. Although the spare tyre
(Continued)
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-52 Vehicle Care
3. Switch the hazard warning 9. Lift the cover by attaching the

{ Warning flashers on. T-piece/hook to the boot lid/
4. Turn the ignition off and remove tailgate opening.
Redline vehicles are fitted with
different size wheels and tyres on the key from the vehicle.
the front and rear axles. 5. Place manual transmissions in
A spare wheel is the same size reverse gear and automatic
as the front wheel and tyre. If it is transmissions in P.
to be fitted to the rear in the event
of a flat tyre, the handling of the
vehicle may be compromised and
care should be taken while
operating the vehicle.
For LPG sedan vehicles, see

“Procedure – LPG sedan vehicles” Sedan shown
later in this section.
For LPG sportwagon vehicles, see
vehicles” later in this section.
6. Chock the wheel diagonally
Procedure – petrol vehicles opposite the flat tyre with a
1. Park on a hard, level surface, in suitable solid object.
a safe location. 7. Open the boot/tailgate.
2. Apply the park brake. 8. Pull up on the cover strap/
handle.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-53
12. Remove the tools. See Tools

on page 10-38.
Remove the tool container from
the vehicle if required.
13. Loosen the wheel nuts in an
anticlockwise direction, one
half to a full turn, but do not
remove the wheel nuts.
{ Caution
Sportwagon shown Ensure that the wheel wrench is
fully unfolded.
See “Spare wheel cover removal
(Sportwagon)” later in this
section.
10. Undo the retainer nut by hand
and remove the spare wheel.
11. If the vehicle has a second

retaining nut and panel,
remove.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-54 Vehicle Care
17. Slide the wheel wrench onto

{ Warning the drive nut of the jack.
Failure to position the jack as
described could cause the vehicle
to slip off the jack.
Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack. No person
should place any portion of their
body under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
14. Position the jack beneath the

jack location closest to the
wheel being changed.
The locations are identified by 18. Turn the wheel wrench through
cut-outs in the underside of the 180 degrees.
door sill.
15. Wind the jack up by hand until
it engages with the jacking
point.
Ensure that the jack is not tilted
and the base is resting
squarely on the ground.
16. Unfold the wheel wrench so it
forms a right angle.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-55
25. Remove the jack from under

the vehicle.
26. With the wheel on the ground,
use the unfolded wheel wrench
to tighten the wheel nuts in the
sequence shown.
19. Rotate the wheel wrench 27. Replace the tools, container
clockwise. and flat tyre in the boot/
20. Repeat Steps 18 to 19 until the cargo area.
bottom of the flat tyre is about 28. Tighten the upper retaining nut,
5 cm above the ground. lower retaining nut and panel
21. Remove the wheel nuts and firmly by hand.
place in a clean, dry place. 29. Replace the spare wheel cover.
22. Exchange the wheel on the { Warning
vehicle with the spare wheel.
To tighten the wheel nuts, the
23. Replace the wheel nuts and
wrench must be fully unfolded.
lightly tighten with the wheel
wrench.
24. Lower the vehicle by reversing
the jacking procedure.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-56 Vehicle Care
Spare wheel cover removal 6. Reverse the procedure to install

{ Warning (Sportwagon) the cover.
As soon as possible after Align the two locating tabs at the
changing a wheel, have the wheel forward edge of the cover with
nuts tightened with a torque the holes in the floor.
wrench to 170 ± 20 Y (Newton Procedure – LPG sedan vehicles
metres). Wheel nuts must be
tightened evenly to the correct 1. Park on a hard, level surface, in
a safe location.
torque in the sequence shown
(refer to Step 26), as wheel nuts 2. Apply the park brake.
which have not been tightened 3. Switch the hazard warning
properly could eventually allow flashers on.
the wheel to come off while the
vehicle is moving.
1. Lift the spare wheel cover.
5. Place automatic transmission
2. Attach the hook to the tailgate in P.
opening.
3. Unclip the press stud.
4. Support the cover and detach
the hook from the tailgate
opening.
5. Remove the cover.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-57
6. Chock the wheel diagonally 8. Remove the retainer by rotating 10. Remove the carpet cover.
opposite the flat tyre with a anticlockwise.
suitable solid object. 9. Slide the wheel and tyre tray
7. Open the boot. pack, containing the jack and
tools, towards the rear of the
vehicle.
11. Remove the wheel and tyre

from the tyre tray.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-58 Vehicle Care
{ Caution
Ensure the wrench is fully
unfolded.
12. Undo the jack package nut. 16. Position the jack beneath the
13. Remove the jack package jack location closest to the
cover. wheel being changed.
14. Remove the tools (wheel The locations are identified by

wrench and jack). See Tools on cut-outs in the underside of the
page 10-38. door sill.
15. Loosen the wheel nuts in an 17. Wind the jack up by hand until
anticlockwise direction, one it engages with the jacking
half to a full turn, but do not point.
remove the wheel nuts. Ensure that the jack is not tilted
squarely on the ground.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-59
19. Slide the wheel wrench onto

{ Warning the drive nut of the jack.
21. Rotate the wheel wrench

clockwise.
22. Repeat Steps 20 to 21 until the
20. Turn the wheel wrench through bottom of the flat tyre is about
180 degrees. 5 cm above the ground.
23. Remove the wheel nuts and
place in a clean, dry place.
24. Exchange the wheel on the
vehicle with the spare wheel.
lightly tighten with the wheel
nut wrench.
18. Unfold the wheel wrench so it
forms a right angle. 26. Lower the vehicle by reversing
the jacking procedure.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-60 Vehicle Care
27. Remove the jack from under

the vehicle. { Warning
28. With the wheel on the ground, As soon as possible after
use the unfolded wheel wrench changing a wheel, have the wheel
to tighten the wheel nuts in the nuts tightened with a torque
sequence shown. wrench to 170 ± 20 Y (Newton
metres) and the spare wheel
retainer tightened with a torque
wrench to 8.5 ± 0.5 Y. Wheel
nuts must be tightened evenly to
the correct torque in the
29. Replace the tools on the sequence shown (refer to
tyre tray. Step 28), as wheel nuts which
have not been tightened properly
30. Replace the jack package
could eventually allow the wheel
cover.
to come off while the vehicle is
31. Tighten the jack package nut moving.
firmly by hand.
32. Place the wheel onto the Procedure – LPG sportwagon
{ Warning tyre tray. vehicles
To tighten the wheel nuts, the 33. Replace the carpet cover. 1. Park on a hard, level surface, in
wrench must be fully unfolded. 34. Slide the wheel and tyre tray a safe location.
pack to its original position. 2. Apply the park brake.
35. Fasten the retainer by rotating 3. Switch the hazard warning
clockwise until secure. flashers on.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-61

5. Place manual transmissions in
reverse gear and automatic
transmissions in P.
7. Open the tailgate. 9. Remove the spare wheel

8. Remove the carpet cover from retainer bolt by rotating
the spare wheel. anticlockwise.
10. Remove the wheel.
6. Chock the wheel diagonally

{ Warning
opposite the flat tyre with a Take precautions when moving a
suitable solid object. heavy wheel.
11. Place the wheel on a clean, flat

area on the ground with the
face of the wheel placed down.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-62 Vehicle Care
12. Remove the jack package from 18. Pull up on the cover strap/
inside the wheel by rotating the handle.
nut anticlockwise. 19. Lift the cover by attaching the
T-piece/hook to the tailgate
opening. See “Spare wheel
cover removal (Sportwagon)”
previously in this section.
20. Remove the compressor from
beneath the carpet cover.
21. Loosen the wheel nuts in an
anticlockwise direction, one
17. Remove the jack package half to a full turn, but do not
adaptor stud from the centre of remove the wheel nuts.
the wheel, by pulling upwards.
13. Undo the jack package nut.

{ Caution
14. Remove the jack package Ensure the wrench is fully
cover. unfolded.
15. Remove the tools. See Tools
on page 10-38.
16. Flip the wheel over so the face
of the wheel is up.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-63
22. Position the jack beneath the

jack location closest to the
wheel being changed.
The locations are identified by
cut-outs in the underside of the
door sill.
23. Wind the jack up by hand until
it engages with the jacking
point.
Ensure that the jack is not tilted
squarely on the ground. 24. Unfold the wheel wrench so it
forms a right angle.
{ Warning 25. Slide the wheel wrench onto
the drive nut of the jack.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-64 Vehicle Care
27. Rotate the wheel wrench

clockwise.
28. Repeat Steps 26 to 27 until the
bottom of the flat tyre is about
5 cm above the ground.
29. Remove the wheel nuts and
place in a clean, dry place.
30. Remove the wheel from the
vehicle and replace with the
spare wheel.
26. Turn the wheel wrench through lightly tighten with the wheel (1) On/off switch
180 degrees. wrench. (2) Pressure gauge
(4) Air delivery hose
{ Warning
(6) 12 volt power connection
Ensure the spare wheel is fitted to
(7) Lever
the vehicle prior to inflation.
32. On the air compressor, lift the
lever (7) and pull the air
delivery hose (4) from the
bottom of the kit.
33. Remove the tyre valve cap on
the spare tyre by rotating
anticlockwise.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-65
34. Push the air delivery hose (4) 39. Inflate the tyre to the
onto the tyre valve and push { Warning recommended inflation
the lever (7) down to secure. pressure 350 kPa (51 psi).
Do not over inflate the tyre due to Refer to Tyre Pressure on
35. Plug the 12 volt power risk of injury or damage to
connection (6) into the vehicles page 10-41.
the tyre.
power socket. See Power Note: The pressure gauge (2)
Outlets on page 5-9. Inflate the tyre to 350 kPa reads slightly high while the
(51 psi). Refer to Tyre Pressure compressor is on.
Do not jam the 12 volt power on page 10-41 or the warning
connection cable in the door, 40. Switch the compressor off to
label on the spare wheel, for
tailgate or window. get an accurate reading.
recommended tyre inflation
36. Start the engine and let it idle pressure. The compressor may be
to ensure the battery does not switched on and off until the
run down. Stand clear of the tyre while correct pressure is reached.
inflating.
Note: Inflation may take up to
{ Warning The tyre may inflate partially 10 minutes.
off-centre. This does not affect
Do not run the engine in an performance. The tyre will 41. Switch the on/off switch (1) to
enclosed area or with passengers centralise after driving a short the O position.
in the vehicle. See Fuel on distance.
page 9-39 for exhaust gas { Warning
warnings.
38. Check the pressure gauge (2). Be careful when handling the air
If there is no pressure reading compressor kit as it may be hot
37. Switch the on/off switch (1) to after usage.
while the compressor is
the I position.
running, check for leaks at the
connection between the hose
and the tyre valve.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-66 Vehicle Care
42. Disconnect the 12 volt power

connection (6) and the air { Warning { Warning
delivery hose (4).
To tighten the wheel nuts, the Always stow the air compressor
43. Replace the tyre valve cap. wrench must be fully unfolded. kit in its original position.
44. Lower the vehicle by following Unsecured loads increase the risk
the jacking procedure in of injury during heavy braking,
reverse. sudden avoidance manoeuvres or
45. Remove the jack from under a collision.
the vehicle.
46. With the wheel on the ground, 48. Replace the tools inside the
use the unfolded wheel wrench jack package container.
to tighten the wheel nuts in the When the jack is placed in the
sequence shown. container, rotate the drive nut
of the jack, lightly, clockwise to
secure the jack.
49. Remove the strap from the jack
container.
47. Place the air compressor kit
back in the cargo area.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-67
50. Turn the jack package

container over and push the
jack package adaptor stud into
the centre of the jack package
container.
53. Feed the tip of the spare wheel 55. Place the flat tyre into the
retainer bolt through the centre cargo area, face up and close
of the jack package and into to the driver side rear corner,
the nut on the spare wheel against the spare wheel
bracket (8). bracket (8).
Fit the package to the spare
Ensure that the groove in the wheel bracket (8) with the tools
jack package adaptor stud facing the bracket (8).
aligns with the notch in the jack
54. Tighten the spare wheel
container.
retainer bolt by rotating
51. Replace the jack package clockwise.
cover.
Note: The jack package is able to
52. Tighten the jack package nut rotate around the spare wheel
firmly by hand. retainer. This is normal.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-68 Vehicle Care
{ Warning { Warning
Ensure the wheel is secured to As soon as possible after
the spare wheel bracket (8) using changing a wheel, have the wheel
the strap. Unsecured loads nuts tightened with a torque
increase risk of injury during wrench to 170 ± 20 Y (Newton
heavy braking, sudden avoidance metres) and the spare wheel
manoeuvres or a collision. retainer tightened with a torque
wrench to 12.5 ± 0.5 Y. Wheel
58. Attach the other clip over the nuts must be tightened evenly to
wheel and onto the same small the correct torque in the
56. Using the strap supplied in the bar (9) with the other clip. sequence shown (refer to
jack package, attach the clip Step 46), as wheel nuts which
Note: Adjust the length of the strap have not been tightened properly
that is furthest from the strap's
using the buckle. The strap should could eventually allow the wheel
buckle to the small bar (9) on
be shortened as much as possible.
the spare wheel bracket (8). to come off while the vehicle is
It may be easier to adjust the length
57. Wrap the strap under the wheel moving.
of the strap with the clip removed
and up between the wheel's from the spare wheel bracket (8).
spokes or through the wheel's Be sure to reattach the clip. Placing the repaired tyre onto the
centre hole. vehicle:
59. If a wheel cover or nut caps
were removed from the wheel, 1. Remove the spare tyre from the
place them in a secure place in vehicle using the jack and tools.
the vehicle with the spare 2. Refit the repaired tyre to vehicle.
wheel cover where they will not
be damaged or cause damage. 3. Place the spare tyre on a clean,
flat area on the ground, face up.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-69
4. Remove the tyre valve cap on completely upright and hard up

the spare tyre by rotating against the spare wheel
anticlockwise. bracket (8).
5. Deflate the spare tyre by fitting 12. Secure by tightening the spare
the compressor air delivery wheel retainer until the tyre
hose (4) onto the tyre valve. cannot be moved by hand.
Ensure the lever (7) is up. 13. Refit the carpet cover to the
spare wheel.
{ Warning
Keep hands and loose items, etc. { Warning
away from the tyre as it deflates. As soon as possible after
8. Refit the jack package adaptor
stud into the centre of the spare changing a wheel, have the wheel
6. When the tyre appears to be wheel. nuts tightened with a torque
deflated, lift the tyre upright and wrench to 170 ± 20 Y (Newton
squeeze down on the tyre to 9. Replace the tools and jack into metres) and the spare wheel
push out the last of the air. This the jack package container.
retainer tightened with a torque
will ensure the tyre will fit back 10. Refit the jack package wrench to 12.5 ± 0.5 Y. Wheel
onto the spare wheel container into the wheel nuts must be tightened evenly to
bracket (8). ensuring the groove in the the correct torque in the
7. Replace the tyre valve cap. adaptor stud, lines up with the sequence shown (refer to
notch in the centre of the jack Step 47), as wheel nuts which
container. have not been tightened properly
11. Refit the spare wheel into the could eventually allow the wheel
spare wheel bracket (8) to come off while the vehicle is
ensuring that the wheel is moving.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-70 Vehicle Care
Trolley jack or vehicle hoist

{ Warning
Do not jack under the suspension
control arms. Do not get under a
vehicle that is supported by a
jack. No person should place any
portion of their body under a
vehicle that is supported by
a jack.
(1) Front of vehicle To raise the vehicle, position the

jack under the centre of the
suspension cross member or hoist
pad locations.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-71
Jump Starting Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued)

Read the following warnings and
procedure in full before attempting backfire. Therefore, if the battery . Do not use open flames or
to jump start the vehicle. is flat, jump start, but do not push sparks near the battery.
start the vehicle. . Do not smoke near the
If you are still unsure about jump
starting, Holden strongly Batteries produce explosive battery.
recommends for your safety and gases, contain corrosive acids . Never use a quick charger to
that of the vehicle that you seek the and supply levels of electrical start the engine.
assistance of a suitably trained current high enough to cause
service technician. burns. Therefore, adhere to the
. The battery must be removed
from the vehicle for
If the vehicle battery is disconnected following when working near a
recharging.
or discharged, the tailgate battery:
. When refitting the battery
(Sportwagon) will not open normally. . Do not attempt jump starting
See “Manual tailgate release” under make sure the vent tube is
directly from the battery in the
Tailgate on page 2-15. correctly installed.
boot (Sedan) or cargo area
(Sportwagon). . Only use the recommended
{ Warning . Do not let the jumper lead
battery otherwise the electric
power management system
clamps touch each other or
Do not push start or tow start may not work correctly. Refer
other metal parts.
either a manual or an automatic to a Holden Dealer for battery
vehicle. If unburnt fuel were to . Do not allow the jumper leads replacement.
reach the catalytic converter and to contact any rotating engine . Wear eye protection such as
ignite, the converter could components.
safety glasses and avoid
overheat or be destroyed by (Continued) leaning over the battery.
(Continued) (Continued)
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-72 Vehicle Care
Jump starting connection posts Jump starting procedure

Warning (Continued)
The jump start positive (1) and Note: The battery in both vehicles
. Battery acid is corrosive. If it negative (2) posts are located in the must have a negative earth and a
gets on your skin, wash with engine bay on the passenger side. 12 volt rating.
plenty of water immediately. These posts are used instead of a
If it gets in your eyes you direct connection to a battery.
should not only flush with lots
The positive jump start connection
of water, but should also seek is covered by a red cap.
medical help. Battery acid
also damages paint and 1. Push the clip to release the top.
fabrics. To minimise damage, 2. Remove to expose the terminal.
wash it off immediately.
. Remove rings, metal watch
bands and other metal
jewellery before working
around the battery.
. If a permanently connected 1. Position the two vehicles so that
hands free telephone kit is they are NOT touching.
fitted to the vehicle, remove 2. Apply the park brakes.
the fuse for the telephone kit
before jump starting. 3. Put automatic transmissions in P
Remember to replace the and manual transmissions in
fuse afterwards. neutral.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-73
5. Turn off all lamps and 12. Turn off the headlamps, rear Towing the Vehicle
accessories in both vehicles, demister, air conditioning and
except the hazard warning audio system of the vehicle
flashers or any lights needed for with the flat battery. { Warning
the work area. 13. Allow both vehicles to run for at Flat tray towing is the only
6. Attach one end of the RED least 4 minutes while recommended towing procedure.
jumper lead to the jump start connected, to stabilise battery
positive post (1). voltage. A slot location is provided to
move a bogged or disabled
7. Attach the other end of the RED 14. Leave the engines running vehicle a short distance or to pull
jumper lead to the positive while removing the BLACK the vehicle onto a flat tray tow
terminal (3) of the charged negative jumper lead first,
truck.
battery. followed by the RED positive
jumper lead. Use only wheel lashings to
8. Attach one end of the BLACK
jumper lead to the negative Note: secure the vehicle to the flat tray
terminal (4) of the charged tow truck.
. Refit the red protective cap to
battery. the positive jump start post Do not attach towing equipment
9. Attach the other end of the following removal of the jump to the bumpers or brackets,
BLACK jumper lead to the jump leads. suspension or cross members.
start negative post (2). . While removing each clamp, do To prevent damage, use only
10. Start the engine in the vehicle not touch any other metal while proper towing equipment.
with the charged battery and the other end remains attached.
allow to idle for at least
4 minutes.
11. Start the engine of the vehicle
with the flat battery.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-74 Vehicle Care
Appearance Care wash that requires anything

touching the paint (other than
water). The wipers must be
Exterior Care switched off. Remove antenna and
Washing external accessories such as roof
racks etc.
The paintwork of the vehicle is
exposed to environmental If you wash your vehicle by hand,
influences. Wash and wax regularly. make sure that the insides of the
When using automatic vehicle wheel housings are also thoroughly
washes, select a programme that rinsed out.
includes waxing. Clean edges and folds on opened
Bird droppings, dead insects, resin, doors and the bonnet as well as the
Attachment locations areas they cover.
pollen and the like should be
An oval shaped slot (1) is provided cleaned off immediately, as they Have the door hinges of all doors
underneath the front of the vehicle. contain aggressive constituents greased by a Holden Dealer.
Access to the slot is via the circular which can cause paint damage.
hole in the black plastic splash
shield underneath the front of the
Failure to do so may result in
permanent damage, particularly in
{ Caution
vehicle. hot weather conditions. Do not clean the engine
A hook of the appropriate size, Road bloom is a gradual build up of compartment with a steam-jet or
attached to the cable, should be road and environmental grime. This high-pressure jet cleaner.
used in the slot. should be removed with a paint
cleaner once a year, in addition to Thoroughly rinse and chamois off
A rope cannot be threaded through normal washing.
the slot. the vehicle. Rinse chamois
If using a vehicle wash, comply with frequently. Use separate chamois
the vehicle wash manufacturer's
instructions. Never use an automatic
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-75
for painted and glass surfaces: Exterior lamps Windows and windscreen wiper
remnants of wax on the windows Headlamp and other lamp covers blades
will impair vision. are made of plastic. Do not use any Use a soft lint-free cloth or chamois
Do not use hard objects to remove abrasive, solvent based cleaners or leather together with window
spots of tar. Use tar removal spray caustic agents and do not cleaner and insect remover.
on painted surfaces. dry-clean them. . Never use abrasive cleaners to
Note: For certain body colours, Air intakes clean glass.
some variation in gloss and colour . Refer to a Holden Dealer for
may exist in the engine bay or boot Clear debris from the air intakes,
between the bonnet and windscreen windscreen washer additive.
(Sedan) and on the underside of the
vehicle. and below the front bumper, when . Old wiper blades can cause
washing the vehicle. windscreen scratching.
{ Warning Polishing and waxing Regularly inspect and
replace them.
Wax the vehicle regularly (at the
Take care when moving the latest when water no longer beads).
vehicle after washing, in case
Polishing is necessary only if the
{ Caution
water has affected the brakes.
Applying the brakes lightly will paint has become dull or if solid Do not operate the wiper blades
indicate whether they have been deposits have become attached by hand as this damages the
affected. To dry them quickly, to it. wiper drive mechanism.
lightly apply the brakes while Paintwork polish with silicone forms
maintaining a slow forward speed a protective film, making waxing When cleaning the rear window,
with a clear area ahead, until unnecessary. make sure the heating element
brake performance returns to Plastic body parts must not be inside is not damaged.
normal. treated with wax or polishing Clean smearing wiper blades with a
agents. soft cloth and window cleaner.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-76 Vehicle Care
Wheels and tyres Door drain holes Have more extensive damage or
Do not use high-pressure jet rust areas repaired by your Holden
cleaners. Dealer.
. Remove oil and grease with
soap and water or detergent.
{ Caution
. Do not use petrol to clean tyres. Do not spill coolant on the
.
Use a good quality tyre and
bumper shine if required.
. A good quality wheel cleaner
can be used for cleaning alloy
wheels. Underbody
. Do not use abrasive cleaners. Substances can cause rust under
. Clear drain holes at the bottom the vehicle.
of the door panels from dirt and . Hose the underbody with clean
other foreign materials which water whenever the vehicle is
could trap water inside the washed.
panels.
. Where the vehicle is exposed
. Clean clogged drain holes with a to heavy concentrations of
plastic pin or peg. corrosive materials, inspect and
. Avoid scratching the paint work. wash the complete underbody at
least once each year, preferably
Paintwork damage after winter exposure.
Rectify minor paintwork damage
with a touch-up pen before rust
forms.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Vehicle Care 10-77

. For deeply embedded soil and
Interior Care Interior and upholstery
dirt, use a leather cleaner.
Only clean the vehicle interior,
{ Warning including the instrument panel
fascia and panelling, with a dry cloth
. After using a leather cleaner/
revitaliser, apply a leather
Many cleaning products are toxic, or interior cleaner. protector.
flammable or may damage the The instrument panel should only be A leather protector is designed
interior. When cleaning the cleaned using a soft damp cloth. to repel dirt and provides water
interior, avoid volatile cleaners resistance.
such as acetone, lacquer Clean fabric upholstery with a
vacuum cleaner and brush. Remove Note:
thinners, enamel reducers, nail
polish removers, or cleaners such stains with an upholstery cleaner. . Clean and protect leather at
as laundry soaps, bleaches or Clean seat belts with a mild, least twice a year.
reducing agents. Never use non-abrasive soap and lukewarm . Do not use synthetic cloths or
carbon tetrachloride, petrol or water. brushes.
naphtha for any cleaning purpose. After washing, thoroughly, sponge . Leather is a natural product and
Ensure that the vehicle is well the solution out of the belts. may have natural markings,
ventilated while using any variation in graining, colouring
cleaners and always follow the Leather
and wrinkling.
cleaning product manufacturer's Clean regularly using a leather .
recommendations. Water based revitaliser or mild detergent. Leather has an elasticity and
may stretch. This is a natural
cleaners, rather than solvent . Apply revitaliser using a lint free characteristic of leather.
based cleaners, are cloth and rub it onto the leather.
recommended. . Do not saturate the leather with
Steam cleaning of seats is not the cleaner and do not pour on
recommended. directly.
. Allow to dry naturally.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
10-78 Vehicle Care
Original equipment and Genuine

{ Caution { Warning Holden Accessory floor mats are
designed for your vehicle. If the
Close Velcro fasteners as open If a floor mat is the wrong size or floor mats need replacing, it is
Velcro fasteners on clothing could is not properly installed, it can recommended that Holden
damage seat upholstery. interfere with the accelerator approved floor mats be purchased.
pedal and/or brake pedal. Non-genuine floor mats may not fit
Plastic and rubber parts Interference with the pedals can properly and may interfere with the
cause unintended acceleration accelerator or brake pedal. Always
Plastic and rubber parts can be and/or increased stopping check that the floor mats do not
cleaned with the same cleaner as distance which can cause a crash interfere with the pedals.
used to clean the body. Use interior and injury.
cleaner if necessary. Do not use any . Use the floor mat with the
other agent. Avoid solvents and Make sure the floor mat does not correct side up. Do not turn
petrol in particular. Do not use high interfere with the accelerator or it over.
pressure jet cleaners. brake pedal. . Do not place anything on top of
the driver side floor mat.
Floor Mats . Use only a single floor mat on
. Pull up the small peg at the the driver side.
corner to remove the mat. . Do not place one floor mat on
. Push the mat down onto the peg top of another.
to replace.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information See your Service/Warranty Booklet

for the service schedules and for
Maintenance Service Information
more information.
In order to ensure economical and

General Information safe vehicle operation and to
Service Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 maintain the value of your vehicle,
it is of vital importance that all
Recommended Fluids, maintenance work is carried out at
Lubricants, and Parts the proper intervals as specified.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Maintenance Replacement
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
11-2 Service and Maintenance
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Engine Type 3.0L (SIDI) direct 3.6L (SIDI) direct 3.6L LPG 6.0L Generation
injection V6 injection V6 multi-point IV V8
injection V6
Engine oil specification 5W-30; f (dexos™ 1)
Coolant specification 50% clean fresh water and 50% Dexcool ® anti-freeze coolant, conforming to
specification number GM6277M
Automatic transmission Dexron® VI
fluid
Manual transmission - SAE 75W-90 GL5 - Holden part number
fluid 19264570
Differential oil Fuchs Titan 5010D Castrol SAF Carbon Modified SAE 75W/85 API GL5 GM
75W/85 GL5
Brake and clutch fluid DOT 4 Hydraulic brake fluid, conforming to specification number GMW3356
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Battery Maintenance free 12 V, with ventilation system.
LN2 460 cold cranking amps (CCA), 85 minutes reserve capacity.
The vehicle may have an LN3 battery.
LN3 600 cold cranking amps (CCA), 120 minutes reserve capacity.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Service and Maintenance 11-3
{ Warning
Use only a manufacturer
recommended battery with a
ventilation system. Use of other
batteries may affect the electric
power management system and
allow explosive gases into the
vehicle cabin. Refer to a Holden
Dealer or authorised repairer.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
11-4 Service and Maintenance
2 NOTES
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Identification Plate . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Vehicle Data
Engine Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Vehicle Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Additional Weights . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Vehicle Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Each vehicle has its own,
Capacities and
individual International Standards
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
Organisation Vehicle Identification
Tyre Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Number (ISOVIN), which is shown
behind the windscreen on the left
side and under the right front seat,
under a carpet flap.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
12-2 Technical Data
Identification Plate
Compliance label
This label shows the vehicle make,

model series, date of manufacture,
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), LPG compliance plate Cooling system/air conditioning
approved seating capacity and label
LPG vehicles have an LPG
approval number.
compliance plate. Label (2) shows the warnings for the
The plate (1) shows the installation air conditioning and cooling system
date, plate number, DS exemption as well as information on the air
number, cylinder (LPG tank) conditioning refrigerant and
number, Vehicle Identification compressor oil.
Number (VIN) and engine number.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Technical Data 12-3
Body and option plate Engine number location

Plate (3) shows the model
identification, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), paint and trim colour
combination, air conditioning, paint
number, engine, transmission, axle
ratio options, suspension options
(where applicable) and build date.
V8 engine
V6 engine The engine number is located at the
The engine number is located at the rear of the engine on the
rear of the engine on the passenger side.
passenger side. The engine number can be viewed
The engine number can be viewed from the top, using a mirror, after
from the top, using a mirror if the engine cover has been
necessary. removed. See Engine Cover on
page 10-5.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
12-4 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Engine Data
Engine type 3.0L (SIDI) direct 3.6L LPG 3.6L (SIDI) direct 6.0L Generation
injection V6 multi-point injection V6 IV V8
injection V6
Engine 2997 cc 3564 cc 3564 cc 5967 cc
Engine power and Please refer to holden.com.au
torque
Fuel Petrol LPG Petrol Petrol
Octane rating (RON) Unleaded regular 91 — Unleaded regular 91 or higher
or higher
Ethanol compatibility E10, E85 — E10, E85 E10, E85
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Technical Data 12-5
Air conditioning specifications
Refrigerant type R-134A

Refrigerant charge 480 g +/- 20 g
Compressor oil type Polyalkylene glycol (Holden part no. 90510419)
{ Warning
The air conditioning system
should be serviced by qualified
personnel only. Improper service
methods may cause personal
injury.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
12-6 Technical Data
Vehicle Weight
Overloading is a safety hazard and could also shorten the life of the vehicle.
Maximum vehicle carrying capacity
Carrying capacity (occupants, accessories and

luggage) (kg)
Sedan 480
Sportwagon
Evoke 550
Evoke LPG 490
SV6, SS, SS V, Calais, Calais V-Series 480
Note: . Axle limits must not be Axle loads

. The carrying capacity assumes exceeded. See “Axle loads”
later in this section. Maximum front and rear axle
that no accessories are fitted. loads
If accessories are fitted, the
carrying capacity must be Do not exceed the maximum axle
decreased accordingly. See loads, including the weight of any
Additional Weights on options or accessories fitted to the
page 12-8. vehicle. Take the roof rack load into
account when determining the rear
axle load. Weigh at a weighbridge if
unsure.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Technical Data 12-7
Front axle load (kg) Rear axle load (kg)

V6 V8 V6 V8
Sedan
Petrol 1080 1100 1300 1300
LPG 1080 — 1350 —
Sportwagon
Evoke, SV6 LPG 1080 — 1425 —
SV6, Calais 1080 — 1370 —
SS, SS V — 1100 — 1370
Calais V-Series 1080 1100 1370 1367
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
12-8 Technical Data
Note: If the vehicle is fitted with Additional Weights D. Available luggage capacity
Genuine Holden Accessory 20 inch (550 – 140 – 25 = 385 kg*)
wheels and Holden recommended Example loading guide
tyres, the maximum rear axle load is *Subject to axle loads not being
1,300 kg. exceeded.
Some vehicles may not be suitable Example 2:
for Genuine Holden Accessory A. Vehicle carrying capacity
wheel fitment. Contact your Holden (example 550 kg)
Dealer.
B. Subtract occupant weight
(example 5 x 70 kg = 350 kg)
C. Subtract mass of fitted
accessories (see table below)
(example 50 kg)
D. Available luggage capacity
(550 – 350 – 50 = 150 kg*)
Example 1:
*Subject to axle loads not being
A. Vehicle carrying capacity exceeded.
(example 550 kg)
Accessory mass examples
B. Subtract occupant weight
(example 2 x 70 kg = 140 kg) Towbar 25.0 kg
C. Subtract mass of fitted Roo bar 25.0 kg

accessories (see the following All-weather floor mats 4.5 kg
table) (example 25 kg )
Vehicle safety triangle 6.0 kg
Roof racks 5.0 kg
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Technical Data 12-9
Vehicle Dimensions
Dimensions (mm)
Length Width Width Height Wheel Front Rear Front Rear
excl. incl. base overhang overhang track track
mirrors mirrors
Sedan
Evoke 4947 1898 2099 1471 2915 869 1163 1602 1619
SV6, SS, SS V 4966 1898 2099 1471 2915 890 1160 1590 1607
Calais, Calais 4950 1898 2099 1471 2915 873 1162 1590 1607
V-Series
Sportwagon
Evoke 4919 1898 2099 1474 2915 869 1136 1602 1619
SV6, SS, SS V 4939 1898 2099 1474 2915 890 1134 1590 1607
Calais, Calais 4924 1898 2099 1474 2915 873 1136 1590 1607
V-Series
The above figures are based on the design dimensions.

6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
12-10 Technical Data
Capacities and Specifications

Engine type 3.0L (SIDI) direct 3.6L LPG multi-point 3.6L (SIDI) direct 6.0L Generation IV V8
injection V6 injection V6 injection V6
Refill engine oil 7.0 L 7.2 L 7.0 L 7.6 L
including filter
(approximately)
Coolant 10.5 L 10.8 L 10.3 L (manual) 10.2 L (manual)
(approximately) 10.1 L (automatic) 10.0 L (automatic)
Fuel tank 71.0 L 84.4 L 71.0 L 71.0 L
Note: The usable LPG fuel tank capacity is nominally 84.4 L at 15°C vehicle/LPG tank temperature when filled with
100% propane.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Technical Data 12-11
Tyre Pressure
Sedan
Evoke Sedan
p Tyre size Recommended pressure
Wheel size and
profile
j Normal load k Eco normal load i Maximum load o Spare
Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear —
kPa PSI kPa PSI kPa PSI kPa PSI kPa PSI kPa PSI kPa PSI
225/60 R16 SL 98V 250 36 250 36 270 39 270 39 270 39 300 44 300 44
16 X 7.0 J
T155/70 R18 — — — — — — — — — — — — 420 60
18 X 4.0 T
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
SV6 Sedan
p Tyre size Wheel size and Recommended pressure
profile
j Normal load i Maximum load o Spare
Front Rear Front Rear —
kPa PSI kPa PSI kPa PSI kPa PSI kPa PSI
245/45 R18 XL 100V 18 x 8.0 J 250 36 250 36 270 39 300 44 300 44
T155/70 R18 18 x 4.0 T — — — — — — — — 420 60
SS Sedan
profile
245/45 R18 XL 100V 18 x 8.0 J 250 36 250 36 270 39 300 44 300 44
T155/70 R18 18 x 4.0 T — — — — — — — — 420 60
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
SS V Series Sedan
profile
245/40 R19 XL 98W 19 x 8.5 J 250 36 250 36 270 39 300 44 300 44
T155/70 R18 18 x 4.0 T — — — — — — — — 420 60
SS V Series Redline Sedan

profile
245/40 R19 XL 98Y 19 x 8.5 J 250 36 — — 270 39 — — 300 44
275/35R19 XL100Y 19 x 9.0 J — — 250 36 — — 300 44 — —
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Calais Sedan
profile
235/50 R18 XL 101W 18 x 8.0 J 250 36 250 36 270 39 300 44 300 44
T155/70 R18 18 x 4.0 T — — — — — — — — 420 60
Calais V Series Sedan

profile
245/40 R19 XL 98W 19 x 8.0 J 250 36 250 36 270 39 300 44 300 44
T155/70 R18 18 x 4.0 T — — — — — — — — 420 60
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Sportwagon
Evoke Sportwagon
p Tyre size Recommended pressure
Wheel size and
profile
j Normal load k Eco normal load i Maximum load o Spare
Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear —
kPa PSI kPa PSI kPa PSI kPa PSI kPa PSI kPa PSI kPa PSI
225/60 R16 SL 98V 250 36 250 36 270 39 270 39 270 39 300 44 300 44
16 X 7.0 J
T155/70 R18 — — — — — — — — — — — — 420 60
18 X 4.0 J
T205/45 R17 98P* — — — — — — — — — — — — 350 51
17 X 7.0 J
* LPG only
* LPG only
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
SV6 Sportwagon
profile
245/45 R18 XL 100V 18 x 8.0 J 250 36 250 36 270 39 300 44 300 44
T155/70 R18 18 x 4.0 T — — — — — — — — 420 60
T205/45 R17 98P* 17 X 7.0 J — — — — — — — — 350 51
* LPG only
SS Sportwagon
profile
245/45 R18 XL 100V 18 x 8.0 J 250 36 250 36 270 39 300 44 300 44
T155/70 R18 18 x 4.0 T — — — — — — — — 420 60
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
SS V Series Sportwagon
profile
245/40 R19 XL 98W 19 x 8.5 J 250 36 250 36 270 39 300 44 300 44
T155/70 R18 18 x 4.0 T — — — — — — — — 420 60
SS V Series Redline Sportwagon

profile
245/40 R19 XL 98Y 19 x 8.5 J 250 36 — — 270 39 — — 300 44
275/35R19 XL100Y 19 x 9.0 J — — 250 36 — — 300 44 — —
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Calais Sportwagon
profile
235/50 R18 XL 101W 18 x 8.0 J 250 36 250 36 270 39 300 44 300 44
T155/70 R18 18 x 4.0 T — — — — — — — — 420 60
Calais V Series Sportwagon

profile
245/40 R19 XL 98W 19 x 8.0 J 250 36 250 36 270 39 300 44 300 44
T155/70 R18 18 x 4.0 T — — — — — — — — 420 60
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
Customer Information 13-1
Customer Customer Information By now you should have

satisfaction. If not, the Holden
Information Customer Satisfaction
Customer Care office is at
your disposal.
Procedure
Customer Information We want you to be happy with your Customer Care
Customer Assistance
Customer Satisfaction new vehicle, together with the Offices
Offices
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 people you deal with while you have
Customer Care the vehicle. Australia
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 The Holden Customer Care
Normally, any problems with the
sales, operation, servicing, parts/ representatives can be telephoned
accessories or the validity of original from anywhere within Australia for
equipment supplied with your only the cost of a local call.
vehicle will be handled by your The contact number is:
Holden Dealer Sales and Service
1800 033 349
Department.
Naturally, telephoning
Naturally, telephoning is is the
the
We realise however that, with the
quickest and
quickest and the
the best
best way
way to to
best intentions, misunderstandings
contact. However,
contact. However, ifif you
you prefer
prefer to
to
sometimes occur.
write to
write theoraddress
email Holden,
is: your letter
Therefore, we suggest you discuss should
The be addressed to:
Manager
any concern with one of the Holden The Manager
Holden Customer Care Centre
Dealer management people. Holden Customer
GPO Box 1714 Care Centre
If you have not received satisfaction GPO Box 1714
Melbourne 3001
from the Sales Manager or Service Melbourne 3001
Manager, go to the General holdencustomercare@gm.com
Manager or to the Dealer Principal.
6070612) - 2014 - CRC - 4/2/13
13-2 Customer Information
Your letter should clearly outline Most of this information will be Applicable details for New Zealand
your concern or query and include: found on the Vehicle Identification are set out in the Holden Warranty
. Your name and address Certificate, located inside the front and Owner Assistance Information
cover of the Service/Warranty booklet enclosed in the New
. Telephone numbers, both private Booklet in your vehicle's glove box. Zealand glove box wallet.
and business
Before you write however, New Zealand Assistance can be
. Servicing dealer's name and remember that the telephone is the reached on:
address quicker and more efficient means of 0800 HOLDEN (0800 465 336)
. Vehicle model communication.
This number provides access to
. Vehicle identification number New Zealand New Zealand Roadside Assistance
(I.S.O.V.I.N.), refer to the inside The information in this Owner's as well as New Zealand Customer
front cover of the Service/ Handbook applies primarily to Care.
Warranty Booklet in your Australian Holden vehicles and
vehicle's glove box If you prefer to write the address is:
there may be some differences to
. Date of purchase the Warranty and Owner Assistance The Manager
provisions for New Zealand. Holden Customer Care Centre
. Current odometer reading PO Box 11195
Ellerslie
Auckland 1542
INDEX i-1
A Airbags Automatic
Curtain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Acceleration Light
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14 Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Liquefied Petroleum
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Gas (LPG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15 Automatic Transmission
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13 Shift Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Add-On Electrical
Alarm Transmission Display . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 Auxiliary
Additional Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-38
Adjustable Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Antilock Brake
Adjustments
Seat, Initial Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 B
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Advanced Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-36
Appearance Care Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74 Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Air Conditioning Regular
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77 Voltage and Charging
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Armrest Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Air Filter, Passenger
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Audio Bluetooth Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-39 Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Airbag System
Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27 Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-27 Brake
What Will You See after an
CD/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-29 Parking, Electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-30 System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-17
Audio System
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-3
i-2 INDEX
Brakes Cautions, Danger, and Configure Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55

Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Control System
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16 CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27 Emission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29 Controls
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27 Centre Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-4 Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Chains, Tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45 Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . 4-8, 4-13
Bulb Replacement Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-16 Coolant
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Check Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Front Turn Signal Lamps . . . 10-21 Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Engine Temperature
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 10-17, 10-18 Child Restraint Installation Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Interior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Cooling System
Number Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-27 Child Restraints Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22 Infants and Young Cover
Buying New Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19 Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Installation Locations . . . . . . . . .3-22 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5
C ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-31 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Capacities and Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10 Cleaning Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Carbon Monoxide Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74 Curtain Airbag System . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77 Customer Assistance
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-1
Cargo Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Customer Satisfaction
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Competitive Driving Mode . . . . . 9-20 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Compressor Kit, Tyre Customer-installed
Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45 Equipment, Notices . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
INDEX i-3
D Driving Engine
Competitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20 Check and Service Engine
Danger, Warnings, and
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
DVD/CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29 Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-4
Database Coverage
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61
Daytime Running E Coolant Temperature
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . 9-15 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Electric Parking Brake Light . . . 5-17 Cooling System Messages . . .5-28
Destination, Navigation . . . . . . . . 7-47
Electrical Equipment, Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5
Devices
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53 Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-38
Electrical System Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-32
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Dimensions
Electronic Stability Control . . . . . 9-18 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-9
Electronic Stability Control Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Displays
(ESC)/Traction Control Engine Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-9
System (TCS) Indicator Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Door
Electronic Stability Control Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27 Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Ajar Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Emission Control System . . . . . . 10-1 F
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Emission Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Fixed Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Driver Information Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4
Centre (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Flat Tyre
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
i-4 INDEX
Fluid G Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Gauges
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Engine Coolant
Fog Lamps Daytime Running
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Forward Collision Alert High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
(FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Forward Collision Alert Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-21
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
(FCA) Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Front Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Warning Lights and
Front Fog Lamp High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-16
General Information
Front Seat Position Seats Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9, 5-6
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 How to Wear Seat Belts
Global Positioning
Front Seats Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
System (GPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 I
Front Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . 10-21 Identification Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44 H Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Infants and Young Children,
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Hands-Free Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-20 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4
Info
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Quick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Head-up Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
INFOCARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Information
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
INDEX i-5
Information on Loading the Lamps (cont'd) Lights

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Antilock Brake System
Instrument Panel Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-16 Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-17
Internet Radio Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Pandora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18 Number Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii, 7-1 On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
ISOFIX Child Restraint Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . .5-17
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Sun Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22 Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
J Lane Departure Warning . . . . . . . 9-34 High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71 Lane Departure Warning High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Lane Departure Warning . . . . . .5-18
Light Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
K Electronic Stability Control Seat Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-29 (ESC)/Traction Control Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Keyless Entry System (TCS) Indicator Service Vehicle Soon . . . . . . . . .5-17
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-5 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Lighting Liquefied Petroleum Gas
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 (LPG) Acceleration Light . . . . . 5-20
L Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Loading the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Lamps Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
i-6 INDEX
Locks Messages (cont'd) N

Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Navigation
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-47
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-45
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-20 Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Using the System . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-40
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Net
M Object Detection System . . . . .5-30
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Maintenance Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Air Conditioning Regular Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
New vehicle running-in . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Notices for
Maintenance Schedule Starting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Customer-installed
Recommended Fluids and Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-16 Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 O
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Object Detection System
Map Data Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61
Mirrors Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18 Object Detection, Side Blind
Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Manual Rear view . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19 Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Menu
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-55
Tilt in Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19 Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Messages
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30 Oil
Battery Voltage and
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-18
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-28
INDEX i-7
Operation, Infotainment Power (cont'd) Recommended

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Retained Accessory (RAP) . . . . 9-8 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43
Other Service Items Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Recommended Fluids and
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . 8-1 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20 Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Outlets Pregnancy, Using Seat Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Pressure Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Overview, Infotainment Tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-11 Replacement Parts
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Problems with Route Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
P Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-18
Pandora Internet Radio . . . . . . . . 7-18 Q Replacing Seat Belt System
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Quick Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Park Assist.
Parking Assist . . . ...................................9-26 9-26 Restraints
Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36 R Retained Accessory
Passenger Compartment Air Radios
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15 Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Personalisation CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-29
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
Phone
Phone Electronic Stability (ESC) . . . . .9-18
Bluetooth. Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Bluetooth .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..7-69 7-69
Rear Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Hands-Free. . . . . . . . . . .
Hands-Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-75 . . . . . . . . . 7-75 Roof
Text Messaging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-77 Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Power Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Power
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Mirrors. Rear view Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Outlets . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2-18
. 5-9 Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-31
Rotation, Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Outlets. . . . . Battery
Protection, . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 6-7 5-9
Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-8
i-8 INDEX
S Service Storage
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30 Storage Areas
Sealant Kit, Tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Vehicle Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Seat Belts
Service and Maintenance Centre Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Service Information . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Service Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
How to Wear Seat Belts
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Shift Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Information on Loading the
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Side Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-12
Side Blind Zone Alert . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Three-Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Signals, Turn and Sunglasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-12
Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Sun Visor Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Seats
Specifications and Sunglass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Symbols, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 System
Position, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Forward Collision
Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-3
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Alert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Starting the Vehicle Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Security
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Steering
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . 7-7
INDEX i-9
T Transmission Display . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 V

Tachometer. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 5-13 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Tachometer 5-13 Vehicle
Tail lamps. Turn and Lane-Change
Tail lamps .........................................10-22 10-22 Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Tailgate. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2-15
2-15 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Tailgate Identification
Technical Data Tyre Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Technical Data Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Tyre Tyres
Tyre Pressure.
Pressure ..............................12-11 .12-11 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Buying New Tyres . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Text Messaging.Systems
Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2-17 7-77 Personalisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Theft-Deterrent
Three-Point Seat Systems.
Belt . . . .............. 3-10 2-17 Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-60
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Three-Point
Time . . . . . . . Seat
. . . . . .Belt. . . . . .. .... ...............3-10 5-9 Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Time. ...................................................10-38
Tools . . 5-9 Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Sealant and
Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-38
Towing Service Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Towing
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Wheel Alignment and
Trailer.
Trailer .Sway . . . . . .Control
. . . . . . . .(TSC) . . . . . . ......9-53 .9-47 Vehicle Care
Tyre Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Trailer
VehicleSway . . . . .Control
. . . . . . . .(TSC). . . . . . . .... 10-73 . 9-53 Tyre Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Traction Vehicle Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Traction
Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-17 U Vehicle Identification
Control
Off LightSystem . . . . . . .(TCS). . . . . . . .................5-19 9-17 Updates Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-2
Off Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Trailer Map Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-61 Vehicle Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Trailer
Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . .9-53 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 Ventilation
Sway
TowingControl. . . . . . .(TSC).
. . . . . . .....................9-47 9-53 Using the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Adjustable Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Transmission Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Fixed Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62
Automatic.
Messages . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .5-31 . . 9-9
Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
i-10 INDEX
W Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-22

Windows
Warning
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Warning Light
Windscreen
Forward Collision
Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Alert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Wipers
Warning Lights, Gauges,
Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Weights
Additional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-8
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-6
Wheels
Alignment and Tyre
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

HOLDEN - VF Commodore Sedan and Wagon - 2014 - Owner Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

HOLDEN - VF Commodore Sedan and Wagon - 2014 - Owner Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

VF SEDAN & SPORTWAGON

VF SEDAN & SPORTWAGON

Change of name, address or ownership

© 2014 GM Holden Ltd

MY14_VF_Sedan&Sportwagon_IFC.indd 1 23/06/2014 1:53:22 PM

2014 Holden VF Sedan and Sportwagon

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1

2014 Holden VF Sedan and Sportwagon

Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-17 Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1

In Brief Initial Drive Door Locks

Seat Adjustment Head Restraint

Seat Belts Mirror Adjustment Exterior mirrors

Pull the metal tongue across your

Steering Wheel 3. Move the lever up to lock.

1. Move the lever down to unlock.

Instrument Panel Overview

Interior Lighting Exterior Lighting High/low beam

+: On/off O: Off High beam: Push lever

Turn signals Hazard warning flasher Horn

Washer and Wiper See Windscreen Wiper/Washer on Parking

Transmission While in Sport Shift mode, move the Getting Started

Starting the engine ON: When the key is in the ON

Starting the engine with the

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, and Vehicle Security

2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-3

2-4 Keys, Doors, and Windows

If you are still having trouble, If a key is lost, a replacement can

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-5

2-6 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Pressing K will also unlock the The vehicle can be customised to

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-7

Keyless Unlocking/Locking from vehicle

2-8 Keys, Doors, and Windows

To start the vehicle: Manual transmission: With the

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-9

2-10 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Conditions in Which Remote Start Door Locks Danger (Continued)

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-11

. To lock, insert the key into the

2-12 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-13

The locks are accessible when the Doors Key button

2-14 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Boot release button

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-15

The release handle is also visible Keyless tailgate opening

2-16 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Closing the tailgate Note: It is not necessary to slam

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-17

The alarm automatically arms after The alarm automatically disarms.

2-18 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-19

Push the lever on the lower edge of

2-20 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-21

2-22 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Assist grips Roof

Assist grips are provided above the

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-23

Opening the sunroof Closing the sunroof

2-24 Keys, Doors, and Windows